NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: General CIA Records
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
• Release Decision: RIPPUB
• Original Classification: C
• Document Page Count: 186
• Document Creation Date: November 9, 2016
• Document Release Date: September 16, 1998
• Sequence Number: 1
• Publication Date: June 1, 1951
• Content Type: NIS

Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
WARNING
This document contains information affecting the national defense of
the United States, within the meaning of Title 18, Sections 793 and 794,
of the U. S. Code, as amended. Its transmission or revelation of its
contents to or receipt by an unauthorized person is prohibited by law.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
.ctID to?,
Security Information
RECUKU Cry
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
4 TURD CO
R0C v
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NATURE, PURPOSE, AND SCOPE
OF THE NIS PROGRAM
Washington, D. C.
JOB NO1 lY_.Q/1Z s
'op 'P(
DOCUMENT NO. 1
NO CHANGE IN CLASS t
(~ DECASSIRED
CI ASS. CHANGED TO: TS S C
NEXT HLVILW DATE:
AUTH: HR 70 2
DATE: ,-6#_ REVIEWER: E,"
TOTAL [ OCS HEr1 IN _I_
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Nature, Purpose, and Scope of the NIS Program
Authority for the NIS Program
The National Intelligence Survey (NIS) Pro-
gram was established pursuant to National Secu-
rity Council Intelligence Directive No. 3, 13 Janu-
ary 1948. This directive provides that :
An outline of all basic intelligence required
by the Government shall be prepared by the Cen-
tral Intelligence Agency (CIA) in collaboration
with other appropriate agencies.
This outline shall be broken down into
chapters, sections, and subsections which shall be
allocated as production and maintenance respon-
sibilities to CIA and those other Government agen-
cies best qualified by reason of their intelligence
requirements, production capabilities, and domi-
nant interest to assume these responsibilities.
This basic intelligence shall be compiled and
continuously maintained in National Intelligence
Survey to cover foreign countries, areas, or broad
special subjects, as appropriate.
The NIS shall be disseminated in such form
as may be determined by the Director of Central
Intelligence (DCI) and the agencies concerned.
The DCI shall be responsible for coordinat-
ing the production and maintenance and for ac-
complishing the editing, publication, and dissemi-
nation of the NIS and shall make such requests
on the agencies as are necessary for the proper
development and maintenance of the NIS.
Departments or agencies to be called on
for contributions to this undertaking may include
agencies other than those represented permanently
in the Intelligence Advisory Committee (IAC).
Basic Concepts of the NIS Program
The NIS is a concise digest of basic intelli-
gence required by the Department of Defense for
strategic planning and high level operational plan-
ning, and by the Department of State for use in
formulating and executing U.S. foreign policy. It
also serves other Government agencies which re-
quire it for the accomplishment of their missions.
In general, the intelligence contained in NIS is
concerned with the relatively permanent features
and fundamental characteristics of a country, area,
or broad special subject, and covers such fields as
the geographical, political, economic, military,
scientific, and sociological aspects of the country
or area or the fundamental aspects of the broad
special subject.
The NIS Program has two phases: 1) the initial
production of NIS on countries or areas in accord-
ance with JCS priorities and Intelligence Agency
capabilities and 2) the continuous maintenance
of such NIS.
The objective of the first phase is to pro-
duce integrated basic intelligence studies of all
pertinent aspects of the countries or areas within
the limits of available information and intelligence
on countries or areas.
The objective of the second phase is to keep
up to date the basic intelligence contained in
the published NIS, to fill gaps in this intelligence,
and to improve the presentation of material in NIS
originally produced. It is the responsibility of
agencies having dominant interest to place each
NIS element actively on a maintenance basis as
soon as the element has been initially produced.
This phase of the program is to continue indefi-
nitely. Revisions will be published as required.
Both phases of the NIS Program require an
over-all collection effort covering all important
foreign countries and areas of the world simul-
taneously.
If information is available to undertake an
NIS of lower priority than one on which ade-
quate material is not available, the NIS of lower
priority will be produced and will not be held in
abeyance pending the availability of material for
the NIS of higher priority.
While the aim of the collection effort will
be to enable the production of complete and re-
liable published NIS, it must be recognized that
the production and maintenance program requires
information in greater detail than the intelligence
which appears in the published NIS.
New information will be continuously processed
so that the intelligence on hand will be constantly
up to date and ready for use.
The NIS Program must be flexible in order
to meet the basic intelligence requirements of the
Joint Chiefs of Staff. To this end it may be neces-
sary to produce and disseminate separate chapters
or sections of any NIS.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
NATURE, PURPOSE, AND SCOPE
Standard Instructions for NIS
The Standard Instructions for National Intelli-
gence Surveys contain outlines of basic intelligence
requirements, allocations of responsibility for pro-
duction, and instructions for the production of this
intelligence. These Standard Instructions were
prepared by a joint committee of representatives
of the Director of Central Intelligence and the
Chiefs of Intelligence Agencies of the Departments
of State, the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force;
were concurred in by the Intelligence Advisory
Committee; and were approved by the National
Security Council.
The outlines and outline guides are so drafted
as to cover all the basic intelligence aspects of the
most complex foreign country or area. However,
the appropriate treatment of any topic included in
the outlines and outline guides is determined by
the sense in which and the extent to which that
topic applies to the particular country or area
under consideration. Thus, the outlines and out-
line guides should be adapted to the country or
area on which the NIS is being produced.
The Standard Instructions prescribe the basic
procedures to be followed in producing and main-
taining all NIS. They cannot, however, cover all
contingencies. Hence, when cogent reasons exist,
the instructions may be modified or supplemented
to permit appropriate treatment of any topic.
Content of an NIS
An NIS is divided into chapters, each of
which treats a major functional aspect of the coun-
try or area under consideration. These chapters
are divided into sections, each of which treats a
major subdivision of the field covered by the chap-
ter. The section is so designed as to permit it to
serve as the basic unit of production and mainte-
nance and so enhance the flexibility of the NIS
Program. The NIS chapters are as follows:
Chapter
I
Brief
Chapter
II
Military Geography
Chapter
III
Transportation and Telecommunica-
tions
Chapter
IV
Sociological
Chapter
V
Political
Chapter
VI
Economic
Chapter
VII
Scientific
Chapter
VIII
Armed Forces
Chapter
IX
Map and Chart Appraisal
Certain topics involving numerous details
are given general treatment in appropriate sections
of NIS chapters and full treatment in supplements.
Supplements are prepared only if the topic in ques-
tion is sufficiently important in an NIS Area to
warrant this detailed treatment. There are, at
present, the following five supplements :
NIS Supplement No. I Ports and Naval Facilities
NIS Supplement No. II Air Facilities
NIS Supplement No. III Telecommunications
NIS Supplement No. IV Urban Areas
NIS Supplement No. V Petroleum
The Special NIS on Marine Climate and
Oceanography divides the world sea areas into
ocean basins. These ocean basins are further sub-
divided into Parts, each of which is comparable to
a chapter in the other NIS. The production unit
is a Part, each of which will consist of three sec-
tions. Ocean basins are designated as follows :
NIS 104
Atlantic Basin
12 Parts
NIS 105
Pacific Basin
12 Parts
NIS 108
Indian Basin
4 Parts
NIS 107
Arctic Basin
1 Part
NIS 108
Antarctic Basin
1 Part
A gazetteer will be published for each NIS
Area.
The geographic areas covered by the NIS
are generally defined by political boundaries. In
CHAPTERS II (Military Geography), however, areas
are determined in terms of natural geographic
units.
In some instances, it is desirable to define
the geographic area in terms of natural boundaries.
For example, since the Iberian Peninsula, includ-
ing the approaches into the Pyrenees from France,
forms a natural geographic concept, it should be
considered geographically as a whole. Thus, the
geographic treatment of this area would serve as
CHAPTER II for both NIS Portugal and NIS Spain.
Conversely, the area included within politi-
cal boundaries may be so extensive as to embrace
several natural geographic units. Examples of
such areas are the U.S.S.R. and China. CHAPTERS
II for these areas would consist of several Parts,
each treating a natural geographic unit.
In addition, it will be necessary to transcend
political boundaries in many instances in order
to obtain comprehensive treatment of certain
functional aspects, such as transportation and
ports and naval facilities; and such procedure
should be followed wherever necessary.
The scope of each chapter, supplement, and
Special NIS is outlined in detail under the Outline
Guides in this volume. Chapter and section out-
line guides in general include initial comments
relative to content of the unit as a whole which are
not repeated with but are pertinent to the detailed
outlines for individual sections and subsections.
The following standard definitions apply explicitly
to CHAPTERS II-IX and by implication to CHAP-
TER I:
a) The first section of each chapter is uni-
formly entitled Introduction. This section is not
a summary of the basic intelligence contained in
the remainder of the chapter or an explanation of
the organization of the chapter. Rather, it pre-
sents an analysis of the basic intelligence contained
in the chapter. It also presents general aspects
which cannot be treated adequately elsewhere in
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 NATURE, PURPOSE, AND SCOPE
the chapter. For example, the organization and
functions of the high command are covered in SEC-
TION 80 (Introduction to CHAPTER VIII, Armed
Forces) because this topic cannot be adequately
treated in the subsequent sections of CHAPTER VIII.
The chapter outline guides indicate the nature and
scope of the treatment to be accorded the Intro-
duction of each chapter.
b) The first subsection of each section is
uniformly entitled General. This subsection is
provided to permit a proper approach to the treat-
ment of material contained in the remainder of
the section.
c) The last subsection of most sections is
uniformly entitled Comments on Principal
Sources. This subsection is to serve the following
purposes :
To provide an evaluation of the principal source mate-
rial used in preparing the section and thereby in-
form the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded the intelligence contained in the section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide collectors of information with collection
targets. In this connection, the principal sources
(not necessarily all sources) actually used should
be indicated.
Summary of agency functions
1. GENERAL
Where one agency is responsible for a sec-
tion of a chapter or a subsection of a section which
is being coordinated by another agency, working
level liaison shall be maintained. All communica-
tions of a policy or requirements nature to the
agency preparing the section or subsection will be
passed through intelligence command channels.
In all instances working level coordination
among agencies concerned will include the follow-
ing :
Exchange, where applicable, of drafts of completed
draft sections in order to resolve inconsistencies
among sections and detect gaps in over-all cover-
age.
Informal coordination in compiling specific subsec-
tions which are assigned as the responsibility of
one agency but impinge upon the field of interest
of another.
2. NIS COMMITTEE
The NIS Committee consists of represent-
atives of the Director of Central Intelligence and
the Chiefs of the Intelligence Agencies of the De-
partments of State, the Army, the Navy, and the
Air Force. The representative of the Director of
Central Intelligence is ex officio chairman of the
committee. It also includes an advisory member
from the Joint Staff who shall be thoroughly
familiar with the basic intelligence requirements
of the Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS), keep the JCS
informed of the progress of the NIS Program, and
keep the NIS Committee informed of changes in
the JCS requirements.
The NIS Committee performs the following
functions :
Considers and recommends for Intelligence
Agency approval over-all policies for the NIS Pro-
gram.
Determines the scope and treatment of each NIS
to be produced.
Allocates responsibility for production and main-
tenance of NIS in accordance with the intelligence
requirements, production capabilities, and domi-
nant interest of the Intelligence Agencies con-
cerned.
Establishes NIS production and maintenance
schedules based upon JCS priorities and agency
capabilities.
Promulgates procedures and instructions for the
preparation, review, editing, and submission of NIS
contributions.
Recommends to CIA measures necessary for the
coordination of the NIS Program.
3. CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
The Central Intelligence Agency performs the
following functions:
Provides over-all coordination of the NIS Pro-
gram.
Produces those elements of NIS allocated to it for
production by the NIS Committee.
Furnishes certain common services which can
best be done centrally.
Edits NIS contributions, provides advisory sub-
stantive review, and arranges for the publication
of NIS.
Disseminates NIS in accordance with Intelligence
Agency agreements.
4. IAC AGENCIES
The IAC Agencies (State, Army, Navy, and Air
Force) perform the following functions:
Provide a member and alternate members
of the NIS Committee. This member repre-
sents, and speaks for, the Chief of the Intelligence
Agency of the Department from which he is ac-
credited.
Produce and maintain the NIS elements which
have been allocated by the NIS Committee
as production responsibilities.
Implement collection effort which may be re-
quired for NIS production and maintenance.
5. NON-IAC AGENCIES
The non-IAC Agencies perform the following
functions:
Produce and maintain portions of NIS when
explicitly assigned that responsibility by the
NIS Committee or by an Intelligence Agency with
the approval of that Committee.
Furnish Intelligence Agencies with material
for integration into NIS by those agencies.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR
PREPARATION OF NIS
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Allocation of Responsibility for Preparation of NIS
Neither the following allocations nor any interpretation thereof shall negate
the basic principle that each department is responsible for the production
of that intelligence which is responsive to its departmental mission.
Section 10-Introduction
11-Strategic Significance of the NIS Area
12-Military Geography
13-Transportation and Telecommunications
14-Sociological
15-Political
16-Economic
17-Scientific
18-Armed Forces
19-Map and Chart Appraisal
Section 20-Introduction
21-Military Geographic Regions
22-Coasts and Landing Beaches
23-Weather and Climate
24-Topography
25-Urban Areas
Section 30-Introduction
31-Railway
32-Highway
33-Inland Waterway
34-Petroleum Pipeline (treated in Sub-
section 62, C and Supplement V)
35-Ports and Naval Facilities
36-Merchant Marine
37-Civil Air
38-Telecommunications
Section 40-Introduction
41-Population
42-Characteristics of the People
43-Religion, Education, and Public Information
44-Manpower
45-Health and Sanitation
46-Public Welfare
CIA
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
State (with joint assistance)
State
State (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Navy (with Army assistance)
Joint Meteorological Committee
Army
Army
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Army
Army
Joint Army-Navy
Navy
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Army
State
State (with Army assistance)
State
State
State
Army
State
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
ALLOCATIONS
Section 50-Introduction
51-The Constitutional System
52-Structure of the Government
53-Political Dynamics
54-Public Order and Safety
55-National Policies
56-Intelligence and Security
57-Subversive
58-Propaganda
59-Biographies of Key Personalities
Section 60-Introduction
61-Agriculture and Food
D. Electric power
63-Minerals and Metals
64-Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
C. Motor vehicles (including tanks, self-pro-
pelled guns, etc.)
D. Aircraft production
E. Shipbuilding
F. Explosives, industrial and military
G. Guns, explosive devices, and ammunition
H. Other military equipment and supplies
(including war gases and smoke prep-
arations)
I. Telecommunications, signal and lighting
. equipment
J. Chemical industries
K. Agricultural processing industries
L. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
M. Construction industries
N. Other industries
0. Comments on principal sources
State
State
State
State
State
State (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
State (with joint assistance)
State
State
State (with joint assistance)
State (with the assistance of the De-
partment of Agriculture and the
Fish and Wildlife Service, Depart-
ment of the Interior)
State (with assistance of the Depart-
ment of the Interior)
Army
State (with the assistance of the De-
partment of the Interior)
Army
State
State (primary responsibility)
Army
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Navy
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
State
State
State
State
State
State (with joint assistance)
CIA is to produce final draft with con-
tributions from Navy and Air Force;
guidance from Army and State.
CIA to coordinate through the JEIC
the final draft based upon contribu-
tions from all intelligence agencies.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ALLOCATIONS
CHAPTER VII-SCIENTIFIC (Continued)
72-Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
73-Atomic Energy
74-Biological Warfare (BW)
75-Chemical Warfare (CW)
76----Miscellaneous
CHAPTER VIII-ARMED FORCES
Section 80-Introduction
81-Ground Forces
82-Naval Forces
83-Air Forces
91-Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
A. General
B. Physical maps, navigation charts of urban
areas
C. Maps of transportation and communica-
tions
D. Sociological, political, and economic maps
E. Special armed forces maps
92-Appraisal of Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
SUPPLEMENT I-PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
SUPPLEMENT II-AIR FACILITIES
SUPPLEMENT III-TELECOMMUNICATIONS
CIA to coordinate, through SIC work-
ing committees where practicable,
the final draft with contributions
on:
Guided missiles and aircraft from
the Air Force;
Ground weapons from the Army;
Naval weapons from the Navy.
CIA to coordinate through the JAEIC
the final draft with contributions
from other intelligence agencies.
CIA to coordinate through JBWIC
and JCWIC, respectively, the final
drafts based upon contributions
from Army and from other intelli-
gence agencies.
CIA to coordinate through JBWIC
and JCWIC, respectively, the final
drafts based upon contributions
from Army and from other intelli-
gence agencies.
CIA to produce final draft based upon
contributions from other intelli-
gence agencies.
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Navy
Air Force (with Navy participation)
CIA (as coordinating staff for mate-
rial received from Army, Navy, Air
Force, and MATS)
CIA-SECTION COORDINATOR
CIA
Army, Navy, Air Force, MATS
Army, Navy, Air Force, CIA
CIA
Army, Navy, Air Force
CIA (as coordinating staff for mate-
rial received from Army, Navy, Air
Force, and MATS)
JOINT ARMY-NAVY
AIR FORCE (with Navy participation)
ARMY
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
ALLOCATIONS
STATE (with assistance of the Depart-
ment of the Interior)
Section 1-Introduction
2-Marine Climate
3-Oceanography
Navy
Navy (with assistance of the Air
Force)
Navy
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NIS AREAS
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
NIS AREAS
SHORT
TITLE
NIS 32 Arabian Peninsula Arabian Peninsula, including Saudi Arabia, Kuwait,
Kuwait-Saudi Arabia Neutral Zone, Iraq-Saudi
Arabia Neutral Zone, Bahrein, Qatar, Trucial
Oman, Muscat and Oman, Yemen, Aden Colony
and Protectorate.
NIS 33
Iran
Iran
NIS Area 33
NIS 34
Afghanistan
Afghanistan
NIS Area 34
NIS 35
India
India, including Jammu and Kashmir, Nepal,
NIS Area 35:
Bhutan, and Portuguese and French territories
Part I-Northern India, including Jammu
in India, Andaman, Laccadive and Nicobar
and Kashmir, Nepal, and Bhutan, the
Islands.
Portuguese territory in northern India,
all of Pakistan and the Oman settle-
ment of Gwadar.
Part II-Peninsular India, including the
Portuguese and French territories in
Peninsular India.
NIS 37 Ceylon
NIS 38 Burma
NIS 39 China
East and West Pakistan (excluding Jammu and
Kashmir), and including the Oman settlement
of Gwadar.
Ceylon
Burma
China, including Hong Kong and Macao.
NIS Area 37
NIS Area 38
NIS Area 39:
Part I-Western China and Mongolia
Part II-Manchuria
Part III-North China
Part I V-South China, including Taiwan,
Hong Kong, and Macao
Mongolia (Outer Mongolia or the "Mongolian
NIS Area 40 (Same as NIS Area 39,
People's Republic").
Part I)
NIS 41
Korea
Korea
NIS Area 41
NIS 42
Thailand
Thailand
NIS Area 42
NIS 43
Indochina
Indochina, the Paracel Islands, Spratley Island and
NIS Area 43
other disputed islands and reefs in South China
Sea south of Paracel Islands.
Federation of Malaya, Singapore, Sarawak, Brunei,
and North Borneo.
NIS 46
NIS 47
NIS 48
Tunisia
Algeria
Morocco
NIS 49 Libya
NIS 50 West Africa
Approved F
Tunisia
Algeria
French Morocco, Spanish Morocco (northern Span-
ish zone in Morocco), Ifni, and International
Zone of Tangier.
Libya
French West Africa, Spanish Sahara (Rio de Oro,
including the southern Spanish zone in Moroc-
co), Portuguese Guinea, Gambia, Sierra Leone,
Gold Coast, British Togoland, French Togoland,
Nigeria and British Cameroons.
NIS Areas 46-48
NIS Areas 46-48
NIS Areas 46-48
NIS Area 49
NIS Area 50:
Part I-French West Africa except terri-
tories listed under Part II below, Span-
ish Sahara (Rio de Oro, including south-
ern Spanish zone in Morocco), Gam-
bia, Portuguese Guinea, Sierra Leone.
Part II-The following parts of French
West Africa: Ivory Coast and Dahomy
and the following other areas: Liberia,
Gold Coast, British Togoland, French
Togoland, Nigeria and British Camer-
oons.
NIS Area 51 (Same as NIS Area 50,
Part II)
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 :
CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
NIS AREAS
SHORT
TITLE
French Equatorial Africa, French Cameroons,
Spanish Guinea (including Rio Muni), and Ca-
binda.
NIS 53 Egypt Egypt NIS Area 53
NIS 54 Anglo-Egyptian Sudan Anglo-Egyptian Sudan NIS Area 54
NIS 55 Ethiopia, Eritrea and Ethiopia, Eritrea, British, French and Italian So- XIS Area, 55
the Somaliland,-, maliland.
NIS 56 British East Africa Kenya, Uganda, Tanganyika, Zanzibar Protecto-
rate.
NIS 57 Rhodesia and Nyasa- Northern Rhodesia, Southern Rhodesia, Nyasa-
land land.
NIS 58 Mozambique Mozambique NIS Areas 57-58
NIS 59 Angola Angola NIS Areas 59-60
NIS 60 Belgian Congo Belgian Congo and Ruanda-Urundi. NIS Areas 59-60
NIS 61 South Africa Union of South Africa, South-West Africa, lieeh- NIS Area 61
uanaland, Swaziland and Basutoland.
NIS 62 Madagascar Madagascar NIS Area 62
NIS 63 Indian Ocean Islands All outlying islands in the Indian Ocean, southward NIS Area 63
to 60? S. latitude, except islands covered in NIS
32, 35, 37, 55, 56, 62, and 100.
All outlying islands in the Atlantic Ocean between
10? N. latitude and 60? S. latitude and the South
Orkney and South Shetland Island groups, but
excluding islands covered by NIS 52.
NIS 67
NIS 68
NIS 69
Greenland
Iceland
North Polar Area
Greenland
Iceland
North Polar Area
NIS Area 67
NIS Area 68
NIS Area 69
NIS 71
Guatemala
Guatemala
NIS Areas 71--77
NIS 72
British Honduras
British Honduras
NIS Areas 71-77
NIS 73
Honduras
Honduras, including territory north of the Sego-
NIS Areas 71-77
via River and islands possibly subject to Nicara-
guan claims.
Salvador, including small areas claimed by Hon-
NIS Areas 71-77
duras.
Nicaragua, including territory south of the
NIS Areas 71-77
Segovia It..
NIS 76
Costa Rica
Costa Rica
XIS Areas 71-77
NIS 77
Panama
Panama
NIS Areas 71-77
NIS 78
Cuba
Cuba
NTS Areas 78-8-1:
Part I -Greater Antilles, Bermuda and
Bahama Is.
Part I7-----Lesser Antilles
NIS 79
Haiti
Haiti
NIS Areas 78-84
XIS 80
Dominican Republic
Dominican Republic
NIS Areas 78-84
NIS 81
British Possessions in
All islands and bays under British sovereignty in
NIS Areas 78-84
the Caribbean
the Caribbean, and the Bahama Is. and Bermuda.
NIS 82
Dutch Possessions in
All Caribbean islands under Netherlands sovereign-
NIS Areas 78-84
the Caribbean
ty, including part of St. Martin I.
NIS 83
French Possessions in
All Caribbean islands under French sovereignty,
N IS Areas 78-84
the Caribbean
including part of St. Martin I.
NIS 84
U.S. Possessions in the
All Caribbean islands under U.S. sovereignty or
NIS Areas 78--84
Caribbean
claim, and islands where U.S. has lease or treaty
rights.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
NIS AREAS
SHORT
TITLE
NIS 85 Colombia
Colombia NIS Areas 85-86
NIS 86 Venezuela
Venezuela NIS Areas 85-86
NIS 87 Ecuador
Ecuador and small area on eastern border disputed NIS Areas 87-88
with Peru.
NIS 88 Peru
Peru NIS Areas 87-88
NIS 89 Chile
Chile, including Pacific Islands east of 90? W. NIS Area 89
longitude and islands south of Tierra del Fuego
disputed with Argentina.
Argentina, including river islands disputed with
Uruguay.
NIS 91 Uruguay
NIS 92 Paraguay
NIS 93 Bolivia
NIS 94 Brazil
Uruguay
Paraguay
Bolivia
Brazil
NIS Areas 90-91
NIS Areas 92-93
NIS Areas 92-93
NIS Area 94:
Part I-Southeast Brazil
Part II-Northwest Brazil
NIS 99 Philippine Is. Philippine Is.
NIS 100 Indonesia Indonesia, including all of the former Netherlands
Indies and Portuguese Timor.
NIS 101 West Pacific Islands All islands in the Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands, and the islands of Marcus and Wake.
NIS 102 Southwest Pacific Is- Papua, Trust Territory of New Guinea, British
lands Solomon Islands, New Hebrides, New Cale-
donia and dependencies, Fiji Is., Tonga Is.,
Gilbert and Ellice Is. and lesser adjacent islands,
but not including islands covered by NIS 96,
97, and 103.
NIS 103 South Pacific Islands Phoenix, Tokelau, Samoa, Cook and Line island
groups, and adjacent islands, the French Estab-
lishments in Oceania, Pitcarin and adjacent
British islands, and Chilean islands west of 90?
W. longitude.
NIS Area 99
NIS Area 100
SPECIAL NIS AREAS
(Oceanography and Marine Climate)
NIS 104
Atlantic Basin
Atlantic Ocean
NIS Area104
NIS
105 Pacific Basin
Pacific Ocean
NIS Area 105
NIS
106 Indian Basin
Indian Ocean
NIS Area 106
NIS
107 Arctic Basin
Arctic Ocean
NIS Area 107
NIS
108 Antarctic Basin
Antarctic Ocean
NIS Area 108
Approved F
 25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Next 3 Page(s) In Document Exempt
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
CONTENTS
Page
A. Transmittal of material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. Letter of transmittal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Manuscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Graphic material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B. Text specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. Typing of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Text headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3. References to figures and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Quotations and extract matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5. Sample pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
6. Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
7. Reference to sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C. Tabular specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. Tabulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Typing of tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4. Titles and figure numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5. Stubs and column headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6. Footnotes and source references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7. Conventional entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8. Statistical totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
9. Table construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
D. Graphic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2. Photographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
E. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. NIS Supplement specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. Classification and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. Treatment of names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4. Technical terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5. Statistical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6. Return of material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7. Editorial style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Editorial Instructions
A. Transmittal of material
NIS material delivered to the Basic Intelligence
Division (D/B), CIA requires a letter of transmit-
tal (original and 2 copies). The letter itemizes
the number of pages of text and table manuscript,
table of contents and other typed material sub-
mitted, and indicates any omission of material or
other deviation from standard procedure. The let-
ter specifies control aspects of material involved.
The letter of transmittal also indicates the number
of extra copies of insert maps which the contrib-
utor desires run without NIS reference lines (the
number not to exceed 10 copies of each map except
by special arrangement), the minimum classifica-
tion for each map if run without the NIS refer-
ences, and any special restrictions concerning ad-
ditional runs and distribution by CIA for other
than NIS purposes.
2. MANUSCRIPT
NIS manuscript is submitted in 5 complete as-
sembled copies. Each of the 5 assembled sets of
manuscript includes in sequence 1) title page, 2)
table of contents, 3) text, 4) tables, 5) caption list,
and 6) list of any border information.
Pagination begins with the first page of text of
each Section and is consecutive throughout the
manuscript (including each page of the tables,
which follow the text in sequence of figure num-
bers). Pagination is by other means than a num-
bering machine, which is reserved for use in D/B
processing.
Manuscript with more than nominal alterations
is not acceptable. Text or tabular material Photo-
statted or similarly reproduced from printed or
other material must be in positive print form and
legible in approximately typewriter elite size.
The supporting items, typed triple space, are as
follows :
TITLE PAGE, containing Chapter or Supplement
number and title, Section number and title, and
the statement: "This is a preliminary draft of
Section , NIS . It has not been finally
edited or reconciled with other NIS sections and
should not be reproduced. This Section has been
approved for use in the NIS by the (agency),
(month, year). This is the uniform date for the
entire section and will appear on each page of the
published section."
TABLE OF CONTENTS for each section, including all
headings and subheads used in text according to
the style given in "Text specifications." For Sup-
plements, or when entire chapters are submitted,
a separate table of contents extending through No.
2 heads of all sections also is included. Each sec-
tion table of contents is immediately followed by
a LIST OF FIGURES which lists in sequence all figures
with the following details for each: Figure number
as determined by sequence in tentative placement,
category identification (Table, Photo, Aerial, Chart,
Diagram, Plan, Map), and the caption as it ap-
pears with the figure or in appropriate short-title
form. This LIST OF FIGURES is immediately fol-
lowed by a contributor statement, as approved by
the NIS Committee, showing the agency or agen-
cies contributing to and responsible for prepara-
tion of the material.
CAPTION LIST (required for typesetting of all cap-
tions). Figure numbers for all tables and graphics
are listed in sequence with exact wording of the
caption as attached to the figure. When appli-
cable, the list of captions is followed by a border
information list, listing in sequence each insert
map figure number with exact wording of the
border information as specified in "Graphic specifi-
cations," and indicating which maps have apron
material.
3. GRAPHIC MATERIAL
Graphic material, including photographs, is as-
sembled separately from manuscript, in 4 complete
sets with each item in sequence. The 4 copies of
each item consist of an original and 3 copies of all
black and white material, and 4 color proofs for
multicolor graphic material. The original plates
of multicolor maps are retained by contributor
until receipt of memorandum from D/B. These
originals are then forwarded as directed by D/B for
final reproduction.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
B. Text specifications
1. TYPING OF TEXT
Text is submitted in 5 copies, typed on one side
only, with the original on substantial 8 x 121/2
bond paper. Duplicating process may be used if
submitted copies are thoroughly legible. Text is
typed triple space. All paragraphs without head-
ings begin with 5-space indent. Normal capital-
ization is used throughout (including headings),
without use of continuous capitalization or of un-
derlining except for foreign or other terms to be
italicized. The last word of a typed line is always
a complete word, avoiding ending any line with
a hyphen. Manuscript conforms to the sample
pages, with margins as shown. Each manuscript
page, as shown, includes in top margin the name of
the agency of primary responsibility, date (manu-
script completion date, for processing control pur-
poses only), classification, NIS number and sec-
tion number. The first page of text includes the
section number and title. Text pages are num-
bered consecutively within each section (not using
a numbering machine, which is reserved for D/B
processing).
2. TEXT HEADINGS
Headings used in NIS text material are as fol-
lows :
(Grade of head,
not typed in ms.)
II. Military Geography (Chapter title)
22. Coasts and Landing Beaches (Section title)
A. . General (No. 1)
1. Coasts (No. 2)
a. Northern peninsula-Text follows ...... (No. 3)
(1) Williams Bay-Text follows ........ (No. 4)
(a) Vicinity of Port Smith-Text ..... (No. 5)
1) Seaward Approaches-Text ..... (No. 6)
Chapter and section titles are centered. No. 1
heads are typed flush with left margin of text; in-
ferior heads are successively indented 5 typewriter
spaces. No. 1 and No. 2 heads stand alone; text
begins on next line with indentation of 5 spaces and
thereafter flush left. Remaining heads each end
with space, two hyphens, space; text follows im-
mediately on same line, with succeeding lines be-
ginning flush with left text margin.
Each standard heading includes a title in ad-
dition to letter or number. Titles are as brief as
feasible. In No. 1 through No. 5 heads, common
nouns are not capitalized. No. 6 heads are initial
caps except for prepositions, articles, etc.
Headings may stand alone when immediately
followed by the next grade of head. For certain
material (as in Coasts and Landing Beaches), a
heading may be followed on the next line or lines
by coordinates, hydrographic chart references, etc.
No. 5 and No. 6 headings may be modified when
used to introduce a series of similar subsidiary
topics (such as a series of brief descriptive para-
graphs on smaller ports).
Numbers used to itemize a series of items within
text carry a single parenthesis, e.g., 1).
3. REFERENCES TO FIGURES AND TEXT
Figures (including both tables and graphic ma-
terial) must be adequately referred to in the re-
lated text, using figure numbers assigned by the
contributor. Reference may be integral in a sen-
tence, ". . . as shown in FIGURE 32-16 . . . ", or
parenthetical, ". . .(FIGURES 42-3 through 42-
6). . .". It is often desirable to use the reference
flexibly to differentiate types of figures, e.g.,
". . . tabulated in FIGURE 42-7 . . ." or ". .
shown on the map, FIGURE 42-8 . . .". Statements
such as ". . . in the following table . . ." or
". . . in the table above . . ." are undesirable be-
cause the relationship may not be retained in
printing. Because figure numbering is subject to
change in publication or maintenance, reference to
tables or graphic material in other sections or
chapters is by abbreviated caption, type of material
and section number in which it appears, e.g., "(see
population density map, SECTION 41) ".
Tentative placement within text of tables and
appropriate graphic items (e.g., line cuts) is in-
dicated by large carets with figure numbers on the
right margin of text pages (see sample pages).
Each figure is caretted only once. Figures expect-
ed to follow printed text, such as half-tone illus-
trations and fold-in maps, are itemized after the
last line of manuscript text.
Because subsection numbering and titles are sub-
ject to change in publication or maintenance, cross
references are made to the highest order of text
topic which will adequately indicate where the ref-
erenced material will be found. Within sections
and especially within lengthy sections, however,
references to subsections may be quite detailed if
desirable. Another section of the same chapter
is referred to by ". . . (SECTION 81, this chapter)
" or ". . . (See section on Ground Forces)
. . ." Reference to a section of another chapter is
as follows : ". . . (CHAPTER III, SECTION 31) . .
or ". . . (See Railway) . . .
The words Chapter, Section, and Figure, when
followed by identifying number are typed in capi-
tals and lower case.
4. QUOTATIONS AND EXTRACT MATTER
Quotations up to approximately 3 typewritten
lines are included in text within quotation marks.
Longer quotations, and subordinate material like-
wise to be printed as "extract" in smaller type, are
without quotation marks, indented 5 spaces for all
lines and typed double space.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 JUNE 1951 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Approved or Release 1999/O9IOS : - - -
Top
____ Margin
ARMY-January 19118 NIS 21 14"
(CLASSIFICATION) Sec-38
Left I Right
Margin 38. Telecommunications Margin
1, let
A. General
During the Japanese occupation telecommunication facilities in
Manchuria were rapidly expanded. New radio stations were...
B. Domestic facilities
1. General
Prior to 1933, telecommunication facilities in Manchuria were
(valleys. Practically all the major circuits and most of the other..
(parallel to railways and highways; lines are also built along the
? +.+.... ~. ~..~.... .~~ +..u ....., vi uaa...u -- 11VVV vi VALG ivu Uco Gic
Antung in 1937 (Figure 38-2). In December 19112....
I 3. Telegraph and cable
b. Type of construction -- Construction was completed for
an underground 28-pair nonloaded telephone cable between Mukden and
form a rather close pattern around Mukden, Chang-ch'un (Hsinking),
and Harbin, and radiate to all parts of the country (Figure 38-1)..
a. Location of routes of lines -- Telephone land lines
under the control of several agencies and companies licensed by the
'Chinese, Japanese, and Russian governments.
2. Telephone
Bottom
Margin
1"
4
(page number)
(CLASSIFICATION)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Left
Margin
11"
r ilcv
Cli
rri
IJIRMY-January 1948
(CLASSIFICATION)
Right
The offices and agencies that provided telegraph service in they Margin
lit
Telegraph and telephone service 244
Telephone stations 232
Telegraph agencies 403
Wireless agencies 62
Total 941
b, Type of construction -- In general, construction of..
Radio
a. Radio communications stations
Imajor radio communications stations were operated by....*
*Itemized information for the period 1940 to 1945 is almost
entirely based on captured Japanese documents, but the significant
Itotals are confirmed by U.S. official reports.
b. Broadcasting -- There are several
of the more powerful
broadcasting stations listed in Figure 38-3.
(1) Number of installations -- The number of these
short-wave transmitters. There is very little
tthat, even with full allowance for the new facilities only a few have)
11939 telegraph offices and agencies' tabulations. It is now believed)
Bottom
Margin
14it
Approved F
information about...
(page number)
(CLASSIFICATION)
Top
Margin
l*"
NIS 21
Sec-38 L
(installations is considerably smaller than the total given by the
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
5. SAMPLE PAGES
The accompanying two pages are sample pages
of text manuscript for the guidance of typists.
6. FOOTNOTES
Footnotes to text matter are kept to a minimum.
When footnotes are considered necessary, up to
3 asterisks per page may be used. In manuscript
the footnote is inserted on the line following the
reference, separated from the text by solid lines
above and below; the footnote begins indented 5
spaces from left margin, and is typed double space
(see sample pages).
7. REFERENCE TO SOURCES
References to sources are confined as much as
possible to the topic Comments on Principal
Sources, where the evaluative discussion normally
will be followed by an alphabetical listing of prin-
cipal sources to which consecutive numbers are
assigned. If sources are grouped by subject cate-
gories, they are numbered consecutively rather
than by successive groups. In text, and in both
text and figure footnotes, this facilitates brief ref-
erence, e.g., ". . , based on Source 1 estimates,
. .. or "... (Source 1) .. ." When only a few
principal sources are identified and are not as-
signed source numbers in the Comments subsec-
tion, text or footnote reference thereto is as brief
as feasible. A source cited in text but not included
in Comments on Principal Sources may be de-
scribed in necessary detail but as briefly as possi-
ble. Author, title of source, and date normally is
sufficient, typed in capitals and lower case set off
from text by parentheses.
In the numbered listing of principal sources,
each item is typed double space and is continuous
in the following order and typewriter style :
Author, authors, editor or agency; last name
first, capital and lower case, period. Title of book
or other separate publication; capitals and lower
case, underlined, followed within parentheses by
capitals and lower case translation if required,
period. Title of article from periodical in quotes,
capitals and lower case, comma; followed by name
of periodical, underlined, comma; edition, series,
part, volume, number, selected pages, year of peri-
odical as necessary, separated by commas in that
order, with capital only at beginning of series of
items, abbreviated as ed., ser., pt., vol., no., p.,
period. Arabic numerals used throughout except
Roman after pt. Place of publication in capitals
and lower case, followed by colon and publishing
agency if given, otherwise period. Date, period;
n.d. if not dated, period. Total pages if desired.
Classification in parentheses, capital and lower
case, without period.
When several works by the same author or
agency are listed, the author's name is not repeated
but is replaced by dashes in subsequent listings.
C. Tabular specifications
1. TABULATIONS
Relatively simple tabular presentations, gener-
ally with no stubs, less than 3 columns of data, and
not requiring more than a printed column width,
are treated as tabulations. Tabulations are incor-
porated in text manuscript without figure number
or title (see sample pages). They are typed double
space, with no continuous capitalization or under-
lining.
2. TABLES
More complex tabular presentations, generally
with stub and 3 or more vertical columns of data,
are treated as tables. Each table has a descrip-
tive title (caption) preceded by a figure number.
Each table is constructed to stand as an entity,
because of possible separation from text in publica-
tion or use.
3. TYPING OF TABLES
Each table is typed in 5 copies, on one side only,
original on substantial bond paper. Duplicating
process may be used if submitted copies are thor-
oughly checked for legibility. Tables are typed
double space, with no continuous capitals or under-
lining in caption, stubs, column headings, or data
entries. Tables are typed on 8 x 121/2 bond paper
whenever practicable. For more extensive presen-
tations, larger paper may be used, if possible re-
taining the 121/2 inch vertical dimension. Several
separate 8 x 121/2 pages may be used to continue
a table. When more than one page is used to
present a table or when there is significant relation-
ship between columns in separate tables, in typing
it is important to maintain alignment and space
relationship of columns on all pages. Each page
includes in the margin, as in text pages, the name
of the agency of primary responsibility, date, clas-
sification, NIS number and section number.
4. TABLE TITLES AND FIGURE NUMBERS
Table titles (captions) are as brief as possible
consistent with adequate indication of table con-
tent. Date or dates are included in the title un-
less table content is generalized or in itself provides
adequate date information. The area or political
name is incorporated when feasible, in adjective
form ("Value of French imports, 1945-1950") or
in noun form after substance of caption ("Land
use, France, 1950").
The figure number which precedes each table
title is comprised of the section number followed
by a hyphen and the serial number of the table in
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
the sequence of all figures (including all tables
and graphic items) within a section, according to
caretted location in the submitted manuscript.
5. TABLE STUBS AND COLUMN HEADINGS
Stubs (horizontal descriptive entries normally
to the left of vertical columns of data) and column
headings are carefully worded and coordinated.
Proper selection and description of categories min-
imizes footnotes and exceptions which require ex-
planation.
In general, the heading at the top of a column
covers all material presented in the column with-
out insertion of additional headings farther down
the column. The same applies to side heads and
lines of data. Where intermediate headings seem
necessary, the material generally is presented as
separate tables. However, related categories of
items (such as apply to various weapons) may be
usefully combined in a single table by making col-
umn headings more comprehensive and using sub-
headings in columns and/or indicating a general
change in category. Preliminary consultation
with D/B on such matters is advisable.
6. TABLE FOOTNOTES AND SOURCE REFER-
ENCES
Footnotes to tables are indicated by up to 3
asterisks and thereafter by up to 3 daggers (the
typewriter symbol #E is used for a dagger). These
symbols are placed at the left of numerical column
data, and at the right of headings, stubs, mixed or
reading column data. Footnotes generally are
typed double space, under the table, starting in-
dented five spaces from left margin of table. The
number of footnotes to tables is minimized by in-
corporation of the material into related text when
feasible, by careful phrasing of stubs and headings,
by consolidation in a reduced number of footnotes,
or by consolidation in a single NOTE carried as a
footnote without symbol.
When source reference or references are con-
sidered necessary and apply for a table as a whole,
they are indicated by "Data from Source 13 . .."
beginning at the left text margin and typed two
spaces below a line at the bottom of the table
proper. If a NOTE item is used it precedes the
conventional abbreviation n a and explanation, if
used (see conventional entries below), which in
turn precedes any symbol footnotes. An entire
table taken verbatim from a source (sometimes as
the only available data, and not necessarily fully
accepted by the contributor), is so indicated in re-
lated text, by explanation within the table, or by
footnote; in such cases it is generally desirable, so
far as feasible, to follow the detailed format of the
original material.
7. CONVENTIONAL ENTRIES
To avoid blank spaces in columns of data, the
following conventional entries are made as ap-
propriate in table columns :
... not applicable; no footnote used
n a data not available, inadequate data, etc;
n and a separated and underlined; until
conventional is well established, explained
as "Data not available", etc., in footnote
0 indicates zero quantity or reading in col-
umns of uniform data such as weather
statistics; no footnote used
none used instead of 0 when data are not uni-
form, e.g., to indicate known lack of pro-
duction of a significant commodity;
underline; no footnote used
insig quantity too insignificant to record;
underline; no footnote used
When exceptional items in a column are esti-
mated they are preceded by est in underlined lower
case, unless symbol and footnote are preferable be-
cause of an otherwise appreciably narrower column
or exceptional items can be feasibly covered in
other footnotes.
Ditto marks are not used in tables. For this pur-
pose do in underlined lower case is used. Gener-
ally, identical entries in figure columns are re-
peated. It is likewise desirable to repeat word en-
tries which have significance.
8. STATISTICAL TOTALS
When n a or insig are included with vertical or
horizontal data entries for which a total is given
that only moderately exceeds the sum of the specific
entries, no footnote explanation may be required.
However, when the total is exactly the sum of the
specific figures, generally it is advisable to indicate
that n a or similar items are not reflected in the
total, e.g., "* Totals are of known data" or
"approx." When totals are not identical with the
sum of specific entries, because of rounding or dif-
ferent sources, indicate by note, e.g., "(Tonnage)
figures rounded to nearest (thousand) are not ad-
ditive".
9. TABLE CONSTRUCTION
Optimum clarity and usefulness require the care-
ful construction of all tables in terms of the nature
and purpose of the material and the characteris-
tics of the NIS format.
Column headings normally are typed and printed
horizontally. They may be vertical when heading
narrow columns of data or generally to facilitate
publishing a table in minimum width. Superior
or consolidating headings are centered over the
appropriate individual column headings.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
To avoid repetition of units of measurement after
items of latitude, longitude, time, distance, weight,
etc., units of measurement (abbreviated as appro-
priate) are put at the head of column, or centered
over appropriate columns. Units common to an
entire table (e.g., thousands of metric tons, or per-
centage of population) are placed in parentheses
beneath the table title.
It is desirable, so far as practicable, for a series
of tables dealing with common or closely related
topics to be expressed in a uniform order of magni-
tude of units of measurement, e.g., all in thousands
of tons or hundreds of tons.
Entries in all columns align horizontally with
top line of the corresponding stub.
Vertical columns of figures are aligned on the
decimal point, dissimilar figures are centered in
the column, and zeros precede the decimal in num-
bers of less than 1. Examples of various figure
items are :
1500
0.15
15.5 -17.0
insig
30 (daily)
Generally it is not desirable to carry a column
in which there are no entries. Use of a column
for isolated entries may be avoided by carrying the
entries in a "Remarks" column or by consolidation
in an explanatory note to the table.
Tables generally should be constructed to avoid
extensive use of full-length lines or rules between
columns and particularly between horizontal en-
tries. Lines or boxes around column headings pref-
erably are omitted by contributors unless format
is well established.
Although contributors are not required to con-
form to printing requirements when constructing
tables, general consideration of such requirements
facilitates publication of table material. A printed
NIS single-column width accommodates approxi-
mately 55 units of characters or spaces. A two-
column page width takes approximately 115 units.
A two-page spread takes approximately 230 char-
acters or spaces. Two-page spreads tend to present
page make-up problems in publication, including
separation of tables from related text. Tables
which must be viewed from the side of the page,
and extended tables on fold-in inserts, generally
are not desirable and are used only by arrangement
with D/B. In constructing tables for normal col-
umn or page-width publication, space allowance
must be made for column headings which may be
wider than figure entries in columns, and for stubs.
When it is apparent that the maximum horizontal
lines (allowing for column entries, column head-
ings, stubs, footnote symbols, and adequate space
between columns) will occupy more than the ap-
proximate number of spaces available but will not
utilize more than a nominal additional width, re-
arrangement of the table warrants consideration.
Vertical printing of heads is one device. When the
number of columns exceeds the number of stub
entries, the lay-out often may be reversed to make
a longer but narrower table. When tables present
problems not previously encountered, contributors
are requested to consult D/B before final typing.
D. Graphic specifications
1. GENERAL
All graphic materials, such as photographs,
maps, charts, graphs, and sketches, regardless of
size, are (in addition to numbered tables) desig-
nated as figures. Each figure carries a separate
figure number comprised of the section number
followed by hyphen and serial number of the figure
in the sequence of all figures within the section.
The page size of the printed NIS, including
binding and other margins, is 91/4" by 121/8". The
type is set in two 31/2" columns spaced 1/4" apart.
Figures of column width are printed 31/2" wide,
and 2-column figures are 71/4" wide. The maxi-
mum height of such figures including space for
caption is 93/4".
All graphic items larger than page size are
treated as fold-in inserts. The maximum paper
size used for NIS inserts is 231/4" V x 393/4" H. The
horizontal dimension normally includes a 91/4"
apron.
Figures are prepared to fit NIS indicated dimen-
sions. Care is required in laying out correct pro-
portions and in selecting sizes of symbols, patterns,
lines, and lettering to allow for reduction com-
mensurate with that permitted by other features
of the figure. When a specific amount of reduc-
tion is desired, it is so marked outside the border.
Otherwise, the amount of reduction will be decided
by D/B.
All charts, graphs, maps and other graphic ma-
terial to be printed with text are constructed as
black and white linecut figures of page size or less.
Photographs and other figures requiring halftone
reproduction normally will be published on coated
paper inserts of page size (excepting large pano-
ramas or mosaics which may be run as fold-in in-
serts), grouped immediately following text and
table manuscript of each section. Multicolor
graphics normally will be inserted at the end of
each section.
All figures, except insert maps, are accompanied
by captions (in lower case and normal word capital-
ization) which are carefully worded to be briefly
but adequately descriptive. The first line of the
caption carries the figure number followed by iden-
tification of the subject or brief descriptive phrase;
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 :
CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
EDITORIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
succeeding lines add appropriate amplification, in-
cluding direction of view and indication of the date
(or absence thereof, by "Date unknown") of photo-
graphs. Captions are firmly attached to figures,
affixed to permit reading of the caption while view-
ing the figure but not obscuring the figure image.
Captions must be legible but need not be drafted
since all captions are set in type.
Charts or graphs do not carry titles or caption
material (as distinct from explanatory legend ma-
terial) within the figure image. In the case of a
specially constructed chart or graph, source and
date of information may be drafted within the
figure.
All insert maps carry the title, legend, source
and date of source, and other essential caption in-
formation drafted within the title box or neatline.
Border information, indicated outside the map bor-
der in non-photographic blue but not drafted be-
cause it will be set in type, is as follows : Upper left
corner-agency responsible for map content, and
date to be carried by the section as a unit; center
top-NIS Area number; upper right corner-classi-
fication; lower left corner-file number and agency
responsible for actual map construction (unless
the latter is identical with material in upper left
corner) ; center bottom-abbreviated map title;
lower right corner-figure number.
It is not necessary that all maps or photographs
be oriented with north at the top, but the position
of north is clearly indicated by means of a north
arrow, coordinates, or caption. Names, symbols,
and similar details of figures are oriented for read-
ing from the bottom of the page. In exceptions
where figures must be viewed from the side of the
page, details of the figure are oriented for reading
from the right-:hand side of the page.
Printed "stick-up" is preferred for symbols and
lettering. However, Leroy lettering is permissible.
Freehand lettering and symbols are to be avoided
except in such instances as the inclusion of an ex-
istent, printed map or sketch.
It is frequently desirable for graphic material,
such as large-scale aerials of airfields, to be ac-
companied by small-scale line-cut orientation or
location maps.
2. PHOTOGRAPHS
Only clear and distinct photographs are accept-
able, and original prints are supplied insofar as
possible. Except where the original is unwieldy,
prints are supplied at the same scale as originals,
including suggested cropping to be undertaken in
D/B processing.
High-altitude aerial photographs carry a north
arrow and bar scale drafted on the face of the print.
When a photograph originally has foreign annota-
tions on the face of the photograph, the annota-
tions are retained and accompanied by translation
or explanation. Where feasible, the translation is
added to the face of the print in the form of a key
or legend; where space is not available or a key or
legend is not adequately descriptive, the transla-
tion or explanation appears in the caption or on
a separate typed sheet attached to each copy of
the print.
Instructions for selection and preparation of
photographs are set forth in NIS supplementary in-
structions.
3. MAPS
All NIS maps are carefully selected and con-
structed in terms of the purpose and subject ma-
terial of a map or plan, content and positional in-
tegration with text, suitability of color or other
differentiation, and all feasible uniformity in lay-
out, lettering, and other drafted elements.
All maps have a neatline and border, a legend
centered under the map title, a bar scale centered
beneath the legend, and the classification centered
beneath the scale. Legends clearly define all sym-
bols not self-explanatory or generally understood
from common usage. A direction indication, either
coordinates or a north arrow, is included. Maps
prepared as a series (e.g., port and town plans)
have consistent treatment throughout in type style,
zipatone patterns, title and legend layout. Non-
varying plastic (e.g., dyrite, vinylite) is preferable
for the construction of color plates, to facilitate
accurate registry in printing.
A map designed as a black and white line draw-
ing, page size or less, is preferable for many NIS
purposes because it can be printed adjacent to the
related text. When information cannot be ade-
quately presented in black and white, limited use of
one additional color for such maps is possible, upon
consultation with D/B.
A Standard Base Map for each NIS Area is pre-
pared and distributed by Geographic Division,
(D/G), CIA in the following forms: Black and
white and composite color copies on paper; compos-
ite black line and black line copies of each color
separation plate on plastic (dyrite). Specific in-
structions concerning reduction, sizes, etc., are dis-
tributed with the base map for each NIS Area.
Contributors are responsible for drafting their
own overlays, which are keyed to the base plates of
NIS Standard Base Maps.
In addition to the Standard Base Map a small-
scale Page Size Base Map is prepared for each NIS
Area. This map is available to contributors in
black-line and non-photographic blue, paper copies.
Black-line maps or color overlays are prepared by
drafting directly on these bases.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
For purposes where base maps are not applicable
(such as port plans), contributors are responsible
for compiling and constructing their own maps.
Contributors lacking necessary cartographic facili-
ties should consult D/B.
Fold-in maps are printed with a page-size apron,
to permit full view of the map as the text is read.
This apron can be used for printing information
additional to that contained in the legend, such
as lists of installations or regions. Such informa-
tion is submitted on a separate typewritten sheet,
a copy of which is attached to each copy of the
map. Printed material is not carried on the back
of a map.
E. General
1. NIS SUPPLEMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Preparation of text and graphic material for
NIS Supplements generally conforms to the indi-
cated procedures for other NIS material, with such
modifications as are developed to meet the require-
ments of the Supplements.
2. CLASSIFICATION AND CONTROL
NIS textual material is classified independently
by section. All pages of each section uniformly
carry the highest classification of material in the
section. All material, however, carries at least
a RESTRICTED classification. Tables of contents,
caption lists, all tables, and all graphics intended
to be printed within text, carry the uniform section
classification and are so stamped when submitted.
Insert maps or other insert graphic items (includ-
ing photographs) are not governed by the over-all
classification, but are individually classified as ap-
propriate.
The agency of primary responsibility is required
to indicate any control aspects of submitted ma-
terial.
All Comments on Principal Sources for all NIS
are controlled for "U.S. Officials Only". Each page
of that portion of manuscript is so stamped, top
and bottom. The control for Comments on Prin-
cipal Sources as such does not govern for related
NIS material and need not be specified in the letter
of transmittal.
Certain NIS Areas, as approved and specifically
listed b the NIS Committee, are controlled for
25X1X7RDP Certain other
0200020001- IS Areas, as approved and specifically listed by
the NIS Committee, are restricted by control for
"U.S. Officials Only". All NIS material relating
to such Areas, regardless of the content of the ma-
terial, is correspondingly controlled. Each page of
manuscript and each unit of graphic material is
appropriately stamped, top and bottom. All such
material delivered to D/B carries a cover sheet
specifying control, and the control requirements
also are indicated in the letter of transmittal.
When any element or portions of NIS material
(other than Comments on Principal Sources) are
controlled for reasons other than the approved con-
trol character of the Area, the entire section in-
volved is controlled. Each page of manuscript and
each unit of graphic material is appropriately
stamped, top and bottom. All such material de-
livered to D /B carries a cover sheet specifying con-
trol, and the nature of and occasion for the con-
trol requirements are indicated in the letter of
transmittal.
3. TREATMENT OF NAMES
Geographic names used in the NIS are those
approved by the United States Board on Geo-
graphic Names (BGN). Preliminary gazetteers
are issued to contributors for use in the preparation
of text and graphic materials. Pending publica-
tion of a pertinent gazetteer, or in the case of
names not covered by a published gazetteer, lists
of names are submitted according to NIS supple-
mentary instructions.
English conventional names are used insofar as
they are approved by BGN. The approved native
name is added in parentheses the first time the
conventional name is used in a section, and there-
after as desirable for clarity. It is desirable to use
the native name in parentheses after the conven-
tional name on maps whenever practicable.
Approved native names are used where conven-
tional English names are not provided. Transla-
tion of generic parts of native names (except when
the meaning is apparent) is given, in parentheses
or in running text if feasible, the first time a ge-
neric appears in any segment of text. As a reader
aid, English generics may be interspersed in text.
All terms referring to man-made features, such
as Small Boat Harbor, are in English. Military
regions or other regions arbitrarily designated for
convenience in presentation are in English and
are not required to be identical with BGN approved
versions.
Consistency in the use of the conventional or
the native name for the same feature is maintained
throughout each chapter.
In lists of towns and cities, coordinates are given
for each of two or more places having identical
names.
4. TECHNICAL TERMINOLOGY
When scientific names are appropriately used in
the interest of accuracy, if possible they are pre-
ceded by a common name or common name ge-
neric; e.g., the colon bacillus (Escherichia coli),
malaria mosquitoes (Anopheles maculipennis, A.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
hyracanus). The scientific names are enclosed in
parentheses and marked for italics in every case.
In a paragraph discussing malaria mosquitoes,
however, italicized scientific names may be used
without a preceding common name or generic.
Scientific family names (names ending in -idae, as
Stomatidae) are capitalized but not italicized.
Special-use terms, such as names of military
regions, are capitalized (e.g., the Kazakh Hill
Country) to clearly maintain identity.
5. STATISTICAL DATA
Statistical data normally are expressed either
in U.S. units of measure or in the metric system,
and are consistent within a section or the largest
NIS unit feasible, except to conform with common
usage, as in discussing 75 mm and 3" guns. All
contributions, should clearly indicate what system
is used, in tables as well as text. When different
measurement systems unavoidably appear together
in text (e.g., statute and nautical miles) they must
be clearly differentiated. In the case of areas
where available maps or charts use varying meas-
urement systems, the text is expressed in U.S.
units with metric conversion following in parenthe-
ses, and accompanying maps using extensive
metric annotations in their original form carry a
conversion table. Both U.S. and other measure-
ments may be given, as in the case of a table, when
contributing to utility.
Measurements are expressed in terms consistent
with the inherent or required degree of accuracy,
(e.g., 2,340 miles of coast, 16' 61/4" bridge clear-
ance). Conversions are exact when appropriate;
a rounded original figure is not converted into an
inconsistently exact figure; rounded conversions
may be used with a modifying "about" or "approxi-
mate". Units of measurement with varying mean-
ings are clearly defined, e.g., statute miles or nau-
tical miles, short tons or long tons. Both quan-
tity and value may be given when useful for indi-
cating relative importance. In financial data,
conversion factors with date are included.
6. RETURN OF MATERIAL
Detailed procedures governing the return of sub-
mitted material are established in NIS supple-
mentary instructions.
7. EDITORIAL STYLE
Development of style for all forms of NIS content
is a continuing and coordinated result of contribu-
tor and D /B processing of the various types of ma-
terial. For all matters of style not so developed,
and not indicated by specific D/B instructions, the
current Government Printing Office Style Manual
governs.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER I
BRIEF
Section 10 Introduction
Section 11 Strategic Significance of the NIS Area
Section 12 Military Geography
Section 13 Transportation and Telecommunications
Section 14 Sociological
Section 15 Political
Section 16 Economic
Section 17 Scientific
Section 18 Armed Forces
Section 19 Map and Chart Appraisal
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter I - Brief
OUTLINE
SECTION 11. STRATEGIC SIGNIFICANCE OF THE NIS
AREA
SECTION 12. MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 13. TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICA-
TIONS
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 14. SOCIOLOGICAL
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 15. POLITICAL
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 16. ECONOMIC
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 17. SCIENTIFIC
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 18. ARMED FORCES
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 19. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
A. General
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
A conventional CHAPTER I should be a succinct
presentation of the salient basic intelligence aspects
of the NIS Area as a whole. It should present a
clear, concise, over-all view of the principal factors
concerning the NIS Area under consideration and,
while stressing succinctness, should contain suffi-
cient detail to render it adequate within itself to
serve as the basis for initial strategic planning.
More specifically, CHAPTER I should accomplish the
following :
Present a clear over-all view of the NIS Area con-
cerned.
Not only present the salient basic intelligence as-
pects of the NIS Area concerned but also evaluate
the significance of these aspects.
Integrate in any one section those aspects of other
sections which serve to enhance the meaningfulness
of the first.
The presentation should be made through the
medium of succinct textual discussions supple-
mented by comprehensive graphic aids wherever
practicable. The text may be used to interpret and
augment intelligence portrayed graphically but
should not repeat such intelligence.
SECTIONS 12 to 18, inclusive, of CHAPTER I Will
be prepared by the agencies which produce the cor-
responding NIS CHAPTERS II to VIII, inclusive.
SECTIONS 10, 11, and 19 will be prepared by CIA with
joint assistance and approval.
CHAPTER I will be published as a complete
chapter. No CHAPTER I will be produced until
CHAPTERS II-IX, inclusive, have been completed
and have been edited by CIA. The cut-off date for
all sections of CHAPTER I will be that of the latest
produced Of CHAPTERS II-IX. Preliminary drafts
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER I
Of CHAPTER I sections, at least containing a sum-
mary of the salient basic intelligence aspects of
the Chapter concerned and preliminary graphics,
will be drawn up shortly after the completion of
the CHAPTERS II-IX to which they pertain and sub-
mitted to the CHAPTER I Subcommittee for prelimi-
nary processing.
To enable the preparation of SECTION 10, each
IAC Agency will submit to CIA a draft setting forth
the Agency's version of its aspects of SECTION 10
and these drafts will then be integrated by CIA
into an over-all draft of the section to be approved
by the IAC Agencies.
Section 10. Introduction
This Section is the medium for explaining to the
user, among other items, the following :
1) The purpose of the NIS
2) The relation of CHAPTER I to the other NIS
Chapters
3) The significant practices used in the NIS such
as, standard names, standard base maps, and cross
references
4) Any special treatment or omission of intelli-
gence applicable to the NIS under consideration
5) A complete table of contents for all chapters
of the NIS
Section 11. Strategic Significance of the NIS Area
This Section should give the reader an over-all
appreciation of the basic intelligence aspects of
the NIS Area. It should be designed to impress
the user from the outset with the more permanent
strategic significance of the area but to avoid
purely temporary strategic estimates. In order
to accomplish this purpose, SECTION 11 should be
based upon the intelligence set forth in SECTIONS
12-19 and integrated so that the basic strength and
the weakness of the country become apparent.
Only those elements of basic intelligence which are
required to portray the strategic significance of the
particular area should be included.
Each SECTION 11 must be custom made to fit the
area under discussion, and no prescribed topic out-
line can be set forth. With the exception of the
section title no topic headings will be inserted.
The opening paragraph, however, shall state very
briefly the conclusions drawn from what follows
in the remainder of the section and draw attention
in a few words to what is strategically important
about the area. For instance, it might be appro-
priate to state that a specific country is important
from the strategic viewpoint because of its key
geographical location in a certain part of the world,
any important strength factors, and the principal
weaknesses.
The remainder of SECTION 11 should be an inte-
grated portrayal discussing the important elements
of the country from which are drawn the conclu-
sions in the first paragraph. The discussion
should include the strategic significance to be at-
tached to the geographical location and significant
air distances to important localities in other areas,
and, where applicable, the significance of the NIS
Area militarily, politically, sociologically, scientifi-
cally, and economically. For instance, the coun-
try may have a key strategic location and have
political, sociological, and economic, but no scien-
tific or military significance. If so the significant
but not the insignificant features would be in-
cluded in the discussion. No attempt should be
made to introduce elements not pertinent to the
conclusions.
In conjunction with the text there should be a
composite map portraying the principal basic in-
telligence elements susceptible to such portrayal.
At the end of SECTION 11 of each NIS there shall
be an editorial note stating that SECTIONS 12-19
which follow correspond to CHAPTERS II-IX. In
the event that a whole Chapter, or Section of
CHAPTER I, of a particular NIS is to be omitted, a
statement to that effect, together with the reasons
for such omission, shall appear.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 BRIEF
Sections 12-19
SECTIONS 12-19 are summaries of the correspond-
ing NIS Chapters, as follows:
Section 12
Military Geography
Chapter II
Section 13
Transportation and Tele-
Chapter III
communications
Section 14
Sociological
Chapter IV
Section 15
Political
Chapter V
Section 16
Economic
Chapter VI
Section 17
Scientific
Chapter VII
Section 18
Armed Forces
Chapter VIII
Section 19
Map and Chart Appraisal
Chapter IX
SECTIONS 12-19, inclusive, will provide an orderly
arrangement of supporting evidence for SECTION 11
and a concise summary of the significant factual
and interpretive conclusions evolved in CHAPTERS
II-IX. They will thus ensure the reliability of
SECTION 11, and at the same time, fill the need for
a usable digest of the substance of the NIS.
Each section should always include Subsection
A, "General" and such other sections as may be
necessary for proper treatment of the principal ele-
ments of that topic. There should be a final sub-
section, Comments on Principal Sources, except in
SECTION 19 which does not require this treatment.
A. General
An over-all appreciation of the salient features
of strategic significance which are included in the
Chapter under discussion. This Subsection is not
intended to be a mere summary of what is included
in the following subsections but should be a suc-
cinct analysis of the most important elements of
the topic as a whole. The significance of the basic
intelligence aspects should be included and also
those aspects of other sections should be integrated
which serve to enhance its meaningfulness. The
contributing agencies may include such strength
and weakness factors as the agencies deem appro-
priate for an adequate presentation.
B.-X. Succinct summaries of salient features
Each subsection is to be a succinct summary of
the salient topics covered in one or more of the
sections of the corresponding chapter of the NIS.
Should one or more sections of any given chapter be
omitted for a particular country or be considered
of insufficient importance to warrant summarizing
in CHAPTER I, they should be omitted in CHAPTER
I treatment. For example, since Switzerland has
no seacoast, CHAPTER II of that NIS would not
contain SECTION 22, COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES;
and no corresponding subsections would appear in
CHAPTER I. Also, where deemed appropriate, sev-
eral sections of the relevant chapter may be sum-
marized in a single subsection of CHAPTER I. For
example, it might be feasible in a particular NIS
to summarize in a single subsection of CHAPTER I
the salient transportation factors regarding roads,
railroads, and inland waterways.
Y. Comments on principal sources
Comprehensive evaluation of the basic intelli-
gence contained in the chapter under considera-
tion, including the pointing out of significant gaps
or deficiencies and the general credence to be at-
tached to the subject matter. In view of the in-
herent nature of the material appearing in SECTION
19, it will not include this Subsection.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER II
MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20 Introduction
Section 21 Military Geographic Regions
Section 22 Coasts and Landing Beaches
Section 23 Weather and Climate
Section 24 Topography
Section 25 Urban Areas
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter II - Military Geography
OUTLINE
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
B. Dominant geographic elements
C. Strategic areas
D. Approaches and internal routes
SECTION 23. WEATHER AND CLIMATE
A. General weather and climatic condi-
tions
B. Weather and military operations
1. Air operations
2. Air-ground operations
3. Ground surface operations
4. Amphibious operations
C. Comments on meteorological services
D. Climatic tables
E. Comments on principal sources
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
A. General
1. Summary
2. Maps and charts
3. Criteria for beach selection
4. Beach tables
5. Reliability index
6. Glossary
B. Nearshore oceanography
1. General
2. Tides and currents
3. Sea, swell, and surf
4. Coastal bottom sediments
5. Biology
C. Sector 1
1. Subsector 1-A
2. Subsector 1-B
3. Subsector 1-C, etc.
D. Sector 2
E. Sector 3; etc.
X. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 24. TOPOGRAPHY
A. General
B. Descriptive analysis
1. Landforms, relief and drainage
pattern
2. Drainage characteristics
3. Water resources
4. Soils
5. Lithology
6. Vegetation
7. State of the ground
8. Culture features
9. Special physical phenomena
C. Military evaluation
1. Cross-country movement
2. Constructional aspects
3. Other military aspects
D. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 25. URBAN AREAS
A. General
1. Urbanization
2. Main characteristics of urban areas
B. Principal urban areas
1. Key strategic urban areas
2. Other selected urban areas
C. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER II
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
The six sections of CHAPTER II cover the strategic,
regional, and topical aspects of the military geog-
raphy of the NIS Geographic Area. Clear distinc-
tion between these three aspects of military geog-
raphy is essential to the orderly preparation of
these sections and to the efficient use of the
chapter.
SECTION 20, INTRODUCTION, furnishes a strategic
appreciation of the NIS Geographic Area as a whole
in relation to its surroundings. The Section is a
broad evaluation and although based in consider-
able part on SECTION 21 has much wider scope, in-
cluding discussion of interrelationships between
regions, and evaluations of external approaches,
strategic areas, and internal routes. It should
contain one or more over-all intelligence maps de-
picting such essential elements as strategic areas,
coastal and other approaches, barriers to move-
ment, and corridors and passes favorable to move-
ment.
SECTION 21, 'MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS, is
an integration and analysis of the key military
aspects of SECTIONS 22 through 25. It presents
for each region the significant elements treated in
these sections in terms of their combined effects on
military operations, avoiding over-all strategic con-
siderations on the one hand and unnecessary repe-
tition of topical information on the other. Presen-
tation may be by text, tables, and maps. For each
region, the text summarizes and evaluates in terms
of military significance the outstanding military ge-
ographic characteristics of that region; the text is
supported by individual regional tables, based on
more detailed material in SECTIONS 22 through 25,
presenting the environmental characteristics and
military evaluation of the region and of any sub-
regions and/or distinctive areas into which it is
divided. Intelligence maps and other graphics
present military analysis of the environmental fac-
tors of each region, subregion, or group of regions.
SECTIONS 22 through 25 (and SUPPLEMENT IV)
comprise the detailed topical treatments of the sub-
ject matter necessary for NIS purposes. Within
each topic or subtopic the material is organized
on a regional or locality basis, as for individual
sectors or subsectors of coast, regions characterized
by similarities of climate, terrain, soil, or vegeta-
tion, and individual urban areas.
The outline presented is designed to provide a
basis for appraisal of the military significance of
the geography of any NIS area. It is intended to
be sufficiently flexible to be adaptable to any pecu-
liar situation that the authors of CHAPTER II may
encounter.
Each topical heading in the outline must, how-
ever, be considered by the authors. As indicated in
the guidance for each section, adequate latitude is
provided to permit presentation of each topic in the
clearest and simplest form, where alternative forms
of presentation are practicable.
In the event that modification of the outline, or a
part thereof, is considered by an author to be
desirable for a particular NIS Area, the proposed
modification will not be made without prior ap-
proval by the Chapter Coordinator.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20. Introduction
This Section is prepared by Army from material
provided by all contributors to CHAPTER II. It is
designed to provide the reader with a succinct
evaluation of (1) the external geographic rela-
tionships of the NIS Geographic Area and (2) its
dominantly significant internal geographic charac-
teristics. The Section will be prepared after SEC-
TIONS 21 through 25 have been completed. It will
not, however, be an abridgement of either these sec-
tions or Of SECTION 12 Of CHAPTER I. Photographs
of especially significant aspects of military geog-
raphy covered by SECTION 20 will be included as
pertinent.
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
The significant aspects of the location, size,
shape, and boundaries of the NIS Geographic Area
as a whole will be presented in integrated para-
graphs without topical headings, supported by
1) a map on which the NIS Geographic Area is cen-
tered on an azimuthal projection and on which
concentric circles of air distances are included and
2) a map demonstrating the comparative areas of
the NIS Geographic Area and of the United States
or North America.
B. Dominant geographic elements
All facts of the environment as presented in
SECTIONS 21 through 25 will be considered by Army
in preparing this discussion, and those environ-
mental elements that are dominantly significant
will be treated in integrated statements sup-
ported by one or more over-all intelligence maps
and the minimum number of maps from SECTIONS
21 through 25 that are considered desirable to
demonstrate the significance of the selected
factors.
C. Strategic areas
Each strategic area of the NIS Geographic Area
will be defined and briefly described by Army on the
basis of the applicability of one or more of the fol-
lowing factors (or other pertinent factors) which
are of national or international significance : criti-
cal and/or key industries (especially military end-
products plants) ; critical and other strategically
significant mining developments and mineral re-
sources; key transportation and communications
centers and facilities; military installations includ-
ing key offensive, defensive, and supporting facili-
ties; population concentrations (ethnic, religious,
social, including significant minorities) ; key ter-
rain features (passes, corridors, beaches, air-drop
sites) ; food resources, including production and
storage centers; etc. Strategic areas will be delim-
ited on a map with the approaches to and internal
routes of the NIS Geographic Area.
Strategic, for the purposes of evaluating strategic
significance in the NIS Geographic Area, is defined
as: pertaining to the implications of any of the
above factors upon a nation's developing and using
political, economic, and psychological means and/
or armed forces during peace or war to afford the
maximum support to national policies, to increase
the probabilities and favorable consequences of vic-
tory, and to lessen the chances of defeat.
D. Approaches and internal routes
Evaluations of the air, sea, and ground ap-
proaches to the NIS Geographic Area as a whole
will be prepared by Air Force, Navy, and Army re-
spectively and coordinated by Army. Air ap-
proaches will be presented on a quadrant basis. All
approaches will be shown in suitable manner on a
map showing the strategic areas and internal
routes of the NIS Geographic Area. Internal
routes will be evaluated and selected with respect
to the strategic areas within this and adjacent NIS
Areas; first on the basis of current logistical capa-
bilities and second on the basis of potentialities
for logistical development. Routes lacking exist-
ing transportation facilities capable of carrying
military traffic will be evaluated similarly in re-
lation to routes having such facilities. All selected
routes will be delimited and classified on the stra-
tegic areas map which will be supported by concise
tabular or textual evaluation.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER II
Section 21. Military
This Section will be prepared by Army and will
include material provided by Air Force and Navy.
It will be an analysis of the NIS Geographic Area
in terms of military geographic regions. The
military geographic region as discussed in the NIS
is a region in which the combination of environ-
mental conditions is sufficiently uniform to per-
mit, or to require, throughout its extent the use
of the same general mode of military operations
or kinds of warfare and of the same general types
of equipment and personnel. Minor areas in
which conditions significantly affect but do not
prevent the basic mode of military operations may
be considered either as military geographic sub-
regions or as distinctive areas within the military
geographic region, e.g., a hill belt in a large plain.
The military geographic regions and subregions
for each NIS Geographic Area will be delimited
on a map by the Army agency responsible for pro-
duction of SECTION 21 after topics treated in SEC-
TIONs 22 through 25 have been analyzed sufficiently
to permit fixing of boundaries. All CHAPTER II
contributors concerned will concur on regional and
subregional boundaries previous to any agency's
initiating final production of SECTION 21 material.
Geographic Regions
A. General
A military geographic regions map will show
boundaries of the various regions, subregions,
and/or distinctive areas. Regional breakdown will
also be presented as a list in the text or as a concise
tabular summary. Introductory integrated text
will summarize significant aspects of each region
as is necessary to relate the regions to the NIS
Geographic Area as a whole and to analagous or
comparable areas in North America. Photographs
and other graphics may be used for illustration.
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
A concise textual analysis and a tabular sum-
mary of each region and its various subregions
and/or distinctive areas will be given. Each re-
gion will appear as a separate numbered heading.
Intelligence-type maps showing interrelated fac-
tors will be presented for each region, group of re-
gions, or important part of a region.
The tabular summary of each military geo-
graphic region or subregion, supporting the map
presentation of the region or subregion, will in-
clude the topics shown in the sample layout.
FIGURE 21-1 . ANALYSIS OF SINGLE MILITARY
Tabular
REGION, SUBREGION,
AND/OR DISTINCTIVE AREA
Landforms, relief,
and drainage
patterns
Drainage
character-
istics
Weather
and
climate
Water
resources
Soils
Lithology
Vegetation
(Example)
GEOGRAPHIC REGION OR GROUP OF REGIONS
Analysis
FACTORS
MILITARY EVALUATION
MILITARY
State
Culture
Coasts and
Special
Cross-
Constructional aspects
Other
OPERATIONS
of
ground
features
and towns
landing
beaches
physical
phenomena
country
movement
fields
Airfields
Roads
installations
military
aspects
(KNOWN
TYPES)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
'TUNE 1951 MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
1) All data in this summary will be presented in tele-
graphic form. The above format will be used, to be
reproduced on a double-page spread, map apron, or
fold-in.
2) Arrange regions in Column I in alphabetical se-
quence (i.e., Region A, Region B, etc.) and identify each
by name. Data included directly under each topic by re-
gions will concern those attributes which are character-
istic of the region as a whole.
3) Arrange subregions and/or distinctive areas in Col-
umn I in alphabetical and numerical sequence under the
appropriate region (i.e., Subregion A-1, Subregion A-2,
etc.).
4) Treat content of all Environmental Factors and
Military Evaluation columns in definitive terms. Use
salient statistics and facts to categorize the regional,
subregional, or distinctive area characteristics when perti-
nent. A high degree of discrimination must be exercised
in the selection of data to be included in the tabular
summary for each topic. Include only those essential
elements treated in other sections. If a particular topic
is not applicable for any region, subregion, or distinctive
area, the words "not applicable" will be included in the
relevant space in the summary.
5) Under the heading of Military Operations include
factual statements on known types of military operations
such as airborne, amphibious, arctic, armored, cavalry,
desert, infantry, jungle, and mountain, conducted in the
region, or identify the region with a geographically
analogous area for which types of modern operations are
known. Statements should particularly bear on the ex-
tent to which specialized forces were employed in opera-
tions and whether such employment was required by en-
vironmental factors. If the success or lack of success
of either conventional or specialized types of operations
in the region can be definitely attributed to environmental
factors, this should be noted.
Section 22. Coasts and Landing Beaches
1. SUMMARY
General description of the entire coastal area
of study, including relations to major geographic
regions and to adjacent NIS Geographic Areas.
State length of coast in statute miles and refer to
footnote on use of nautical and statute miles.*
Stress best and poorest sectors and subsectors;
mention specific beaches or coastal reaches that
offer access to important routes inland. Follow
by tabular description of major coastal divi-
sions, as in example below.
* In text, distances are in statute miles unless nauti-
cal miles is specifically indicated by n., as "14 n.
miles."
2. MAPS AND CHARTS
Refer to maps, charts, and sailing directions used
and discuss any discrepancies involving coastal
outline or distances.
3. CRITERIA FOR BEACH SELECTION
Discuss methods used for selecting beaches and
sources from which selection was made.
4. BEACH TABLES
Discuss wherever necessary headings and terms
used in tables, and types of information to be
included therein.
a. BEACH NUMBERING AND LOCATION - How
numbered in text, on beach location maps, on
photos; how located; reference to photos.
(Hxantple)
FIGURE 22-1. SUMMARY OF COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
SECTOR
SEA APPROACH
BEACIInS I
COASTAL. TERRAIN
(Locate by pronii-
(Characteristics and dangers in both
(Number and general dimen-
(Characteristics inland 15-20 miles or
nent features or
offshore and nearshore zones, in-
sions, gradients, and consist-
to first, major barrier. Indicate
towns. Include
eluding ice. Locate 5- and 10-
ency of beaches, described in
presence of R.R.'s, roads, and
coordinates in
fathom curves.)
relative terms explained under
trails.)
parentheses.)
A, 4.)
1
Plum Point to Wil- Offshore approaches generally clear;
son Cove 10-fathom curve 4 to 6 mi. off-
(33?1O'N, 10?34'E; shore; 5-fathom depths within 2
35?06'N, 12?48'E) mi, of shore. Nearshore ap-
proaches generally clear with scat-
tered rocks fringing shore; bottom
slope gentle to mild; bottom sand
and clay.
2
Wilson Cove to
...............
............ to.
Four areas of short, narrow, first
sand beaches with moderate to
steep gradients. Good exits
inland from all beaches.
Dunes back beaches, in turn backed
by narrow coastal plain rising to
rolling hills and mountains about 8
mi. inland. Paved highway paral-
lels coast at 500 to 1,0000s; several
roads and trails lead inland; R.R.
to Plum Point.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER II
b. LENGTH AND USABLE LENGTH - Definitions of
long and short; total length minus unusable
stretches.
C. WIDTHS: AT L.W.; AT H.W. - Definitions of
L. W. and H.W. limits; reference to beach profile
diagram; wide, medium, narrow.
d. GRADIENTS: L.W. TO H.W.; H.W. ZONE -
Definitions of gradients to supplement beach pro-
file diagram; steep to flat.
e. APPROACH - Limits; bottom slopes; refer-
ence to beach profile diagram and beach gradient
scale.
g. MATERIAL AND FIRMNESS - Definitions of
firm and soft.
h. TERRAIN IMMEDIATELY BEHIND BEACH - 15 to
20 miles inland, or to first major barrier.
i. EXITS AND COMMUNICATIONS INLAND - In-
clude routes parallel to shore.
5. RELIABILITY INDEX
6. GLOSSARY
List of common terms relating to terrain, hy-
drography, and political subdivisions.
B. Nearshore oceanography
Include note : For offshore oceanography and
marine climate see Special NIS of appropriate
area.
2. TIDES AND CURRENTS
Include table of tidal range constants, chart of
cotidal lines, chart of spring tides, illustration of
typical tidal curve for area, definitions of tidal
terms, and text material on how to apply the tidal
data. Text material on local currents.
BEACH NUMBER AND
LOCATION
3. SEA, SWELL, AND SURF
Include histograms and/or sea-and-swell roses
for the coast area, depending on data available,
text description and definitions of terms.
Include a table or a strip chart of the coastal
bottom sediments, also brief text material.
5. BIOLOGY
Include descriptions and illustrations of dan-
gerous marine life, such as poisonous sea snakes,
and fish. Presence or absence of bioluminescence
will be mentioned. Presence of algae that can
conceal water hazards or foul screws and rudders
of landing craft will be noted. All this material
will be in text form with the exception of illus-
trations of dangerous marine life-if present.
C. Sector 1
(Coordinates of limits of sector)
(Reference to Coastal Divisions and Distribu-
tion of Landing Beaches Map (FIGURE 22- ) or
to beach location map if _ map shows entire sec-
tor; reference to general chart or charts issued
by U.S.H.O.)
Sectors, preferably not exceeding 9 in number,
should be based on clear divisions between dif
ferent types of coastal terrain, which should agree
with geographic regions presented in SECTION 21.
Sector limits should be described in terms of dis-
tances from prominent geographic features such
as major headlands.
General statement without heading. Brief sum-
mary of hydrography, coast, terrain backing coast,
and number, character, and approximate location
of beach areas. If sector is too varied to be sum-
marized without dividing into subsectors, general
statement may be confined to features common
to whole sector, list of subsectors within sector,
and number and approximate location of major
beaches.
LENGTH AND USABLE WIDTHS: AT L.W.;
LENGTII AT H.W.
(52) * Black Point E. Cove beach, 1.9 mi.
(FIG. 22-66.) long; 1.0 mi. along
* moraine, forming a
point; 1,500 yds. in
cove SE of point in-
tersected by two
streams; all usable.
50 ft. at point to 600
ft. at stream
mouths, L.W. ; 25 ft.
at point to 200 ft.
at stream mouths,
H.W.
GRADIENTS: L.W. TO
H.W. ; H.W. ZONE
1 on 5 at point, 1 on
50 at stream
mouths, L.W. to
II.W.; 1 on 5 at
point, 1 on 10 at
stream mouths,
H.W. zone.
FIGURE 22-2. BEACH AREAS OF
Beaches physically most suitable for
Nearshore bottom slopes flat to steep;
30-ft. depth 750 to 900 ft. offshore;
anchorage in 54 ft. 2,100 ft. off cove
beach; good holding ground, mud
and shell, approaches clear; offshore
current sets N, 2 knots.
NOTE Beach lengths and distances along the coast and inland are expressed in statute miles; distances across water are expressed
in nautical miles except when referring to beach locations.
* If beach is also described in text, add here "(See also (2) below.)"
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
1. SUBSECTOR 1-A-SINGLE ISLAND, GROUP
OF ISLANDS, OR STRETCH OF COAST
(Coordinates of limits of subsector.)
(Figure numbers of beach location maps of
subsector; U.S.H.O. Charts of subsector.)
Subsectors should be selected as logical coastal
units in which hydrographic or terrain conditions,
or both, are sufficiently uniform to permit general-
ization. Limiting of subsectors to lengths con-
venient for the making of beach location maps
leads to unnecessary repetition in the description
of the areas covered by such maps.
General statement without heading. Brief de-
scription of general characteristics of subsector;
very brief if covered in generalization under sector
heading.
a. COAST - Progressing along coast, give for
each part brief statement of offshore approach and
shore features, followed by description of coastal
terrain and brief description of anchorages. Give
reference to applicable U.S.H.O. Chart if several
charts cover area of subsector. Leave description
of beaches to heading (b). Avoid duplicating in-
formation that is clearly and correctly conveyed by
the beach location maps (distances, shapes, and
dimensions of bays and islands, spot heights, etc.),
except where such duplication is essential to clear
statement. Coastal description of subsector may
be broken into subdivisions (1), (2), (3), etc., as
plotted on beach location maps. Subdivisions
should be logical coastal units such as a stretch of
fairly uniform coast, an island or group of islands,
a bay or group of similar bays, a prominent penin-
sula.
b. LANDING BEACHES - Exclude general coastal
description. Beach areas are each identified by
reference number in parentheses keyed to encircled
reference number on beach location maps. Co-
ordination of coastal description and beach de-
scription should be maintained in the planning,
writing, and drafting stages so that beaches or
beach areas do not cross sector or subsector bound-
COASTAL SUBSECTOR 1-A)
landing are marked with star (*)
SURF AND TIDAL RANGE
MATERIAL AND
FIRMNESS
aries, and, if possible, do not cross subdivision
boundaries. (General statement without heading
can be given if desired.)
Example 1
(No beaches.)
b. LANDING BEACHES - "None described."
Example 2
(Beach table but no detailed text description.)
b. LANDING BEACHES - (General statement)
(Beach table: see example below.)
Example 3
(Beach table and detailed text description.)
b. LANDING BEACHES
(1) (General statement) - (Beach table:
see example below.)
(2) Single beach area - If description is
brief it may be run without subheadings. If de-
scription is longer, headings (a), (b), and (c) may
be used as follows.
(a) LOCATION AND CHARACTER - Give loca-
tion of beach, not coastal segment, proximity to
landmarks and developed areas; shape, length, usa-
ble length, width, and gradient; physical composi-
tion, consistency, and bearing capability at L.W.
and H.W.; tidal flats and salt marsh, including
consistency of bottom; surface features and ob-
structions; structures such as groins and bulk-
heads; locations of rivers and streams entering or
crossing beach; local use; areas most suitable for
landings.
(b) SEA APPROACH - Deal briefly with area
shoreward of 40-fathom depth or of 10 miles from
shore, whichever is smaller; anchorage areas; de-
scribe in greater detail area shoreward of 5-fathom
line; bottom gradient and character of bottom;
locations and depths of reefs, bars, rocks, shoals,
and other dangers; local conditions of winds, tides,
currents, surf, waves, and water temperature
ranges.
TERRAIN IMMEDIATELY RETTIND
BEACH
E to W, 1 knot; tidal range 11.5 firm.
ft., springs.
beach backed by wide valley ris- coastal road and settlements fin-
ing to hills 5 mi. inland. land. Coastal R.R. parallel to
road. Telephone and telegraph at
settlements.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER II
(C) ADJACENT TERRAIN AND EXITS - Topog-
raphy on flanks of beach, immediately backing
beach, and inland at least 15 to 20 miles or to first
major barrier; nearest cover and concealment;
trafficability; roads, trails, waterways, natural cor-
ridors, and cross-country exits from beach, nearest
fresh water-potable and non-potable; nearest
drop zones and emergency landing places for air-
craft; nearest radio, telegraph, telephone, rail-
roads, power lines, power plants, and habitations.
(3), (4), etc., Single beach area - Group of
closely related beaches.
Stretch of coast, single island, or group of
islands.
3. SUBSECTOR 1-C; etc.
E. Sector 3; etc.
NOTE If landing places other than beaches are de-
scribed, or if descriptions of beach areas and
other landing places are interspersed, use gen-
eral heading, bb. Landing places.
X. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 23. Weather and Climate
A. General weather and climatic conditions
This Subsection emphasizes the processes
which control climatic regimes and contains
the bulk of general climatic discussion. In-
clude figures, photos, maps, and those tables
which are necessary to illustrate especially
significant climatic factors. Illustrate destructive
effects of weather and weather phenomena such as
dust storms, tornadoes, fog banks, etc. Discuss
the general weather and climate conditions in
their broad aspects emphasizing those elements
and factors having significance in regard to high-
level military operational planning as specified by
the various agencies of the Department of Defense.
Subdivision of the NIS Geographic Area into mili-
tarily significant climatic regions is desirable de-
pending upon the weather and climatic conditions
in the particular NIS Geographic Area.
B. Weather and military operations (text, il-
lustrations, and significant tables)
1. AIR OPERATIONS (above friction layer)
Discuss climatic factors and conditions which
affect all types of aerial operations, e.g., cloudiness,
visibility, icing, turbulence, thunderstorms, winds
and temperatures aloft, dust and blowing sand in
the upper air, and special upper-air weather phe-
nomena. Tables to contain data significant to
aerial operation.
2. AIR-GROUND OPERATIONS (within friction
layer)
Discuss climatic factors which affect chemical
and biological warfare, control of atmospheric con-
tamination, parachute, aircraft landing, glider, and
similar operations which take place within the
lower layers of the atmosphere. These conclusions
result from analyses of vertical temperature, mois-
ture, density, and wind structure as influenced by
topography and large-scale meteorological condi-
tions and their translation into microclimatic
terms; i.e., distributions (local) of wind, tempera-
ture, humidity, stability, fog, haze, etc., as func-
tions of location and topography. Give full con-
sideration to the periodic (diurnal and seasonal)
and non-periodic variations in stability, visibility,
temperature, humidity, etc.
3. GROUND SURFACE OPERATIONS
Discuss briefly movement of equipment, mobility,
clothing, construction, storage, shelter, etc., in
terms of precipitation, temperature, floods, dry and
wet periods, etc., using illustrative tables when
necessary to emphasize important elements. Make
reference to SECTION 24 for the effect of climate on
state of ground and cross-country movement.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-?
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
4. AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS
Discuss effects of coastal weather including sur-
face winds and their relation to swell and surf,
cloudiness, visibility, air and sea-water tempera-
tures, and drift ice.
C. Comments on the meteorological services
Discuss the meteorological facilities in the area,
the observational network, types of observation,
equipment, and personnel.
D. Climatic tables
Tables to contain average and extreme climatic
data significant to all types of military operations
within the area.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 24. Topography
This Section is prepared by Army. It is designed
to be topical treatment for the NIS Geographic
Area as a whole of those environmental factors not
treated in SECTIONS 22, 23, and 25 of CHAPTER II
and it is intended that maps and tables be used
to the practicable maximum in presenting the in-
formation. Photographs will be used for illustra-
tive purposes within the topical scope of the Sec-
tion. A reliability diagram will accompany each
topical map included in the Section.
A. General
Appraise briefly the relative significance of the
elements which comprise the topography of the
NIS Geographic Area under discussion.
B. Descriptive analysis
Each of the subordinate topics will treat in
factual terms descriptively and definitively those as-
pects of the topic which are known to have military
significance. Statements on military interpreta-
tions or applications will be confined to Subsection
24, C. Subsection 24, B, will include only such eval-
uations as are prescribed in the following para-
graphs. The discussion of each topic as a whole
will be in proportion to its relative significance in
the NIS Geographic Area with respect to other
topics treated in the Section. Seasonal aspects
will be considered wherever significant. Tabular
presentation will be used to a practicable maximum.
A map will be prepared for each topic where appro-
priate.
1. LANDFORMS, RELIEF, AND DRAINAGE
PATTERN
Cover with an integrated discussion developed
around maps, supported by text and tables, which
treat definitively the essential elements of the topic
with emphasis on the larger aspects of the patterns
involved.
2. DRAINAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Include the essential following (or other perti-
nent) data in their seasonal aspects for signifi-
cant streams, lakes, and other water features:
depths, widths, banks, bottom conditions, veloci-
ties, gradients, transparency or turbidity, sedimen-
tation, temperatures, and ice conditions. The
treatment will be in tabular and graphic form
supported by essential text.
3. WATER RESOURCES
Definitive information on quantities, qualities,
availability, accessibility, and distribution of sur-
face- and ground-water supplies will be presented
in map(s), table(s), and text. Data on qualities
and quantities will be selected in relation to all
probable military uses of water and not only with
respect to potability.
4. SOILS
The treatment of soils will be developed around
a simplified soils map showing dominant soil units
and supported by a table and text describing their
physical characteristics and evaluating their engi-
neering properties.
5. LITHOLOGY
This topic will be developed around a simplified
geologic map showing significant lithologic units
and supported by a table and text describing their
physical characteristics and evaluating their po-
tential usefulness as construction materials.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER II
6. VEGETATION
Existing significant vegetation types will be de-
limited on a map supported by table (s) and text
describing physical characteristics such as heights,
density of stand, stem diameters, coloration, cul-
tivation practices, etc., and evaluating their poten-
tial usefulness as construction materials and as
sources of supplies, and their susceptibility to con-
flagration.
7. STATE OF THE GROUND
This topic will be prepared by Army after SEC-
TION 23 and Subsections 24, B, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 have
been completed. It will be developed around maps
supported by tables and text and will be a syn-
thesis showing the seasonal occurrence and char-
acteristics of the ground when dry, wet, frozen
hard, and snow covered.
8. CULTURE FEATURES
Cover with an integrated discussion of the loca-
tion and distribution of cultural objects which
exist in sufficient concentrations to possess signifi-
cance in planning of major military operations.
Such features as mines, quarries, tombs, burial
mounds, dikes, ditches, transportation nets, hedge
rows, terraces, etc., will be evaluated and pre-
sented in map(s), table(s), and photographs sup-
porting the text.
9. SPECIAL :PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
Such factors as permafrost, seismic disturbances,
and volcanic phenomena peculiarly applicable to
the NIS Geographic Area being considered and of
outstanding -significance will be presented in map
and table form supported by an integrated textual
discussion. This discussion will give definitive in-
formation on the phenomena within the area con-
cerned; it will not be concerned with general or
theoretical aspects of the subject.
C. Military evaluation
1. CROSS-COUNTRY MOVEMENT
Evaluate all environmental conditions affecting
off-road movement of military vehicles, equipment,
and personnel throughout the year.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL ASPECTS
Evaluate the feasibility of constructing air-
fields, roads, shelters, and underground installa-
tions during the various seasons as affected by the
collective environmental factors. Where the nat-
ural conditions of the NIS Geographic Area war-
rant, roads may be combined in a single topic with
airfields. Otherwise each topic will be presented
separately in accordance with the outline. Spe-
cific military constructional problems other than
those applicable to airfields, roads, and under-
ground installations will be treated under such
additional subordinate headings as are required.
3. OTHER MILITARY ASPECTS
Evaluate such other military aspects as are not
subject to discussion under Cross-country Move-
ment or Constructional Aspects but that are af-
fected by environmental topics treated in SECTION
24.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 25. Urban Areas
This Section is designed to be a digest of
information on the physical aspects of the
urban areas in the NIS Area supplemented by
pertinent generalized comments concerning their
geographic, political, economic, and military im-
portance. Where the general composition of the
cities and towns in the area lends itself to com-
parison with the cities and towns in a geographic
area of the United States or with those of coun-
tries in the same geographic, political, or economic
group, such comparison is desirable. Data will
be presented for the NIS Area as a whole, except
when such treatment might be misleading for an
included subarea. When the area under consid-
eration is divided into distinctive geographic, po-
litical, or economic subareas, the data may be
presented by appropriate subarea.
Tables and charts will be utilized to a maximum
to supplement descriptive text. Town plans will
emphasize those natural and man-made features
of the urban area and its environs that are of
primary military significance. They will supple-
ment the text and tabulated data. Each key stra-
tegic urban area will be illustrated by suitable
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
plans, either as functional overlays on an aerial
mosaic, or if no suitable mosaic is available, on a
town plan that emphasizes adequately the salient
urban characteristics having military significance.
Photographs will be used to support the text and
other graphics.
Where there are important deficiencies in the
source data available for the study, cover these
deficiencies in the Comments on Principal Sources.
Summarize the significant features affecting
urban areas collectively including a brief general-
ized treatment of the major collective functions
(industrial, agricultural, mining, etc.).
1. URBANIZATION
a. PATTERN-Ratio of urban population to
total populations; distribution of urban areas; ef-
fects of ethnic and religious groupings where
pertinent.
b. FACTORS AFFECTING URBANIZATION, AND
TRENDS-With respect to economic development
(agricultural, industrial, exploitation of natural
resources).
NOTE Generalized statements with regard to popula-
tion trends will be coordinated with the con-
tributor for CHAPTER IV (SECTION 41).
2. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF URBAN
AREAS
Discuss typical militarily significant charac-
teristics of cities and towns by area or subareas,
covering :
a. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS - Significant
characteristics of town construction as influenced
by tradition, terrain, climate, etc.; of materials
used and their availability; of capacity to resist
shock, inundation, conflagration, etc.
b. COMMUNICATIONS -Generalized statements
on principal types of intertown communications
(rail, road, waterway, and air) ; their adequacy
and effect on the cities and towns of an area.
C. UTILITIES, SERVICES, AND FACILITIES - Evalu-
ate the cities and towns of an area collec-
tively with respect to the extent of development
generally (including lack, prevalence, and ade-
quacy) of those elements of urban economy com-
monly classified as utilities, services or facilities;
such as water supply, sewerage, sanitation (includ-
ing public health conditions), electric power, tran-
sit, telecommunications, storage, hospitals, gas,
refrigeration, etc.
d. PLANNING - Programs for reconstruction in
war-devastated or other devastated areas; future
planning and expansion programs.
NOTE Emphasis will be given to the items discussed
in 25, A, 2, a.
Principal urban areas
Principal urban areas include key strategic
urban areas and other selected urban areas (never
more than 100) chosen for consideration because
of their size and their military, political, and eco-
nomic importance. These two categories of urban
areas will be discussed in separate subsections as
indicated below. (Army will submit lists of key
strategic urban areas and other selected urban
areas through the CHAPTER II Coordinator to the
NIS Committee for transmission to IAC agencies
for concurrence and/or comment. In the event of
nonconcurrense (s) only or comment, CHAPTER II CO-
ordinator will arrange a conference of IAC agen-
cies concerned to resolve differences and to obtain
a generally acceptable selection.)
Introductory text should explain the method of
treatment of principal urban areas and high-
light the most important of these areas and their
military significance in the country's political and
economic structure.
1. KEY STRATEGIC URBAN AREAS
Key strategic urban areas are those considered
to be of primary military, political, or economic
significance.
Introductory statement of the number of key
strategic urban areas and their importance gen-
erally (reasons for selecting).
The following indicates the preferred order of
discussion in the detail required for individual
key strategic urban areas.
a. URBAN AREA A - Name to be in the spelling
approved by the Board on Geographical Names, fol-
lowed by variant names and spellings, in paren-
theses, the coordinates, then the figure number of
the town plan in parentheses.
Normally, only one paragraph will be required
for each of the subheadings, (1) to (5), follow-
ing. If the importance justifies, appropriate
subparagraphs may be used for expanded
treatment. Appropriate references should be
made to the accompanying illustrative mate-
rial.
(1) Significance - Brief statements outlin-
ing the significant facts about the urban area, cov-
ering: its location (political and geographic) ; its
population (as of a stated date) and trend (only
if significant) ; its importance based upon its po-
litical, cultural, military, and economic functions.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER II
(2) Physical characteristics - Generalized
statements covering: topography of the site (in-
cluding underlying earth structure) and natural
landmarks; general layout of urban area, shape,
and dimensions (illustrated by an annotated aerial
photograph, by town plans with suitable overlays
showing functional and structural patterns and
features, and by photographs, if available) ; ratio of
roof coverage to ground area; street pattern (passa-
bility for military traffic, width of streets, and
clearances), crossings of natural obstacles, and by-
passing of town; predominating types of construc-
tion and man-made landmarks, and heights of
buildings (by stories) ; other pertinent character-
istics.
(3) External communications - Factual
statement of existing rail, road, water and air
communications (including the location of air-
fields serving the urban area) ; the adequacy of
such communications and their importance to the
town. Details of road widths, trackage, length of
runways, etc., are not required.
(4) Utilities, services, and facilities - Gen-
eral statements covering: water supply; sew-
erage system; sanitation (including public health
conditions) ; electric power; transit (streetcar,
trolley bus, bus, and cab) ; telecommunications;
billeting capacity (public buildings, schools, insti-
tutions, barracks, etc.) ; storage (open, closed, cold,
petroleum, explosives) ; hospitals (total bed ca-
pacity) ; and any other utilities, services, or facili-
ties.
NOTE Specific items must be correlated and coordi-
nated with the producers of counterparts in
other chapters or sections.
(5) Important industrial and other in-
stallations
Whenever possible the relative national or inter-
national industrial or other importance generally
of the urban area will be indicated. Similarly, the
national or international importance of specific in-
stallations in relation to their respective industries
will be indicated.
b. URBAN AREA B
C. URBAN AREA C, etc.
2. OTHER SELECTED URBAN AREAS
Present information on other selected urban
areas in tabular form. The text will provide an
introduction giving the number and general im-
portance of these areas. In the tabular presenta-
tion, towns may be grouped by subareas, if this
is desirable. Appropriate column headings will be
used for the following information:
Name, followed by variant names and spellings in
parentheses.
Coordinates
Population
Importance-a brief statement of the dominant
facts on which selection is based.
Remarks-other appropriate comment.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter III - Transportation and Telecommunications
OUTLINE
D.
Operations
SECTION 31. RAILWAY
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
A.
General
3. Financial data
B.
C.
Characteristics of the railway net-
work
1. General characteristics
2. Line and terminal facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
Control and organization
E.
F.
G.
Equipment
1. General
2. Motor vehicles
3. Special equipment
Principal highways
Comments on principal sources
1. Control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
F.
G.
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Equipment
1. General characteristics
2. Motive power
3. Rolling stock
4. Special equipment
Principal railways
Comments on principal sources
B. Characteristics of the inland water-
way system
1. General characteristics
2. Waterway facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
C. Control and organization
1. Control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
SECTION 32. HIGHWAY
D.
Operations
A.
B.
General
Characteristics of the highway net-
work
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
C.
1. General characteristics
2. Highway facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
Control and organization
E.
Equipment
1. General characteristics
2. Craft census
3. Special equipment
1. Control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
F.
G.
Principal inland waterways
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III
(Treated in Subsection 62, C and Supplement V)
A. General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
B. Summary of ports
C. Summary of naval facilities
D. Comments on principal sources
A. General
B. Organization
1. Ownership
2. Administration
3. National policy
4. Foreign interests
5. Personnel and training
C. Composition
D. Shipping Program
1. Construction program
2. Purchase or sale of vessels
3. Chartering of vessels
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of
call
F. Operations and traffic
G. Comments on principal sources
A. General
1. Domestic status
2. International aspects
3. Other general topics
B. Government control and policy
1. Administration
2. Support
C. International relations
1. Affiliations
2. Air agreements
3. Foreign influence
D. Civil air enterprises
1. Scheduled air carriers
2. Miscellaneous air carriers
3. Government and private operators
E. Civil aviation training
1. Preparatory
2. Air crew and ground personnel
F. Services and supplies
1. Maintenance installations
2. Aircraft and spare parts
3. Petroleum products
G. Civil air facilities
1. Airfields
2. Operational aids
H. Military potential
1. Aircraft availability
2. Personnel readiness
3. Mobilization plans
I. Means of identification
J. Personalities
K. Comments on principal sources
A. General
1. Background and significance
2. Administration and control
3. Source of equipment
4. Major aspects of privacy systems
B. Military appreciation and vulnera-
bility
1. Military use of telecommunications
systems
2. Vulnerability
C. Domestic facilities
1. General
2. Telephone
3. Telegraph
4. Radio
D. International facilities
1. General
2. Submarine cables
3. Landlines
4. Radio
E. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER III
TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 30 Introduction
Section 31 Railway
Section 32 Highway
Section 33 Inland Waterway
Section 34 Petroleum Pipe Line
Section 35 Ports and Naval Facilities
Section 36 Merchant Marine
Section 37 Civil Air
Section 38 Telecommunications
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
Section 30. Introduction
This Section will be an over-all appreciation of
the Transportation and Telecommunication sys-
tems of the country or area under study.
It will treat those general aspects which are
necessary to the proper concept of the subject as
a whole and which cannot be treated adequately
elsewhere. It will be prepared upon completion of
the remaining sections of this Chapter so as to be
able to present in a single section an integrated
account of all phases of transportation and tele-
communications.
Material should be presented in graphic form
whenever practicable.
Section 31. Railway
A. General
An appreciation of railway transportation in the
country concerned, position in the economic struc-
ture, relationship to other means of transportation,
and its adequacy for peacetime requirements. A
short account of significant historical items, in-
cluding war damage and restoration. Where per-
tinent, comparisons should be made with U.S. rail-
ways, as a means of orientation for the reader.
Permanent way
Roadway structure - Bridges, tunnels, etc. (in
table form: location, description and structural
data for selected structures)
Ferries
Fuel and water
Signal and communication
Electrification
Yards and terminals (including shops and repair fa-
cilities)
Loading and clearance (attach diagrams)
B. Characteristics of the railway network
1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Discuss the salient features of the country's rail
network and its component systems, covering those
characteristics which apply on a nation-wide basis
such as:
Extent (total mileage according to gage and number
of tracks).
Pattern and geographic distribution.
Density and nature of traffic.
Connections and interchange with adjacent countries.
Status of development and general condition of the
railroads.
Discuss the general characteristics of the net-
work facilities including the following topics
(using photographs of representative type items) :
Construction and maintenance problems, poli-
cies and procedures.
Analyze the most critical points or features
of the railway network emphasizing exist-
ing or potential factors, which might adversely
affect traffic in time of emergency.
C. Control and organization
1. CONTROL
Ownership and extent of governmental control
and regulations.
2. ORGANIZATION
Organization and administrative structure.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III
3. PERSONNEL
Number of employees by departments and gen-
eral level of training and efficiency.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Discuss operational methods, regulations and
practices for freight and passenger traffic with
an appraisal of the general level of efficiency, using
U.S. standards and methods where possible as a
basis of comparison.
2. TRAFFIC
Discuss normal traffic conditions, giving sta-
tistics for the following items, using current year
and representative annual figures to indicate
trends :
Freight ton-miles
Total freight hauled (by commodities)
Freight car loadings
Turn-around time (average per freight car)
Average net tons per train
Passenger miles
3. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenues, expenses, and ratios
eluding governmental financial aspects).
E. Equipment
1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
A general statement as to adequacy of equip-
ment; present condition; interchangeability of
equipment with neighboring countries; self-suffi-
ciency in production of equipment; amounts and
types imported or exported. General characteris-
tics and standards of equipment including: gage;
type of brakes; type and height of couplings; etc.
2. MOTIVE POWER
Predominant type or types (steam, diesel, elec-
tric), number in service (by gages), and general
condition of locomotives with tabulation of the
following information for freight, passenger and
yard engines :
Total number by gage
Type (wheel arrangement)
Rated tractive effort
Axle load
Percent serviceable
3. ROLLING STOCK
Predominant type or types, and general condi-
tion of freight and passenger equipment, with
tabulation of the following information:
FREIGHT CARS:
Number
Type (box, gondola, flat, etc.)
Percent serviceable
Inside dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Rated capacity (in tons)
PASSENGER CARS:
Number
Type
Rated capacity (number of passengers)
4. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
Rail cars (number and types)
Armored equipment
Work equipment (including locomotive cranes)
Snow plows
F. Principal railways
A selection and analysis of the lines of prime
importance to the country's economic and military
requirements, giving significance of each line (at-
tach map and indicate lines by number). The
selection of lines should be made on the basis of
major trunk routes, important alternate routes,
key connecting lines, and those of strategic signifi-
cance. Special attention should be given to in-
ternational connections. Where feasible, text de-
scriptions of selected individual lines are to be ac-
companied by profiles and small-scale route maps
or schematic route diagrams.
Individual line description (for each selected
line) including:
(in-
Name of line with map identification number
Gage
Terminal points and principal connections
Route mileage, total and by number of running tracks
Characteristics of rail, ties, ballast
Minimum radius of curves
Ruling grade
Line capacity
Critical points
Bridges
Number
Average and total length
Significant structures
Tunnels
Number
Average and total length
Significant structures
Ferries
Number
Location
Capacity
Electrification
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 32. Highway
A. General
An appreciation of highway transportation in
the country concerned, its position in the economic
structure, relationship to other means of transpor-
tation, and its adequacy for peacetime require-
ments. A short account of significant historical
items, including war damage and restoration.
Where pertinent, comparisons should be made with
U.S. highway transport as a means of orientation
for the reader.
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance problems, poli-
cies, and procedures.
4. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
Analyze the most critical points or features of the
highway network emphasizing existing or potential
factors which might adversely affect traffic in time
of emergency.
B. Characteristics of the highway network
1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Describe the salient features of the highway
network covering those characteristics which
apply on a nation-wide basis such as:
Extent (road classification system with mileage sum-
maries)
Pattern and geographic distribution
Density and nature of traffic
Connections with adjacent countries
Status of development and general condition of the
highways
Numbering and marking system (or, if no system,
explanation of arbitrary system used in SECTION 32)
2. HIGHWAY FACILITIES
Discuss the general characteristics of highway
facilities under the following heads (include photo-
graphs of representative type items) :
a. ROAD - Surface, base, shoulders, drainage,
etc. Present in table form technical data on
selected sections of representative type roads.
b. STRUCTURES - Present in table form, loca-
tion, description, and structural data for selected
major structures. (Bridge data to be fully inte-
grated with such data in SECTON 31.)
Bridges
Tunnels
Ferries and fords
Bottlenecks
Vehicle repair and fueling facilities
Design and specification standards
Structure clearances
Load limitations
C. Control and organization
Ownership, governmental control and regula-
tions affecting the highway transportation system
and its principal carriers.
2. ORGANIZATION
Organization and administrative structure.
3. PERSONNEL
Highway department personnel-number, gen-
eral level of training and efficiency.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Operational regulations, methods, and practices
for freight and passenger traffic with an appraisal
of the general level of efficiency using U.S. stand-
ards and methods where possible as a basis of com-
parison.
Discuss normal traffic conditions, giving sta-
tistics under the following headings, using cur-
rent year and representative annual figures to in-
dicate trends :
Passenger
Freight (by commodities)
Total (use flow charts)
Average freight net tons per unit
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III
3. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenues, expenses and ratios (includ-
ing governmental financial aspects).
E. Equipment
1. GENERAL
A general statement as to adequacy of equip-
ment; present conditions; self-sufficiency in pro-
duction of equipment; amounts and types imported
or exported. General characteristics, fuels used,
and vehicle standards.
2. MOTOR VEHICLES
Show in tabular form:
Number
Types
Passenger cars
Trucks
Busses
Capacities
3. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
Show in tabular form:
Road repair and maintenance
Stone crushers
Rollers
Graders, etc.
Trailers
Animal drawn vehicles (if used extensively)
F. Principal highways
1) Select and analyze the highway routes
of prime importance to the country's economic
and military requirements (attach map and
indicate routes by numbers). The selection of
routes should be made on the basis of major trunk
roads, important alternate routes, key connecting
routes, and those of strategic significance. Spe-
cial attention should be given international con-
nections.
2) Individual route description
Discuss these selected routes, pointing out their
particular importance and general characteristics,
including :
Route number and/or name
Starting points, terminals and route mileage
Principal intersections and connections with adjacent
national networks
Pavement data-Type, width, crown, shoulders, load
limits, thickness and condition for base and surface
Traffic bottlenecks-Gradients over 7%, narrow
bridges, tunnels, defiles, sharp curves, etc.
Bridges
Number
Average and total length
Significant structures
Tunnels
Number
Average and total length
Significant structures
Ferries
Number
Location
Capacity
Fords
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved F r Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 33. Inland Waterway
A. General
An appreciation of inland waterway transporta-
tion in the country concerned, its position in the
economic structure, relationship to other means of
transportation, and its adequacy for peacetime re-
quirements. A short account of significant his-
torical items, including war damage and restora-
tion. Where pertinent, comparisons should be
made with U.S. waterways as a means of orienta-
tion for the reader.
Treatment of inland waterway ports is to be
coordinated in detail with SECTIONS 35 and 36 and
with SUPPLEMENT I to assure appropriate coverage
of all factors in water-borne transport.
B. Characteristics of the inland waterway
system
1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Describe the salient features of the coun-
try's inland waterway network and its component
parts, covering those characteristics which apply
on a nation-wide basis such as :
Extent (number and length of navigable waterways)
Areal distribution
Density and nature of traffic
Connections with adjacent countries
Status of development and general condition of the
inland waterway network
2. WATERWAY FACILITIES
Discuss the general characteristics of facilities
including the following topics (using photographs
of representative type items) :
Limits of navigability (In terms of craft dimensions.)
Ports (To be fully integrated with SECTION 35.)
Structures and aids (Structures, dams, locks, bridges,
navigational aids, etc.)
Hydrography (Beds, depths, widths, currents, tides,
etc.)
Topography (Watersheds, flood plains, banks, etc.)
Climate and weather conditions (Seasonal variations,
floods, drouth and freezing.)
Design and specification standards
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Discuss construction and maintenance problems,
policies, and procedures.
4. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
Analyze the most critical points or features
of the inland waterway network emphasizing
existing or potential factors which might adversely
affect traffic in time of emergency.
C. Control and organization
1. CONTROL
Ownership, governmental control and regula-
tions affecting the inland waterway system and its
principal carriers.
2. ORGANIZATION
Organization and administrative structure.
3. PERSONNEL
Inland Waterway Department personnel-num-
ber, general level of training and efficiency.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Operational regulations, methods, and practices
for freight and passenger traffic with an appraisal
of the general level of efficiency using U.S. stand-
ards and methods where possible as a basis of com-
parison.
2. TRAFFIC
Discuss normal traffic conditions, giving sta-
tistics under following headings using current
year and representative annual figures to indicate
trends :
Passenger
Freight (by commodities)
Total
3. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenues, expenses and ratios (includ-
ing governmental financial aspects.)
E. Equipment
1. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
A general statement as to adequacy of equip-
ment; present condition; self sufficiency in pro-
duction; amounts and types imported or exported.
General characteristics, fuel used, equipment
standards.
2. CRAFT CENSUS
Show in tabular form:
Number
Types
Passenger
Freight
3. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT (repair and equip-
ment)
Show in tabular form:
Number
Types
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III
F. Principal inland waterways
1) Select and analyze the inland water-
ways of prime importance to the country's eco-
nomic and military requirements (attach map).
The selection of waterway routes should be made
on the basis of major navigable waterways which
are of strategic significance. Special attention
should be given to international connections.
2) Individual waterways
Discuss these selected waterways, point-
ing out their particular importance and general
characteristics, including:
Route number and name
Starting points, terminals and route mileage
Limits of navigability (in terms of craft dimensions)
Ports
Name
Wharfage
Total length
Depths alongside
Port capacity (annual tonnage)
Storage
Handling facilities (cranes)
Structures and aids
Locks
Clearances (chamber dimensions)
Structural data
Operation
Bridges and other engineering structures
Location and clearance (horizontal and/or ver-
tical) for limiting structure or structures.
Dams, navigational aids, etc.
Design and specification standards
Hydrography (beds, depths, width currents, tides,
etc.)
Climate and weather conditions (seasonal variations,
floods, drouth and freezing)
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 34. Petroleum Pipe Line
(Treated in Subsection 62, C and Supplement V)
Section 35. Ports and Naval Facilities
A. General
1. PORTS (to be fully integrated with SECTION
33)
Comprehensive evaluative discussion covering:
Areal distribution and grouping of ports
Characteristics of ports in regard to: Comparative
size, layout, normal commercial capacity, use, meth-
ods of operation, adequacy, and relative significance
in and functional relation to the transportation
system and commercial economy of the area.
Governmental control and administration (where
relevant)
2. NAVAL FACILITIES
General analysis of naval facilities.
B. Summary of ports
1) Cross reference to NIS SUPPLEMENT I, Ports
and Naval Facilities.
2) List principal and secondary ports.
3) Summary table of significant characteristics
and facilities of principal and secondary ports
using standard table with following heads:
NAME (coordinates)
HARBOR:
Type
Entrance (least depth and width)
Largest vessel accommodated (length and draft)
Tides (springs and neaps)
Ice conditions (periods closed)
ANCHORAGE:
Free-swinging berths (number and type)
Fixed moorings (number and type)
WHARVES:
Total linear feet (expressed in categories of depths
alongside) :
30 and over
25 to 29
19 to 24
13 to 1$
6 to 12
Number of berths (class A, B, C, etc.; define by
footnote)
MECHANICAL HANDLING FACILITIES
Cranes (number and category)
Specialized handling equipment (number and cate-
gory)
Maximum single lift (tons)
COVERED STORAGE FACILITIES CAPACITY:
Transit sheds (sq ft)
Warehouses (sq ft)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Cold storage (cu ft)
Bulk storage (cu ft)
Petroleum tankage (bbl)
CLEARANCE (out of the immediate port area)
Railroad lines (number, gage, and connections)
Roads (number and connections)
ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY* (L/tons per 20-
hour day)
REPAIR FACILITIES:
Graving docks (number, capacity, by vessel size,
of the largest)
Floating dry docks (number, and capacity in tons
of the largest)
Marine railways (number, and capacity in tons of
the largest)
Repair plant (summary of capabilities)
NAVAL FACILITIES (indicate presence or absence of)
4) List minor ports (with coordinates)
* Assumptions and conditions used in determina-
tion of estimate to be carried as a footnote.
C.
Summary of naval facilities
1)
List naval bases (with coordinates)
2)
Summary table of activities and facilities of
each base.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 36. Merchant Marine
A. General
Give a brief summary of the Merchant Marine
of the country including: number of ships involved,
ownership, normal trade, place in the economy,
general policy, and adaptability for military use.
B. Organization
1. OWNERSHIP (government or private)
2. ADMINISTRATION
3. NATIONAL POLICY
To include subsidies, regulation, and interna-
tional relations of the Merchant Marine.
4. FOREIGN INTERESTS
5. PERSONNEL AND TRAINING
C. Composition
1) Number of ships by type (1000 gross tons
and up)
2) Name, speed, tonnage (GRT and DWT) size
(length, breadth, depth, and draft), type of power,
type of fuel used, daily fuel consumption, origin,
year built, passenger accommodations, crew
strength, and special equipment.
3) Any special modifications or readily adapta-
ble combat features, i.e., gun emplacements
4) Detail
To include an analysis of the fuel, speed, ton-
nage, and age groupings and any conclusions
drawn therefrom. A discussion of the availability
of fuel and of the number and tonnage of the ves-
sels from 500 to 1000 gross tons.
D. Shipping program
1. CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM
a. FUNDS APPROPRIATED
b. SCHEDULE BY TYPES AND NUMBER
C. SHIPYARD LOCATIONS
d. AVERAGE NUMBER OF SHIPYARD WORKERS
e. CAPACITY OF SHIPBUILDING INDUSTRY
f. KEELS LAID - To show details for approxi-
mately one year together with long time general
trends.
g. LAUNCHINGS (same explanation as f.)
h. DELIVERIES (same explanation as f.)
2. PURCHASE OR SALE OF VESSELS
List number and countries from and to which
vessels were sold and new and former names for
last year.
3. CHARTERING OF VESSELS
List number and countries from and to which
vessels were chartered for past year together with
any significant trends, either long time or recent.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of call
F. Operations and traffic
Discuss generally the place of the Merchant
Marine in the economy of the nation including
such items as invisible income, exchange earned,
percentage of population dependent, and other re-
lated matters.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility to
be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 37. Civil Air
A. General
Over-all discussion of civil aviation within
and related to the subject nation, summarizing de-
tailed information of all topics, and generally in
topical sequence, appearing in subsequent para-
graphs and including:
1. DOMESTIC STATUS
Give a resume of the development and present
characteristics of the national civil aviation
effort, with particular reference to its adequacy and
effectiveness in serving the transportation needs
of the nation and its capability for augmenting
the military air strength. State the total number
of aircraft and aviation personnel engaged in civil
aviation, showing the aircraft by types, and the
personnel by category of employment.
2. INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS
Outline briefly the position occupied by the
nation in world air transportation activities, with
emphasis on any important geographic relation
to world air routes, and/or any significant interna-
tional civil aviation affiliations.
3. OTHER GENERAL TOPICS
Other information which affects or applies to
Civil Air but which is not appropriate to any of
the main subsections.
B. Government control and policy
1. ADMINISTRATION
a. LAWS AND REGULATIONS - Summarize the
basic law or laws governing civil aviation and dis-
cuss briefly any significant provisions. Itemize
any general regulations which may have been
adopted (i.e., those pertaining to the registry of
aircraft, the issuance of airworthiness certificates,
the licensing of aviation personnel, the certifica-
tion of airline companies, or other general sub-
jects). If air corridors have been prescribed for use
by foreign and/or national air carriers, give a brief
discussion and supplement the text with a map on
which the corridors are depicted. Indicate any
further special controls applicable to foreign air-
craft operating inside the nation.
b. CONTROLLING AGENCY - Designate the gov-
ernment agency (ministry, department or bureau)
charged with civil aviation and outline the func-
tional organization of the agency. Discuss briefly
the effectiveness of the organization, citing salient
points of strength or weakness. Supplement the
text with an organization chart reflecting the chan-
nels of authority.
2. SUPPORT
a. OWNERSHIP - Discuss briefly the pattern of
ownership favored by the government for national
civil air enterprises, indicating the extent to which
the federal and municipal governments, and/or
private enterprises are permitted to participate.
The degree of foreign participation, if foreign in-
vestment is authorized, should be specified. The
extent to which national civil air enterprises are
permitted to invest in foreign aviation enterprises
should likewise be specified.
b. SUBSIDIES - Describe any financial aid ren-
dered civil aviation by the government, to include
both direct and indirect subsidies, indicating the
method, extent and purpose of such aid.
c. TRENDS - If applicable, state whether the
policies adapted by the government have fostered
the operational capabilities and effectiveness of
civil aviation, referring briefly to any future de-
velopments indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
1. AFFILIATIONS
Designate the international civil aviation Con-
ventions to which the nation is signatory, and the
international civil aviation organizations of which
the nation is a member. Where appropriate, de-
scribe briefly the position taken by the government
in regard to civil air policies of other nations (such
as the U.S.-U.K. air policy).
2. AIR AGREEMENTS
a. FORMAL AIR TRANSPORT AGREEMENTS - List
all formal air transport agreements and any in-
terim agreements (or tacit understandings) con-
tracted by the nation, and outline significant pro-
visions. Discuss any important departure from
the U.S.-sponsored standard form of agreement.
b. FOREIGN AIR CARRIER OPERATIONS - Indicate
the foreign scheduled air carriers conducting serv-
ices into the subject nation under the agreements,
supplementing the text where feasible with a map
depicting the services.
3. FOREIGN INFLUENCE
Discuss briefly any significant influence exerted
on the national civil aviation effort by foreign na-
tions, organizations or individuals. The discussion
should include details of any specific foreign aid
programs, such as the U.S. Economic Cooperation
Administration as it relates to civil aviation. Any
Communist influence should be specified.
D. Civil air enterprises
1. SCHEDULED AIR CARRIERS
a. HISTORY - Sketch briefly the history of
each national scheduled air carrier, indicating the
relative importance of the enterprises.
b. OWNERSHIP - List the interests having
financial investment in each carrier, showing per-
centage participation, and commenting briefly on
any foreign participants. Specify any investment
by the national air carriers in foreign aviation en-
terprises.
c. ORGANIZATION - Discuss briefly the organi-
zational set-up of the carriers, to include manage-
ment and operations, and supplement the text with
organization charts where appropriate.
d. OPERATIONAL STRENGTH - Tabulate for each
airline company :
Name and headquarters
Capitalization (in U.S. dollar equivalent)
Operating base or bases
Number and type aircraft (operational and non-
operational) by base of operations
Number and nationality of personnel (flight, ground,
other) by base of operations
e. SCHEDULED AIR SERVICES - Discuss briefly
the scope of the air services conducted by each car-
rier (domestic and international). Show the
services currently in operation on a route map, and
itemize the services on a table showing route
terminals, ports of call, and number of flights per
week. Note any significant charter-type services
performed by these carriers.
f. AIR CARRIER PERFORMANCE - Indicate the
general effectiveness of the carriers in providing
transportation and comment briefly on such fac-
tors as adequacy and proficiency of personnel, uti-
lization rate, accident rate, and adherence to
schedules. Summarize any expansion or retrench-
ment programs.
2. MISCELLANEOUS AIR CARRIERS
Comment briefly on the activities of scheduled
air carriers, charter, taxi, ambulance, crop dusting
or other special air services. If the activities are
of sufficient importance, present comparable data
for the special carrier as is presented for the sched-
uled carrier companies. Otherwise, show in tabu-
lar form:
Name and headquarters
Type of activity
Number and type aircraft (operational and non-
operational)
Number and nationality of personnel (by category
of employment)
3. GOVERNMENT AND PRIVATE OPERATORS
List the government agencies, individuals and/or
private business enterprises (other than scheduled
or miscellaneous air carriers) employing civil
transport aircraft, showing the number and type of
aircraft owned by each, the number and employ-
ment of aviation personnel, and the purpose for
which the aircraft are utilized.
E. Civil aviation training
1. PREPARATORY
Describe the attitude of the government
toward fostering civil aviation schools and
clubs and/or other private flying activities indicat-
ing whether sports flying or pre-military training
is the primary objective. Discuss the extent to
which these activities are supplying the military
air arm with trained or partially trained personnel.
a. AVIATION SCHOOLS - Give name and location
of all civil aviation schools, citing whether owned
and operated by the government or by private in-
terests. Include a brief resume of the curriculum,
the instructor staff, the student body, the aircraft
or glider strength, other related school facilities
and equipment, and general effectiveness of the
schools.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III JUNE 1951
b. AERO CLUBS - List all aero clubs, giving lo-
cation and ownership. Indicate membership, air-
craft or glider strength, related equipment and
general effectiveness of the clubs.
C. OTHER - List and cite use of training type
aircraft and related equipment other than in mili-
tary use owned by the government or private in-
terests (other than schools or clubs).
2. AIR CREW AND GROUND PERSONNEL
Describe all training activities carried out by the
national scheduled, miscellaneous or other air
operators. Give details of training programs un-
der which nationals are provided aviation training
in foreign states.
F. Services and supplies
1. MAINTENANCE INSTALLATIONS
Discuss briefly the maintenance installations
owned and operated by the government, the air
operators and/or other activities showing location,
type of maintenance, standards of performance
and adequacy and proficiency of maintenance per-
sonnel. Give an over-all estimate of maintenance
capabilities. If pertinent, indicate maintenance
arrangements with foreign nations and/or
agencies.
2. AIRCRAFT AND SPARE PARTS
Discuss briefly the origin of aircraft and spare
parts, indicating the general condition of aircraft
and the adequacy of spare parts stocks.
3. PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
State the supply position of civil air activity with
respect to aviation gasoline and lubricating oil
(with a cross-reference to Subsection 62, C, Petro-
leum, for details).
G. Civil air facilities
1. AIRFIELDS
Discuss briefly on a broad rather than a detailed
basis the general adequacy of the airfields assigned
for civil aviation use. Include a reference to Sub-
section 83, K and a general discussion of ancillary
facilities such as ground handling and servicing
equipment and terminal facilities. Cite joint use
of airfields by military and civil aircraft.
2. OPERATIONAL AIDS
a. AIDS TO NAVIGATION - Discuss the aids to
navigation, equipment used, the operating agency,
and reliability of service including a reference to
radio frequencies of major airports.
b. AIRWAYS - Discuss airways, flight traffic
controls along airways, and aviation communica-
tions facilities between ground stations. Broadly
cover traffic control in vicinity of airfields. Air-
ways, where existent, may be schematically shown
on a map or chart.
C. METEOROLOGICAL SERVICES - Briefly summa-
rize meteorological services to aircraft.
d. AVIATION SCHOOLS AND AERO CLUB FACILITIES
AND EQUIPMENT
H. Military potential
1. AIRCRAFT AVAILABILITY
Recapitulate from Subsections D and E above the
total civil aircraft strength of the nation, showing
totals by types. Estimate for each type the per-
centage normally operational, discussing mainte-
nance, personnel or other factors upon which the
estimate is based.
2. PERSONNEL READINESS
Recapitulate from Subsections D and E the total
number of pilots and other aviation personnel en-
gaged in civil air activities, showing totals by type
of employment. Indicate the air reserve or other
personnel with military aviation training, in each
category.
3. MOBILIZATION PLANS
Discuss in detail plans for integrating civil air
activities into the military air arm.
1. Means of identification
Describe the markings, emblems or insignia used
to identify national civil aircraft or to distinguish
major individual owners; and uniforms and insig-
nia worn in any phase of the civil aviation effort.
Black and white page-sized drawings or photo-
graphs with color notations may be utilized.
J. Personalities
Name the important personalities connected
with civil aviation including officials of the gov-
ernment, the airline companies and any other
important civil aviation activity, showing the posi-
tion held by each. Supply a brief biographical
sketch, to include aviation experience and political
affiliations, of the leading personalities.
K. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility to
be accorded the intelligence contained in the Sec-
tion.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 38. Telecommunications
Brief history of telecommunications, including
basic reason for development of telecommunica-
tions facilities (political, economic, military)
Relative importance of different media
Extent of integration of various media
Over-all telecommunication coverage, adequacy,
and service capabilities
General plans for expansion or change
Specific effect of special topographic or meteor-
ological conditions on telecommunications
2. ADMINISTRATION AND CONTROL
Government administration (including chart)
Personnel :
Names of top-level personnel
Educational facilities for technical personnel
Technical abilities of native personnel and use of for-
eign personnel in operation or maintenance of
facilities
Censorship policy, regulations, and procedure,
and location of censorship offices
3. SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT
Imports and exports of raw material and tele-
communications materiel
Domestic production of telecommunications
materiel
Support provided by domestic research and de-
velopment
B. Military appreciation and vulnerability
1. MILITARY USE OF TELECOMMUNICA-
TIONS SYSTEMS
National policy concerning use of telecommuni-
cations facilities by the military in peace time and
war time
Reserve capacity available for military use
Capacity available by confiscation
Adaptability of systems and facilities to military
use
2. VULNERABILITY
Physical and electrical features which contribute
to vulnerability or lack of vulnerability, including
critical aspects of power and emergency power
sources, and aspects especially susceptible to dam-
age by sabotage
Potential bottlenecks-points of heavy traffic
with minimum possibility of rerouting in event
existing service is disrupted.
C. Domestic facilities
1. GENERAL
Special government administrative controls con-
cerning domestic facilities, including assignment
of call letter blocks and prescribing amateur regu-
lations
Operational organizations and their relationship
to other domestic or foreign organizations:
Names of key personnel of operating organizations
Number, nationalities, and efficiencies of personnel
in operating organizations
2. TELEPHONE
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of tele-
phone service; interconnection and integration
with other facilities
Analysis of service rendered by systems shown on
accompanying wire map :
Capability to accommodate centers of population and
geographic areas
Patterns and significance of various networks
Traffic capacities of circuits and exchanges
Operating condition of equipment
Services offered by special and private networks
(utilities, railways, pipelines, airfields, etc.)
Services other than telephone provided by the sys-
tems
Use of power lines for transmission of telecommuni-
cations
Location, availability, and capabilities of repair
shops and personnel
Location and content of major warehouses or
depots
3. TELEGRAPH
Same type coverage as for telephone. If all tele-
phone and telegraph systems use joint facilities,
Subsections 2 and 3 may be combined
4. RADIO
a. COMMUNICATIONS - Adequacy, efficiency,
and dependability of service; interconnection and
integration with other facilities
Analysis of service rendered by stations and net-
works shown on accompanying radio map :
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER III
Capabilities to accommodate centers of population
and geographic areas
Present and potential traffic capacities
Operating condition of equipment
Significance of amateur potential
Services offered by special communications networks
Facsimile service
Location, availability, and capabilities of repair
shops and personnel
Location, availability, and content of major ware-
houses or depots
b. BROADCASTING (INCLUDE FM AND TELEVI-
SION) - Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of
broadcasting service; interconnection and integra-
tion with other facilities
Analysis of service rendered by stations and net-
works shown on accompanying radio map :
Present and potential country coverage and approxi-
mate service areas of stations and networks
Services offered by special broadcast networks
Services offered by public address systems
Operating condition of equipment
Critical aspects of relay and remote control arrange-
ments
Number, types, and distribution of receiver sets
Location, availability, and capabilities of repair
shops and personnel
Location, availability, and content of major ware-
houses and depots
C. OTHER
Major aspects of civil radar, navigational devices,
meteorological and ionospheric stations, and direc-
tion finders
Use of radio link
D. International facilities
1. GENERAL
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Analysis of service capabilities of facilities shown
on accompanying telecommunications map :
Present and potential traffic capacities and effect on
all telecommunications
Names of key personnel of operating organizations
Number, nationalities, and efficiencies of personnel in
operating organizations
2. SUBMARINE CABLES
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of sub-
marine cable service; integration and interconnec-
tion with other facilities
Analysis of service capabilities of cables shown
on accompanying country telecommunications
map :
Present and potential traffic capacities and effect on
all telecommunications
Operating condition of cables and terminal equipment
Number of international circuits
Cable huts and terminals
Location, availability, and capabilities of repair
shops and personnel
Location, availability, and content of major ware-
houses or depots
3. LANDLINES
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
of lines shown on accompanying country map; in-
tegration and interconnection with other telecom-
munication facilities
Analysis of service capabilities:
Present and potential traffic capacities
Operating condition of lines and equipment
Significance of international transit routes
Significance of points where lines cross the border
Location, availability, and capabilities of repair
shops and personnel
Location, availability, and content of major ware-
houses or depots
4. RADIO (Communications, Broadcasting,
Radiotelephone, Radiotelegraph and Facsimile)
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of serv-
ice; interconnection with other countries and in-
tegration with domestic facilities
Analysis of service capabilities:
Present and potential traffic capacities
Operating condition of equipment
International broadcast coverage
Number of international circuits
Major aspects of monitoring, jamming, clandes-
tine, and Voice of America relay stations
Location, availability, and capabilities of repair
shops and personnel
Location, availability, and content of major ware-
houses and depots
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility to
be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER IV
SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 40 Introduction
Section 41 Population
Section 42 Characteristics of the People
Section 43 Religion, Education, and
Public Information
Section 44 Manpower
Section 45 Health and Sanitation
Section 46 Public Welfare
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter IV - Sociological
OUTLINE
B.
Religion
A.
General character of the society
1. Distribution of principal faiths
2. Religious organization
B.
Historical setting
3. Social and political significance of
A.
General
C.
religion in the country
Education
1. Educational level of the population
2. Educational system, including adult
B.
Size and geographical distribution
education
C.
Population structure
3. General content of instruction
D.
Population change
D.
Public information
E.
F.
A.
B.
1. Historical growth
2. Vital statistics
3. Immigration and emigration
Population problems and policy
Comments on principal sources
General
Physical characteristics
E.
F.
A.
B.
Biographies of key figures in religion,
education, and public information,
(optional)
Comments on principal sources
General
Manpower analysis
C.
Cultural characteristics
1. Manpower in relation to total popu-
D.
1. Languages
2. Social structure
3. Social values and patterns of living
4. Artistic and intellectual expression
Attitudes and reactions of the people
C.
lation
2. Labor force
Standards and practices of employ-
ment
1. Utilization of potential labor supply
1. Nationalistic attitudes
2. Attitudes toward internal racial and
ethnic groups
3. Attitudes toward foreign nations,
toward foreigners in general, and
toward the United States and
D.
2. Wages and working conditions
3. Labor market, hiring practices and
mobility
Labor relations and organization
1. Labor relations and problems
2. Organization and control of labor
Americans.
4. Attitudes toward international or-
ganizations
5. Attitudes toward war and prepara-
tion for national defense
6. Wartime morale of the civilian popu-
lation
E. Minorities
F. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 43. RELIGION, EDUCATION, AND PUBLIC IN-
FORMATION
3. Labor legislation and government
policy
4. Biographies of key labor figures
(optional)
E. Comments on principal sources
A. General
B. Environmental factors affecting
health
1. Topographic and climatic factors
2. Nutritional factors
3. Plant and animal factors
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IV
C. Public utilities in relation to health
1. Water
2. Waste disposal
D. Diseases
E. Public health administration and
practice
F. Medical care potential
1. Medical personnel
2. Hospitals
3. Medical supplies
4. Industrial hygiene
G. Medical training and other institu-
tions
H. Medical research and development
I. Comments on principal sources
A. General
B. Standards of living
C. Social problems
D. Social security
E. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
Section 40. Introduction
A. General character of the society
This Subsection should provide a concise syn-
thesis of the general character of the society and
civilization. It should not be merely a summary of
materials elaborated in the remainder of the chap-
ter, but an over-all picture, answering questions
such as the following:
1) What are the main patterns and trends of
social life and social organization? Are they based
primarily on an agricultural or industrial tradition,
on a mixed or other type of economy?
2) Is the society stable or unstable, is it con-
fused, disunited, or imbued with a sense of common
destiny and mission?
3) What is the status of, and the relationships
among, the various classes, races, religious denomi-
nations, nationality or language groups?
4) What are the dominant social motives of the
average citizen-economic, cultural, religious, ra-
cial, etc.?
5) Do the people have an individualistic or col-
lectivist bent or tradition; are these opposite tend-
encies harmoniously combined or at war with each
other?
6) What is the pattern of public opinion forma-
tion and of individual thought? For example, are
the people predominantly logical, romantic, prag-
matic, or otherwise in their approach to individual
and national problems? Are they prone to com-
promise, to legalistic attitudes, to uncritical self-
justification? Is it easy or difficult to influence
them by propaganda?
B. Historical setting
Give a brief resume of such facts in this history of
the country as are essential to an understanding of
the origins of the people, their prevailing tradi-
tions, and their orientation toward neighboring
and related peoples. The form of presentation
may be either chronological or analytical but
should not be an exhaustive chronicle of events.
Omit so far as possible political background ma-
terial, which should be presented in CHAPTER V,
SECTION 50. Effort should be made through coor-
dination to avoid duplicating or omitting impor-
tant background material in these two sections.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 41. Population
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material in the remainder of the
section. It should include a brief statement of
the major aspects of population size, distribution
and change and their significant relationships
with economic and other problems of the country
concerned. It should not be merely a digest of
what follows.
B. Size and geographical distribution
Give brief comparative data on the size and
density of the population as of postwar census or
estimate. Present a table of area and population
in the chief administrative subdivisions (prov-
inces, departments, states, etc.) with number of
persons per square mile, preferably accompanied
by a map of population density for location pur-
poses. Indicate the general pattern of settle-
ment-orientation toward the sea, river commerce,
industrial area, agricultural plains, etc.
Give percent of population, rural and urban-is
it concentrated in major agglomerations or dis-
persed? Tabulate population in larger cities
(postwar census or estimate for a recent date) and
(if possible) in the chief metropolitan areas. Dis-
cuss the role of internal migration in the redistri-
bution of population. Indicate the chief origins,
destinations and causes of internal migratory
movements, particularly rural-urban migration.
attributable to World War II. (Cross-reference to
SECTION 80, E, Manpower.)
D. Population change
1. HISTORICAL GROWTH
Cite dates and figures for national censuses and
give brief comparisons with neighboring or rival
countries. Has the country been a population
vacuum (cf. France) or a source of outward popu-
lation pressure (Germany, Japan) ? What are the
factors affecting growth and their present trends?
2. VITAL STATISTICS
Tabulate births, deaths, and excess of births over
deaths for postwar years. Give vital rates per
1,000 population for postwar years and such earlier
dates (e.g., averages for 1921-1925, 1926-1930,
1931-1935, and 1936-1939) as are necessary to give
proper perspective. If possible, give infant mor-
tality rates (infant deaths in first year of life
per 1,000 births) for the same dates.
3. IMMIGRATION AND EMIGRATION
If available, give table showing immigrants by
chief country of origin and emigrants by chief
country of destination for postwar years and sum-
marized for prewar periods (cf. vital rates above).
Indicate the residue of migration as measured by
the number of foreign-born and the number of
aliens and naturalized citizens. Discuss war mi-
grations and population dislocations (if any).
C. Population structure
Tabulate population (in thousands) classified by
five-year age groups (0-4, 5-9, 10-14, . . . 65 and
over) for males, females, and total as of postwar
census or estimate for January 1, of the year of NIS
publication. Is there a significant deficit of males,
and, if so, at what ages? Is it customary for all
adults to marry or is there a large spinster popu-
lation arising from late marriage or other factors?
Is it a young or an old population? Indicate per-
cent of the total in working ages (e.g., 15-64) and
in dependent ages (e.g., 0-14 and 65 and over). Is
there a heavy burden of old age dependency, child
dependency, or both relative to the working popu-
lation? Note any significant abnormalities in the
age structure (cf. deficits of males in young work-
ing ages owing to war losses).
Give best available estimates of military casual-
ties, civilian casualties, and total population loss
E. Population problems and policy
Indicate prospective future population trends.
Discuss problems presented by growth, decline, or
distribution of the population, together with the
attitudes of the people and the government towards
these problems. Indicate migration policies and
discuss the present and prospective role of migra-
tion and settlement (e.g., in relieving population
pressure or in developing thinly populated areas).
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IV
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 42. Characteristics of the people
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material contained in the re-
mainder of the section. It should indicate briefly
the crucial physical and cultural characteristics
that have determined national strength or weak-
ness and national solidarity or disunity, as well as
susceptibility to foreign psychological influences.
It should not be merely a digest of what follows.
B. Physical characteristics
Describe distinctive physical and racial char-
acteristics such as typical stature, coloring, facial
structure, physical vigor, etc.
Identify the main racial groups, their num-
bers, their regional distribution, and their histori-
cal origins. In mixed populations data that can
aid in distinguishing individuals according to
racial or sub-racial groups are important.
C. Cultural characteristics
1. LANGUAGES
Designate the major languages commonly
spoken in the country, indicating their localized
distribution with maps, and show the percentage
of the population that habitually speak each lan-
guage.* Indicate the degree to which there is
local knowledge of English or other common for-
eign languages. Indicate briefly the extent to
which dialects are spoken and the extent to which
speakers of the different dialects can understand
each other. Maps showing the distribution of sig-
nificant dialects are useful.
2. SOCIAL STRUCTURE
a. CLASS STRATIFICATION - Describe and ana-
lyze the class system of the country, indicating the
basis upon which the important class lines are
drawn, whether racial, religious, economic, or
other. What degree of social mobility exists?
* The OWI Linguistic Censuses of Europe and Far
East gives these proportions for many countries be-
fore the war. Figures can be adjusted for any
transfer of language groups that occurred during
or since World War II.
What are the trends with respect to the size
and composition of the social classes? What are
the implications of class division as regards politi-
cal activity and national solidarity? Do some
classes combine for political power over others?
What combinations of this sort now exist? Are
class distinctions forgotten in a national emer-
gency?
b. SOCIAL ORGANIZATIONS AND MOVEMENTS -
Describe important social organizations and move-
ments other than those formed on the basis of class
or family; such as, secret societies, cooperatives,
lodges, business and professional associations,
youth movements, and other groups not covered
elsewhere. Indicate the professed and apparent
real aims, the number and character of member-
ship. What factors determine status, prestige, and
leadership? Estimate the financial resources, and
influence of such organizations as centers of group
action and of attitude formation.
c. FAMILY - Explain the characteristic forms
of kinship groupings, whether the single family,
joint family, clan, etc., with emphasis on differences
from the United States.
3. SOCIAL VALUES AND PATTERNS OF LIV-
ING
Describe customs and characteristic ways of life,
rural or urban, which are of significance as regards
the maintenance of national unity, actual or po-
tential military power, relations with foreigners,
or where applicable the introduction of Western
ideas and techniques. For example, do the social
values emphasize rigid conformity or permit con-
siderable freedom for deviant behavior? Where
these are significantly different from the United
States, diagnose basic attitudes toward life and
death, toward work and leisure, toward change,
toward authority and the role of the individual.
Is there emphasis on obedience to authority?
What are the most effective sanctions motivating
or inhibiting behavior, e.g., prestige, material re-
wards, ostracism, legal punishments, etc. In pub-
lic life are there tendencies toward nepotism, in-
difference to corruption, etc., which have implica-
tions for national unity? Are there significant
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SOCIOLOGICAL
rural-urban, ethnic and class differences in social
values which threaten national solidarity?
4. ARTISTIC AND INTELLECTUAL EXPRES-
SION
Briefly describe the major forms of national
artistic and intellectual expression. Are they
founded on a well-developed native tradition or
borrowed? Do artists and intellectuals enjoy pres-
tige in the society? To what extent are artistic
forms and "schools of thought" important as na-
tional and ideological symbols?
D. Attitudes and reactions of the people
Discuss under the headings given below. Em-
phasize the more basic and lasting attitudes rather
than current public opinion. Where appropriate
make cross-reference to relevant sections of CHAP-
TER V.
1. NATIONALISTIC ATTITUDES
Views of the people with respect to their own
country and its aggrandizement. Distinguish be-
tween attitudes toward the country itself and to-
ward the government in power. What are the es-
tablished national "symbols" (e.g., caricatures,
slogans, national anthem, flag), and what is their
significance? What are the aspirations of leaders
and of key groups for the future of their country?
2. ATTITUDES TOWARD INTERNAL RACIAL
AND ETHNIC GROUPS
Consider the attitudes of various segments of the
population toward each other. Examples : Anti-
Semitism, Czech-Sudeten German attitudes, white-
colored relationships, etc.
3. ATTITUDES TOWARD FOREIGN NATIONS,
TOWARD FOREIGNERS IN GENERAL, AND TO-
WARD THE UNITED STATES AND AMERICANS
Describe reactions to manifestations of Ameri-
can civilization with which they come in contact.
Stress special aspects evoking good will or antago-
nism.
4. ATTITUDES TOWARD INTERNATIONAL
ORGANIZATIONS
Especially the United Nations or regional group-
ings for defense or other purposes. As a means of
comparison, earlier attitudes toward the League
of Nations may be included.
5. ATTITUDES TOWARD WAR AND PREPA-
RATION FOR NATIONAL DEFENSE
What is the prevailing attitudes as regards mili-
tary training?
6. WARTIME MORALE OF THE CIVILIAN
POPULATION
Consider the attitudes and morale of the civilian
population during World War II or the last war
in which the country engaged.
E. Minorities
Indicate the numerical importance and location
of the significant groups (minorities, whether
created by an ethnic, religious, economic, or histori-
cal differentiation). If a map can contribute to
clarity of presentation, prepare one. Describe
each major group, emphasizing the significant dis-
tinctive characteristics and the extent of divergence
from what may be regarded as the national domi-
nant norm.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility 1.0
be accorded the intelligence contained in the Sec-
tion.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 43. Religion, Education, and Public Information
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material contained in the re-
mainder of the section. It should include a brief
statement of the role and relative importance of
religious, educational, and informational institu-
tions in shaping the life and Outlook of the people.
It should not be merely a digest of what follows.
B. Religion
1. DISTRIBUTION OF PRINCIPAL FAITHS
Give the percentage of the inhabitants adhering
to each. Include important sects. Indicate
whether specific religious faiths are linked with
specific ethnic groups. Indicate extent to which
formal church adherence actually reflects religious
faiths and practices.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IV
Give a brief account of the organizational struc-
ture of each major religious group, and discuss its
buildings, schools, churches, etc.
3. SOCIAL AND POLITICAL SIGNIFICANCE
OF RELIGION IN THE COUNTRY
Indicate the attitude of the government toward
religious groups. Is there an established church?
How do religious affinities and differences affect
national unity? Are there sympathies or antipa-
thies toward other countries for religious reasons?
Indicate features of religion which have an impor-
tant bearing on the daily life of the people or on
their relations with and attitudes toward foreign-
ers.
C. Education
1. EDUCATIONAL LEVEL OF THE POPULA-
TION
Discuss degree of literacy and general educa-
tional achievement.
2. EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM, INCLUDING
ADULT EDUCATION
Indicate briefly the general organization of the
educational system, from elementary schools
through the universities, and its position in the
governmental structure; the facilities for voca-
tional and industrial training and graduate edu-
cation; the role of research institutions. Indicate
notable inadequacies of the educational system.
Discuss the extent and effectiveness of efforts to
reduce illiteracy or broaden educational oppor-
tunity.
3. GENERAL CONTENT OF INSTRUCTION
The control of government over such content;
the character of the education received; its ideo-
logical orientation and its effect on attitudes, es-
pecially toward foreigners.
D. Public information
Give a concise survey of methods of dissemi-
nating news; e.g., via newspapers, magazines,
radio, motion picture, etc. Indicate adequacy of
coverage of these various media. (Cross-reference
to SECTION 58.)
List the principal domestic newspapers and
radio chains and indicate whether each is govern-
ment operated or privately operated. With refer-
ence to newspapers, for the sake of uniformity, par-
ticulars should be charted as shown below.
For domestic magazines, indicate the period of
publication, the circulation, and the class of
readers appealed to; if the number and variety of
magazines justifies the use of a tabular form as
with newspapers, use such form. As regards do-
mestic motion pictures, indicate the number and
distribution, the audience volume, the source of
pictures shown, and the controlling interests. Give
a succinct evaluation of effect upon the popula-
tion of public information and non-political propa-
ganda conveyed by the above-mentioned domestic
media.
List newspapers and radio chains which are
foreign sponsored. List the foreign elements in-
volved. For foreign-sponsored magazines, indi-
cate the period of publication, the circulation, and
the class of people appealed to. List the foreign
elements involved. If the number and variety of
newspapers and magazines justifies the use of a
tabular form such as the one below, use such a
form. As regards foreign-sponsored motion pic-
tures, indicate the number and distribution, the
audience volume, the source of pictures shown, and
the controlling interest. Include an account of
any news or other information activity that origi-
nates outside the country, e.g., cultural activities
of foreign embassies, radio broadcasts from Cairo
to Arab States, etc. Give a succinct evaluation
NAME, PLACE, AND TIME
OF PUBLICATION
LANGUAGE(S) IN
WHICH PRINTED
CIRCULA-
TION
KEY PERSONNEL
(PUBLISHER, EDITOR, EDITORIAL
WRITERS, ETC.)
COMMENTS
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SOCIOLOGICAL
of the effect upon the population of public informa-
tion and non-political propaganda conveyed by the
above-mentioned foreign-sponsored media. Politi-
cal propaganda should be discussed in SECTION 58,
the emphasis in this section being on media and
their effectiveness rather than on political content.
E. Biographies of key figures in religion, edu-
cation, and public information (optional)
This Subsection should present a succinct state-
ment of essential background data on key people
who have or are likely to have a vital role in these
fields.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 44. Manpower
The purpose of this Subsection is to provide an
appropriate approach to a full consideration of
the problem of manpower and its capabilities. It
should not be merely a digest of what follows in
the remainder of the Section. It should present
an evaluative summary in terms of such basic
characteristics as a predominantly agricultural
population with limited adaptation to industry, or
a tradition of significant craft workmanship, or
considerable maturity in mass production. Sea-
sonal migration of working manpower as well as
trends from rural to manufacturing or service oc-
cupation should be discussed. The discussion
should indicate the social framework for labor, in-
cluding any religious or other traditional aspects
affecting both the present and potential status and
productivity of the total work force. The nature
and extent of labor organization should be dis-
cussed as a segment of the total situation. Brief
consideration should be given the amount and ex-
tent of dependency within the population, and the
nature of those groups which outside of the labor
force, may constitute a potential source of man-
power or an obstacle to its fuller utilization.
B. Manpower analysis
In this Subsection a brief but comprehensive ap-
praisal of the labor potential is desired in relation
to the total population and its dependent elements.
(Cross-reference to SECTION 80 and appropriate sec-
tions Of CHAPTER VI.)
1. MANPOWER IN RELATION TO TOTAL
POPULATION
a. GENERAL MANPOWER POSITION - Taking
into account all the pertinent elements in the fol-
lowing Subsection 2, give a brief summary and eval-
uation of manpower potential in relation to the
total population. Show the growth of the labor
force, past and future, and make a comparison
with other countries, where relevant, for propor-
tions of various elements in the labor force (by
sex).
b. RESIDUAL POPULATION - Dependent groups:
infants and other dependent children, old people,
unfit to work, the helplessly crippled and bedrid-
den, the insane and chronically ill, and confined
criminals and prisoners. Estimate the extent and
amount of burden on the working population.
2. LABOR FORCE
It is expected that the following analysis will not
only estimate the size or proportion and occupa-
tional distribution (labor force particularly) but
also will evaluate the capabilities of the various
categories and groups within the labor force.
a. DISTRIBUTION BY INDUSTRY AND OCCUPA-
TION - Where possible show distribution in tabu-
lar form by 1) industry group, 2) occupation, and
3) occupational status (employers, self-employed,
employees). This will include all categories of em-
ployment as well as the armed services. The same
form can not be used for all countries because of
differences in the methods of reporting labor sta-
tistics (e.g., for many countries, breakdowns will
be available for either industry group or occupa-
tion, but not both). The data for each occupa-
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IV
tional group in the table should show number of
males, females, total, percent of total labor force.
Compare the industrial and occupational structure
of the labor force with neighboring or otherwise
relevant countries.
Show the age-sex structure of the labor force
with special reference to young workers, women
and older workers and possible expansion of these
groups when manpower demand requires.
Indicate the significant aspects of geographic
distribution of the workers, especially as to concen-
trations of types of workers and skills in specific
localities. State whether any trades or other activ-
ities are the special province of any particular
religious, ethnic, or other groups.
Analyze the characteristics of the labor supply
as to the proportion of skilled and unskilled work-
ers. Discuss the productivity of labor in agricul-
ture and other important branches of production,
with special reference to human and technological
factors affecting output, e.g., ability and willing-
ness of labor to learn new techniques, interchange-
ability of manual labor, government and union
restrictions, managerial ability, etc.
b. LABOR RESERVE
(1) Unemployed persons - These are part
of the labor force, are available, but are not actively
employed. They include migrants, refugees, dis-
placed persons, workers laid off through cut-backs,
those in process of changing jobs, unpaid helpers
(dependents, usually family), and victims of mis-
fortune (on relief). Discuss from standpoint of
availability and qualification to work (usability).
(2) Potential reserve - Discuss reserve la-
bor supply : housewives, students, qualified and fit
overage persons, children, under-employed, and
partially disabled and certain types of convicts
and prisoners.
C. Standards and practices of employment
1. UTILIZATION OF POTENTIAL LABOR
SUPPLY
Discuss method and degree of utilization, e.g., is
there a feudal system or not? Is labor used to its
full capacity? Indicate any institutional or other
handicaps affecting labor's efficiency. Unemploy-
ment is one factor which operates against full utili-
zation, and its causes should be briefly discussed.
What industries are most affected?
2. WAGES AND WORKING CONDITIONS
Describe methods of wage determination. Indi-
cate briefly trends of wage rates and real earning,
and the effects on these of government wage-price
policy. Where possible, show the range of wage
rates paid skilled, semi-skilled, and unskilled labor,
and of salaries paid white-collar and professional
workers. Specify wage rates for both men and
women; perhaps also beginners' pay-apprentices,
young workers. Indicate "low-wage" and "high-
wage" industries and trend in the wage gap be-
tween them. In those economies where compensa-
tion is paid wholly or partly in kind, indicate na-
ture of payment. What additions to real income
are derived from such items as social services and
family allowances, old age pensions, sickness in-
surance, etc.? Indicate briefly the character of
working conditions in general and in important
industries. (Indicate items such as standard of
living, etc., covered by cross-reference to Subsec-
tion 46, B).
3. LABOR MARKET, HIRING PRACTICES AND
MOBILITY
Discuss employed methods of recruiting labor
(e.g., the systems of apprenticeship, labor con-
tracts, training with pay, conscription, etc.).
D. Labor relations and organization
1. LABOR RELATIONS AND PROBLEMS
What is the relation between the native employer
and the employee he hires? What are the specific
sources of friction and the causes of problems
which require solution, and what has been the
experience in the handling and eventual resolution
of these problems? Does the government play an
important part in this field? If so, how? Indicate
the extent and character of collective bargaining,
the number and duration of strikes and lockouts,
and methods of dealing with industrial disputes.
Are there significant developments in the form of
industrial councils and boards, labor courts (cross-
reference to SECTION 52), and workshop organiza-
tions? To what extent are employers organized?
Discuss attitudes toward non-union labor and non-
conformity within the organization.
2. ORGANIZATION AND CONTROL OF LABOR
List the national federations of labor organiza-
tions, each with its major constituents and their
separate and total membership. Describe briefly
the characteristic structure, tactics, aims, and poli-
cies of organized labor. Do the unions have any
international affiliations? What is their attitude
toward :
The wage-price policy of the government?
Efforts to increase labor productivity?
Vocational training?
The relocation of industry?
The use of foreign labor?
National defense?
By cross-reference to SECTION 53, indicate briefly
the political affiliations of organized labor and the
political role that it plays. To what extent is there
participation of labor in the formulation of national
political and economic policy? Is labor well stabi-
lized, or is it an element making for unrest within
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SOCIOLOGICAL
the country? Discuss the attitude of the govern-
ment and public opinion toward organized labor.
3. LABOR LEGISLATION AND GOVERNMENT
POLICY
Give a brief, evaluative summary of the nature
and scope of legislation and policy affecting:
The right to organize, strike, and bargain collectively.
Wages, hours, and conditions of employment.
The employment of women and children.
Social insurance (cross-reference to Subsection 46, C).
Is there a government manpower policy-planning,
guidance or control (budgeting, etc.) of turnover,
transfer between industries, etc.? Are regulations
enforced? In this connection a chart showing the
structure of the ministry of labor and its enforce-
ment agencies is desirable.
4. BIOGRAPHIES OF KEY LABOR FIGURES
(optional)
This Subsection should deal with key people who
have or are likely to have a vital role in labor
organization. Biographies of labor leaders with
political standing are to be cross-referenced to
SECTION 59.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 45. Health and Sanitation
A. General
This Subsection is provided to permit, where ap-
propriate, a preliminary approach to the treatment
of material contained in the remainder of the sec-
tion. It should be brief and may be used in what-
ever manner seems most desirable.
B. Environmental factors affecting health
1. TOPOGRAPHIC AND CLIMATIC FACTORS
This should be a brief account of the relationship
of these factors to the health of the native people
and to the health of an invading force.
2. NUTRITIONAL FACTORS
Include general nutritional status and dietary
habits of the people, native food supply problems
and resources.
3. PLANT AND ANIMAL FACTORS
Include pertinent information concerning poi-
sonous and allergenic plants, animal vectors of dis-
ease, and dangerous wild animals.
C. Public utilities in relation to health
1. WATER
Discuss relation to health, adequacy of available
supplies, vulnerability to contamination. Refrig-
eration.
2. WASTE DISPOSAL
Discuss available facilities (if any) and native
methods of disposal of human excreta, garbage,
and dry wastes.
D. Diseases
1) Diseases which may affect an invading mili-
tary force. Discuss prevalence of diseases of spe-
cial, potential, and minor military importance.
2) Diseases prevalent among native peoples.
Discuss prevalence of those. diseases causing high
morbidity or mortality rates among native peoples.
Include supporting data.
E. Public health administration and practice
Discuss public health regulations (laws, ordi-
nances, quarantine regulations, etc.) ; civilian
health organizations, including per capita expendi-
ture on public health; and military medical organ-
ization.
F. Medical care potential
1. MEDICAL PERSONNEL
Give quantitative data and qualitative appraisal.
2. HOSPITALS
Give quantitative data and qualitative appraisal.
PAGE IV-9
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IV
3. MEDICAL SUPPLIES
Discuss local availability, quality, and suitability.
Include self-sufficiency in pharmaceuticals and
biologicals.
4. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE
Discuss organization, administration, types of
service, and extent of coverage.
G. Medical training and other institutions
Discuss educational facilities (medical, dental,
nursing, pharmacy, midwifery, veterinary, and
other schools), and laboratories for clinical diag-
nostic work and pharmaceutical manufacturing.
H. Medical research and development
Discuss available resources in medical science
manpower; available teaching and laboratory facil-
ities; significant current research projects; and
ability. to synthesize drugs which normally are
imported.
1. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 46. Public Welfare
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material contained in the remain-
der of the section. It should include a brief state-
ment of the level of public welfare and its relation-
ship to national strength or weakness and unity or
disunity. It should not be merely a digest of what
follows.
B. Standards of living
Indicate significant differences from U.S. in type
and adequacy of diet, clothing, and housing, includ-
ing such items as electrification, running water,
plumbing, heating, etc. Are there major class and
regional variations?
Discuss differences between actual levels of living
and accepted standards of adequacy. Is this gap
a cause of general unrest and discontent? (Cross-
reference to Subsection 44, C.)
C. Social problems
This Subsection should cover any major social
problem not discussed elsewhere. Have living con-
ditions and other sources of tension created note-
worthy social problems such as extensive slums or
excessive rates of crime, juvenile delinquency, beg-
ging, vagabondage, etc.?
D. Social security
This Subsection should deal with important pub-
lic and private efforts to protect and assist those in
need of help, including unemployment and other
social insurance, old age pensions, maternity aid,
aid to dependent children, aid to the aged and
physically handicapped, provisions for emergency
relief, etc. The discussion should include an ap-
praisal of the public conscience in regard to pov-
erty, disease and unemployment. Is the society
consciously pursuing higher standards, and if so,
what ideals of social welfare are dominant?
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with
collection targets. In this connection, the princi-
pal sources (not necessarily all sources) actually
used should be indicated.
PAGE IV-10
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER V
POLITICAL
Section 50 Introduction
Section 51 The Constitutional System
Section 52 Structure of the Government
Section 53 Political Dynamics
Section 54 Public Order and Safety
Section 55 National Policies
Section 56 Intelligence and Security
Section 57 Subversive
Section 58 Propaganda
Section 59 Biographies of Key Personalities
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter V - Political
OUTLINE
A.
General
A.
B.
C.
General
Domestic policies
Foreign policies
B.
Constitution
D.
National defense policies
C.
D.
1. Origin and development
2. Principal features
Constitutional position of the legisla-
tive, executive, and judicial
branches
Civil and religious rights and priv-
E.
A.
Comments on principal sources
General
E.
ileges
Comments on principal sources
B.
C.
D.
Domestic intelligence
Foreign intelligence
Comments on principal sources
A.
B.
C.
D.
General
Central government
Regional government
Local government
B.
Soviet and Communist subversive
activities
E.
F.
A.
Dependencies and associated states
Comments on principal sources
General
C.
D.
A.
Other subversive activities
Comments on principal sources
General
B.
Political parties
B.
Domestic propaganda
C.
D.
E.
Electoral procedures
Pressure groups
Comments on principal sources
C.
D.
E.
Propaganda directed abroad
Propaganda by foreign countries
Comments on principal sources
A.
B.
C.
General
Police system
Penal system
A.
B.
General
Biographies
D.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER V
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
Section 50. Introduction
This Section should show the strategic signifi-
cance of the political aspects of the country. It
should include a brief over-all evaluation of the
political strength and international influence of
the nation in terms of degree of national unity,
will to independence, strength of purpose, fighting
spirit, relative stability and efficiency of the politi-
cal system, locus of power, and basic objectives of
the government and the nation at home and
abroad. It should include a brief political history,
the specific purpose of which is to show the im-
pact of history upon present-day political attitudes
and institutions. (Political background material
in SECTION 50 should be so correlated to the dis-
cussions of historic setting in SECTIONS 40 and 60
that together they will give a rounded picture of
significant social, economic and political history.
The Section should serve as a political introduc-
tion both to the country and the chapter, drawing
upon chapter content but not presenting a sum-
mary.)
Section 51. The Constitutional System
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the treatment of the material con-
tained in the remainder of the Section. It should
be brief and should show the significant historical
background of the nation's constitutional system,
taking into account such factors as traditional
respect for and adherence to constitutional proc-
esses. Features which differentiate the present
constitution from those of the past and of other
countries may also be briefly considered. The Sub-
section should indicate the relationship between
the constitutional system and the degree of na-
tional political stability and efficiency.
B. Constitution
1. ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT
This Subsection should present the immediate
background of the formation of the constitution,
the political, economic and social groups domi-
nant in its adoption, the foreign influences present,
and the extent to which it represented public
opinion at the time of adoption.
2. PRINCIPAL FEATURES
This Subsection should give a summation of the
features of the constitutional system needed to
grasp its character, including a definition of the
type of government established, the relationship
between the provisions of the constitution and the
actual practices of the government, its economic
and social provisions, and unusual provisions. At-
tention should also be given to the degree of flex-
ibility and to constitutional and legal provisions
for amendment compared with actual practices so
as to indicate the popular control over constitu-
tional change, and to the provisions for, and ac-
tual practice in, handling disagreement in inter-
preting the meaning of the constitution.
C. Constitutional position of the legislative,
executive, and judicial branches
Briefly compare the constitutional and legal
position and powers with actual practice. (Re-
serve description of organization and procedure of
executive, legislative, and judicial agencies for
SECTION 52.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 POLITICAL
D. Civil and religious rights and privileges
This Subsection should include constitutional
and legal provisions and a statement of the actual
situation in respect to civil and religious rights
and privileges, considering especially freedom of
speech, press, radio, assembly, organization, and
religion, but also including other rights and privi-
leges peculiar to the country. The rights and
privileges of foreigners, particularly Americans,
should be examined and compared with those of
nationals. With respect to the suffrage, only law
and practice concerning the qualifications of elec-
tors, such as age, sex, and property should be
considered. (Percentage of the population ex-
cluded from voting and extent of actual participa-
tion in elections should be left to Subsection
53, C.)
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection
poses :
is to serve the following pur-
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 52. Structure of the Government
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the treatment of material contained
in the remainder of the Section and should be
brief. It should take into consideration condi-
tions, situations and practices which alter opera-
tion or organization of government as provided
for in the constitution. It might also indicate the
extent to which the framework for regional and
local government differs from that established for
the nation as a whole.
B. Central government
This Subsection is to describe briefly the legisla-
tive, executive, administrative and judicial organi-
zation and procedure, including a limited study of
the major agencies of each. Structural organiza-
tion, character of personnel, extent of popular con-
trol and procedures of operation should be in-
cluded. Any significant demands for change on
the part of influential groups should be pointed
out. The material should be presented in such
a way as to give the reader a clear conception of
the effectiveness of the agencies and the actual
locus of power in formation and administration of
public policy.
C. Regional government
This Subsection deals with major political subdi-
visions, e.g., states in the U.S.
The necessity for Subsection 52, C, and the ex-
tent of coverage will vary from country to coun-
try. It may be essential to include some parts of
B above in cases where an understanding of the
nature of the regional governments is necessary to
an understanding of the operation of the political
systems as a whole. Where important, there also
should be a discussion of the relation of the re-
gional to the central and local governments (e.g.,
Canada and Australia).
D. Local government
The considerations applicable in Subsections B
and C above are applicable here. Where impor-
tant, the discussion should include an examina-
tion of the relation of the local to the regional
(if any) and central governments.
E. Dependencies and associated states
This Subsection should include a classification
of dependencies (colonies, trust territories, protec-
torates), their governmental organization and rela-
tion to the mother country, the extent of internal
conflict and its international and domestic impli-
cations. The Subsection should also discuss the
structure and internal relationships of associations
of states (e.g., British Commonwealth of Nations,
French Union, etc.) which have grown out of pre-
vious colonial relationships. Where a country has
no dependencies, omission of this Subsection is ap-
propriate and such lack of dependencies would
then be mentioned in Subsection A.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER V
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 53. Political Dynamics
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material contained in the remain-
der of the Section. It should be brief and should
discuss the development and extent of political
awareness among the people. It should also show
the extent to which education and other factors
prepare them for political responsibility, with ap-
propriate cross reference to the Subsections on
Education, Public Information, and Cultural Char-
acteristics in CHAPTER IV. The locus of political
power in the system of political dynamics and the
extent to which political power is exercised within,
or outside of, the constitutional system should be
indicated. The Subsection might compare the
system of political dynamics and its leadership
with those of the United States or other appro-
priate countries.
B. Political parties
This Subsection should set forth the constitu-
tional and legal provisions defining a party, regu-
lating membership, governing collection and ex-
penditure of money, and the control of campaigns.
This should be compared with actual conditions
and significant proposals for change. The major
existing parties should be described-including
economic, social, and religious interests repre-
sented, internal organization, avowed program,
propaganda and propaganda methods, finances,
and rank and file control. A brief account of the
history of political parties should be included where
necessary to explain trends in political alignments
and objectives. There also should be a compari-
son of party strength. Quasi-political parties or
groups having political influence to an extent
greater than that normally attributed to pressure
groups should be discussed here.
C. Electoral procedures
This Subsection should describe in detail the
mechanics of important elections, evaluating them
as representative procedures. It should include
the important constitutional and legal provisions
governing the character of the ballot, guarantees
of secrecy, accuracy of counting and a discussion
of actual practices. It should also note any sig-
nificant demands for change. With respect to the
suffrage, groups excluded, percentage of popula-
tion excluded, and the extent of actual partcipa-
tion should be discussed in detail.
D. Pressure groups
This Subsection should discuss briefly the con-
stitutional and legal position with respect to lob-
bying, expenditure of money, participation in elec-
tions and relations to the parties. This should be
followed by a description of the groups or organi-
zations of major importance and should include
their names, size, internal organization, charac-
ter of membership, relation (if any) to foreign
governments, influence in national and local af-
fairs, and over-all ability to affect U.S. interests.
It should not be restricted to pressure groups of
Western type, but should include all major organi-
zations endeavoring to influence government pol-
icies and activities other than through elections
and through subversive activities.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the princi-
pal sources (not necessarily all sources) actually
used should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 POLITICAL
Section 54. Public Order and Safety
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material contained in the re-
mainder of the Section. It should include a brief
discussion of the conditions affecting the main-
tenance of public order and safety. The Subsec-
tion should indicate any significant aspects of the
police and penal system as a whole, such as size,
adequacy, extra-legal procedure, or importance
as a political or economic force, which distinguish
it from those of other areas.
B. Police system
A brief description should be given of the or-
ganization and operation of the police system in-
cluding a discussion of the relation to other parts
of the government, honesty and efficiency of per-
sonnel, attitude of the public toward it, and its
general ability to preserve public order and safety.
C. Penal system
A brief description should be given of the or-
ganization and operation of the penal system in-
eluding its basic position in the legal system, rela-
tion to other parts of the government, honesty and
efficiency of administration, and the public atti-
tude toward it. This Subsection should include a
discussion of the criminal codes and procedure,
the incidence of crime, and the prison and reform
system.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 55. National Policies
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material presented in the re-
mainder of the section. It should be used to dis-
cuss briefly the fundamental political, economic,
and social factors necessary to understand na-
tional policies as a whole-e.g., their origins and
the major factors conditioning their formulation
and implementation. In individual instances, it
may be necessary to emphasize the impact of his-
tory upon the development of national policies.
This Subsection might also set forth the impor-
tant interrelationships among domestic, foreign,
and defense policies, especially as to cause and
effect, disproportionate emphasis, and inconsisten-
cies and conflicts. The popularity of national poli-
cies as a whole and their significance to the politi-
cal system might be discussed. Detailed discus-
sion of domestic, foreign, and defense policies
should be left to the following subsections.
B. Domestic policies
This Subsection should provide a general state-
ment on domestic policy as a whole and analyses
of major issues and individual policies not dis-
cussed elsewhere in the NIS that are fundamental
to the stability of government, or that strongly
affect foreign and defense policies. Important
domestic issues or policies treated in detail else-
where in the NIS, especially in CHAPTERS IV and
VI and in other sections Of CHAPTER V, should
be discussed briefly here with appropriate cross
reference. Such discussions should emphasize
long-standing and probably continuing trends,
and should include a brief consideration of the
characteristic political reactions of the people (mis-
trust of power, informal political forums, etc.),
the implementation of policies, and the effects of
domestic policies upon the political system. In
individual instances, it might be advisable to show
the extent to which the domestic policies are pat-
terned after or integrated with those of another
government.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER V
C. Foreign policies
This Subsection should present as concisely as
possible the important relations of the country to
individual countries and major power blocs, the
extent of participation in international organiza-
tions and the extent of popular satisfaction with
foreign policies and their conduct. The organiza-
tion and powers of foreign policy-making compo-
nents and their relations to other agencies of the
government should supplement, as necessary, the
treatment given in SECTION 52. The subsection
should treat such factors as evidence of desire
for rectification of borders, measures for exchange
of population, measures for expulsion of ethnic
groups, extent of adoption of immigration quotas,
and efforts to extend control over foreign areas.
A discussion of major treaties and agreements of
a strategic nature, particularly those with the
United States, should be included. There should
be a brief discussion of the attitudes of the gov-
ernment and of the people toward foreign nations
(particularly the United States and Americans)
and international organizations (especially the
United Nations or regional groupings for defense
or other purposes), and toward foreign invest-
ments, with appropriate references to detailed dis-
cussions of attitudes in CHAPTER IV.
D. National defense policies
This Subsection should discuss the present de-
fense policies of major political importance, in-
cluding civil defense, and the influence of these
policies upon domestic and foreign policies. It
should describe the role of the defense establish-
ment and of the armed forces in the government as
far as it affects defense policies. Differences in
viewpoint between the military establishment and
the civilian policy-making bodies which are signif-
icant in the formulation of defense policies should
cial defense policies, including wartime morale-and
the influence upon defense policies of official and
popular reactions toward war, rearmament and
compulsory military training.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 56. Intelligence and Security
A. General
This Subsection should include an over-all appre-
ciation of the national intelligence system includ-
ing the following: 1) legal status; 2) purpose; 3)
relation to the executive, legislative, and judicial
branches; 4) funds; 5) methods of operation; 6)
key figures; 7) honesty and efficiency; 8) public
attitude toward the system; and 9) a graphic por-
trayal of the general organization and functions
of civilian and armed forces agencies and the inter-
relationship of these agencies.
B. Domestic intelligence
1) Agencies, with field of each
(This should include the pertinent information
for Subsection 56, A above.)
2) Interrelationship of agencies and coordina-
tion of their efforts
3) Security
C. Foreign intelligence (as in Subsection 56, B
above)
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 POLITICAL
Section 57. Subversive
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the material presented in the remain-
der of the Section. It should be used to discuss
briefly the fundamental factors necessary to under-
stand the material presented in the following sub-
sections, including such points as 1) effects of the
traditions, and attitudes of the people and of the
recent conditions of the country upon subversive
activity; 2) identification of subversive activity with
political parties, labor organizations, or govern-
ment agencies; and 3) legislation and govern-
mental practices pertaining to subversive activity.
If there are two or more categories of subversive
activity this Subsection should also in general terms
discuss the significance of subversive activity in the
political system, and establish perspective and
focus between the categories. Separate and de-
tailed discussion of Communist and non-Commu-
nist subversive activity should be left to the follow-
ing subsections.
B. Soviet and Communist subversive activ-
ities
This Subsection should include a discussion of
Soviet and Communist espionage activities within
the country, with emphasis on infiltration and
penetration activities in labor, political, and cul-
tural organizations.
Each active group or organization of importance
should be presented with information as to name,
size, character of membership, affiliated organiza-
tions, key figures, funds, aims, methods of opera-
tion, influence in national or local affairs, and
ability to affect U.S. interests. If this has not been
included in SECTION 53 a full scale study should be
made of the history, covert and legal apparatus,
and relationship to international organizations of
the Communist parties.
C. Other subversive activities (same coverage
as for Subsection 57, B above)
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 58. Propaganda
(Cross reference to appropriate sections, including Subsection 43, D)
Propaganda for political purposes may be con-
sidered as any form of information or ideas in-
tended to influence the political behavior of people
by affecting directly or indirectly their beliefs or
attitudes concerning facts or values. This Section
will indicate the extent and adequacy with which
the propaganda facilities, at home and abroad, are
utilized. It should contain a general discussion
of all types of political propaganda in terms of such
variables as source of control, target, adequacy of
coverage, degree of factuality, medium and form,
means of dissemination, immediate and long range
aims, and effectiveness. Emphasis should be
placed on evaluation of effectiveness. Media and
extent of coverage are to be discussed in detail in
CHAPTER IV.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER V
A. General
This Subsection should provide an appropriate
approach to the treatment of the material con-
tained in the remainder of the Section. It should
indicate briefly the degree of susceptibility of the
people being propagandized, considering such fac-
tors as rate of literacy and extent of cultural affin-
ity with neighboring or other states, with appro-
priate reference to CHAPTER IV. It should endeavor
to bring into perspective the categories of propa-
ganda discussed in the following subsections.
B. Domestic propaganda
This Subsection should analyze the aims, policies,
content, and effect of domestic political propa-
ganda. It should explain the policies of the gov-
ernment regarding domestic propaganda and the
aims. of such propaganda. It should also explain
the over-all organization and functioning of the
domestic propaganda system. Charts and dia-
grams should be used whenever practicable. Gov-
ernment controls which as actually practiced are
in conflict with constitutional and legal provisions
should be discussed.
C. Propaganda directed abroad
This Subsection should analyze the aims, policies,
content, and effect of political propaganda on for-
eign peoples. It should also explain the over-all
organization and functioning of the foreign di-
rected propaganda system.
D. Propaganda by foreign countries
This Subsection should analyze the aims, policies,
and content, and effect of political propaganda dis-
seminated in the country by foreign countries. It
should also explain briefly the organization and
functioning of the foreign propaganda system
aimed at the country.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1. To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2. To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 59. Biographies of Key Personalities
A. General
This Subsection should deal with key people who
have or are likely to have a vital role in the political
field. A preface should be inserted to provide per-
spective for the treatment accorded the political
personalities in the Section by pointing out the
principal factors in the basis for selection. When
feasible the preface might also point out briefly the
general characteristics of the group of selected per-
sonalities such as political affiliation, training, ex-
perience, education, religion, and social status. It
should also give, where applicable, cross references
to other sections of the NIS Area in which key fig-
ures are discussed. For example, to SECTION 53,
which sometimes includes additional information
on political leaders; to SECTION 56, where heads of
intelligence activities are discussed; to CHAPTER IV,
SECTION 44, which may give data on key labor per-
sonalities; to CHAPTER IV, SECTION 43, which nor-
mally contains information on key figures in edu-
cation, religion and public information, especially
the press; to CHAPTER VII, which discusses impor-
tant men in the scientific world; and to CHAPTER
VIII, which contains biographies of key military
figures. If the nation produces relatively few lead-
ers because of small populations, form of govern-
ment or some other reason, the biographical texts
should be included in SECTION 53, and not sub-
mitted as a separate section.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 POLITICAL
B. Biographies
Biographic sketches should be restricted to a
paragraph or two. Paragraph (textual) treatment
will allow more scope for succinct evaluation than
would be possible under the "Who's Who" type of
treatment. The sketch should be introduced with
a concise factual and/or evaluative statement of the
individual's political role. Following this, the
sketch should cover these items, normally in the
order listed : 1) evaluation of character, influence
and political potentialities, 2) personal data (date
and place of birth, education), 3) career (principal
positions held prior to present post, with dates),
4) characteristics of any significant publications,
5) languages, and 6) miscellaneous pertinent in-
formation which would help to reveal the character
and attitude of the subject. The sequence of treat-
ment may be varied in special cases where the
available data can be more appropriately handled
in another way.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER VI
ECONOMIC
Section 60 Introduction
Section 61 Agriculture and Food
Section 62 Fuels and Power
Section 63 Minerals and Metals
Section 64 Manufacturing and Construction
Section 65 Trade and Finance
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter VI - Economic
OUTLINE
A.
B.
C.
D.
A.
B.
C.
Economic structure
Economic dynamics
Economic planning
Strategic aspects of the economy
General
Agriculture
1. Agricultural areas
2. Production and supply
3. Production practices, equipment
and supplies
4. Ownership, institutional and gov-
ernmental factors
Fisheries
D.
7. Labor, finance, and government
policy
8. Natural gas
Electric power
1. Role of electric power in the national
economy
2. Growth of electric power production
and capacity
3. Generating plant
4. Sources of energy
5. Transmission system
6. The coordinated or interconnected
systems
7. Consumption of electric energy
8. Organization of the electric power
industry
9. Future developments
D.
1. Catch of fish and other aquatic
products
2. Major fishing areas
3. Fishing operations
4. Utilization of catch
5. Foreign trade in fishery products
6. Ownership and control
7. Government and industry policies
Food balance sheet
E.
A.
B.
C.
Comments on principal sources
General
Iron ore
Iron, steel, and mill products
E.
Forests and forest products
D.
Nonferrous ores, metals, and alloys
F.
A.
1. The forest resource
2. The primary forest products indus-
tries
3. Supply position
4. Forest policies and programs
Comments on principal sources
General
E.
F.
G.
A.
B.
C.
Nonmetallic minerals
Construction materials
Comments on principal sources
General
Industrial machinery and equipment
Motor vehicles (including tanks, self-
propelled guns, etc.)
B.
Solid fuels
D.
Aircraft production
C.
Petroleum
E.
Shipbuilding
1. General
2. Strategic supply position
3. Exploration and development
4. Refining and processing
5. Transportation
6. Equipment and materials
F.
G.
1. General summary
2. Major yards
3. Minor yards
Explosives, industrial and military
Guns, explosive devices, and ammuni-
tion
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
H. Other military equipment and sup-
plies (including war gases and
smoke preparations)
I. Telecommunications signal and light-
ing equipment
J. Chemical industries
1. Industrial chemicals
2. Chemical fertilizers
K. Agricultural processing industries
L. Fibers, fabrics and rubber
M. Construction industries
N. Other industries
0. Comments on principal sources
A. General
B. Business organization
1. Pattern of domestic trade
2. Domestic financial institutions and
their structure
3. Government finance and fiscal pol-
icy
1. Balance of payments position
2. Foreign assets and liabilities
3. Government policies, practices and
institutions relative to interna-
tional trade and finance
4. Foreign trade organizations
E. Government wartime financing
F. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
It is essential that analysts and editors be thor-
oughly familiar with all of the following explana-
tory material, even though they are concerned
with only a portion of the outline of the Chapter.
Analysts should keep in mind that the outline is
meant to serve as a guide and not as a hard and
fast statute of requirements for every study. It
should be used flexibly, adapted to suit the particu-
lar economic circumstances of each area, and the
analysis should elicit those economic features and
developments which are important to that area.
1) Purpose: The purpose Of CHAPTER VI is to
provide a concise but complete survey of the eco-
nomic structure, potential, and importance of the
area. The various sections of the Chapter will
provide, in the aggregate, an integrated view of
the economy, the pattern and direction of its de-
velopment and the capacity of the economy to ad-
just itself to change.
2) Treatment: SECTION 60, which is designed to
give an over-all evaluation of the economy, is to
be treated in the special manner described under
SECTION 60 below. The other sections deal with
basic materials, energy resources, industries, trade
and finance, and such related subjects as are
essential to an evaluation of the economy of the
area and of the manner in which it functions.
Each section should include all the factual data
needed to support the analysis. Such data should
be set forth, so far as possible, in statistical tables,
on charts and maps, and in tabulations. Text
should be used for the purpose of singling out the
more significant aspects of the statistical and
graphic material and of assembling data that do
not readily lend themselves to tabular and graphic
presentation, or where scantiness of data would
make tabular treatment more bulky.
The general or "A" portions of each section
should indicate the significant aspects of the sub-
ject under discussion and consider them as they
would affect the nation's strength as an enemy,
neutral, or ally. Special emphasis should be given
to such problems as self-sufficiency, capacity to
expand production and supplies, and direction and
rate of economic development.
3) Tabular presentation: It is intended in the
near future to provide specific table forms for cer-
tain items and countries in order to insure the
required detail in important areas and uniformity
of treatment among countries.
It is especially important that full footnotes be
carried in file copies of the final draft, indicating
source of data plus any other notes necessary for
full understanding of any qualifications of the
data. This is important for the implementation
of the maintenance program and for further re-
search. For the copies to be submitted to CIA only
the principal references and explanatory notes
should be carried.
4) Visual presentation: Maps, charts, graphs,
and photographs should be provided wherever they
will serve in lieu of text, or to summarize or clarify
textual and statistical matter. Appropriate ref-
erence regarding such visual aids should always
appear in the text.
5) Use pattern: Major uses of items should be
shown quantitatively. This information should
be given for all consumption including those items
that are imported. In the case of items that are
used for one purpose which is self evident, the
requirement for this information does not of course
apply.
6) Units of measure and value: See NIS Edito-
rial Instructions (E, 5, Statistical data) for de-
tailed rules.
7) Years to be reported: Annual statistical data
(by calendar, crop, or fiscal years) will be reported
in accordance with the practice in the area. For
the most recent data, however, if not annual, re-
porting should be in the largest available fraction
of a year. As a general rule, figures for several
prewar years or an average of prewar years will
suffice to reflect the prewar situation for com-
parative purposes. If data are taken from two
or more sources, care must be exercised to assure
comparability; if data are not comparable, appro-
priate footnotes explaining the noncomparability
will be included.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
Section 60. Introduction
The purpose of this Section is twofold. Firstly,
it is designed to give an integral view of the struc-
ture of the economy, the pattern and direction of
its development, and the capacity of the economy
to adjust itself to external or internal political or
economic changes. Secondly, it is to serve as a
frame of reference for proper evaluation of the
material, both factual and interpretive, presented
in the subsequent sections of the chapter.
Detailed accounts of the component parts of the
economy are to be presented in the respective
sections of this and other chapters and supple-
ments. Here, the task is to define the significant
aspects of each sector of the economy, to assess the
part it plays in the total economic structure of
the area, and to examine the factors which condi-
tion the scope and direction of the economic proc-
ess. It should present the over-all production or
other figures needed to indicate the position of
any vital industries (such as steel), both in the
structure of the economy of the area and in rela-
tion to world production.
A. Economic structure
This Subsection should be given over to a state-
ment in broad terms of the main structural fea-
tures of the economy. It should examine the posi-
tion and importance of the various sectors of eco-
nomic activity both in terms of their contribution
to national income and in relation to the coun-
try's resources and to their potential develop-
ment.
It should also discuss types and rate of domes-
tic capital accumulation, recent pattern of utili-
zation, and factors stimulating or limiting capital
formation such as private or government invest-
ment policies, domestic and foreign markets, for-
eign investments, etc. The discussion should,
moreover, analyze the nature of the economic de-
velopment in terms of changes in the composition
of the gross national product.
B. Economic dynamics
This Subsection should be devoted to a defini-
tion and analysis of the forces which at present
determine the orientation of the economy. The
discussion should examine the technological ad-
vance of economic processes as it affects the var-
ious sectors of the economy. It should ascertain
the competitive strength of the economy in terms
of productivity of labor, degree of mechanization,
etc., and appraise the ability of the economy to
make appropriate adjustments to change, includ-
ing changing patterns of world trade. It should
also examine the role of the state in controlling
and influencing economic organization, activity,
and development and should evaluate the sig-
nificance of entrepreneural activities of the state.
C. Economic planning
Describe briefly the orientation of current na-
tional policy and indicate the areas of economic
activity to which it applies, the scope and orienta-
tion of long-range economic planning, and exam-
ine critically the degree of disparity between plans
and economic capabilities of the area. Indicate
how the government proposed to finance the reali-
zation of its long-range economic plans, and ex-
amine the extent to which such plans are being
realized. Discuss the nature and amount of as-
sistance, if any, from abroad (e.g., ECA, Eximbank,
Morrison Knudson, etc.) in furthering plans.
D. Strategic aspects of the economy
In this Subsection discussion should cover the
problem of the strategic supply position and eco-
nomic war potential. Here must be examined the
extent to which the country is or can readily be-
come self-sufficient in its major requirements and
what conditions must be fulfilled in order to in-
crease the degree of self-sufficiency of the area.
The problems of self-sufficiency and economic ca-
pacity for war should be considered not only with
respect to available natural resources but also in
relation to existing man-power and its technical
capabilities, and in relation to available installa-
tions affecting production. With respect to man-
power, consideration should be given to conclusions
reached in CHAPTER IV on problems of mobility, ex-
isting skills, adaptability of labor to new productive
processes, feasibility of increasing the labor
force through mobilization of over-age and
under-age laborers and women. With respect
to the existing productive plant, attention
should be given to the degree of utilization of
existing facilities. The analysis should indi-
cate the causes of significant deficiencies or sur-
pluses. It should also indicate the degree to which
the economy is vulnerable to military attack, in
terms of dependence on a particular sector of the
economy or a particular group of installations. In
this connection it would be appropriate to con-
sider conclusions reached in CHAPTER III with re-
spect to the transportation system and the manner
in which it affects the economic war potential of
the area.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
Section 61. Agriculture and Food
A. General
Give a concise appraisal of the agricultural sec-
tor of the economy. Define the position of agri-
culture, including primary processing, in terms of
its contribution to national income, as a field of
capital investment and source of employment.
Discuss briefly recent developments or major trends
in land ownership and land use with particular
reference to production patterns and techniques.
Indicate the degree of the country's self-suffi-
ciency in food, feed, and industrial crops. Dis-
cuss briefly the country's position as a market for
and an international supplier of agricultural com-
modities, including processed products.
Summarize current governmental policies with
respect to ownership and utilization of land, agri-
cultural production, and prices, as well as in rela-
tion to international controls and agreements that
bear upon production, international prices, and
allocation of markets.
Indicate the relative importance of the fishing
industry in the national economy. Briefly describe
the organization of the industry and the manner
in which it is protected and regulated by the gov-
ernment.
Discuss in broad terms the position of the forest
industry in the national economy, with an indi-
cation of the extent and distribution of forest re-
sources. Summarize recent developments in the
exploitation of resources and government policies
relating to the conservation and national utiliza-
tion of forest resources and to primary processing
activity. Discuss the country's dependence upon
foreign markets and sources of supply.
B. Agriculture
(For topographical details see Section 24)
1. AGRICULTURAL AREAS
Indicate the suitability of the country in terms
of soil fertility, climate and rainfall for agricul-
tural production. State the approximate amount
and percentage of the land area that is arable and
compare with that actually under cultivation.
Discuss the uses of arable land and indicate the
extent to which it can be increased by clearing,
irrigating, draining and terracing. Give an over-
all statement in regard to land ownership and
average size of farms.
2. PRODUCTION AND SUPPLY
a. MAJOR CROPS
(1) Food crops
(2) Feed crops
(3) Industrial crops
Discuss for each of the important food, feed and
industrial crops, planting and harvesting dates,
area under cultivation, and geographical location,
total output, yields, imports and/or exports, do-
mestic consumption and their relative importance
in the agricultural economy. Indicate the man-
ner in which crops move within the country from
land or storage facilities to processing centers
and consumption areas, or to export ports. (Give
location of storage facilities and processing plants.)
Grain elevators and rice mills will be discussed
in detail here; cross references to Subsection 64,
K should be carried for all other agricultural proc-
essing industries.
As much of the data as possible should be pre-
sented in tabular form or on maps.
b. LIVESTOCK
(1) Numbers
(2) Products
(3) Animal diseases and parasites
Indicate the geographical location and distribu-
tion of grazing areas. Discuss the scale of indi-
vidual enterprises and production methods.
Examine movement of livestock to processing
plants and to consumption markets and export
ports. Consider production techniques in proc-
essing plants and cross reference to Subsection 64,
K. Discuss the country's surplus and deficit po-
sition and probable future trends. Use tables,
charts and maps wherever possible.
3. PRODUCTION PRACTICES, EQUIPMENT
AND SUPPLIES
a. FARM MACHINERY
b. CHEMICAL FERTILIZERS
C. SEED
d. INSECTICIDES AND FUNGICIDES
Discuss production practices and techniques
with reference to crop rotation, plant diseases and
parasites, the use of seed, farm machinery and
chemical fertilizers. As feasible, include quantita-
tive data on principal farm machinery, such as
tractors, combines, etc. Discuss the degree of self-
sufficiency and foreign trade in regard to the four
subjects. Indicate the relationship of yields to use
of improved seed, farm machinery and fertilizers.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
Discuss the extent to which additional use of im-
proved seed and fertilizers for the purpose of in-
creasing yields is feasible or practicable. Where
appropriate, cross-reference to data in Subsection
64, B (industrial machinery), Subsection 64, C
(motor vehicles) and Subsection 64, J (chemical
fertilizers).
4. OWNERSHIP, INSTITUTIONAL AND GOV-
ERNMENTAL FACTORS
a. LAND OWNERSHIP AND TENURE
b. FARM ORGANIZATIONS
c. GOVERNMENT POLICIES
Discuss such factors relating to agriculture as
land ownership, tenancy, associations, government
policies relating to protection and subsidies, price
and production controls and guarantees, credit and
other assistance to producers, and plans for the
future.
C. Fisheries
Whaling to be included throughout this Sub-
section, wherever it is of importance.
1. CATCH OF FISH AND OTHER AQUATIC
PRODUCTS
Discuss total annual production with tabulated
data. Discuss seasons of abundance, trends in pro-
duction and reasons for changes.
2. MAJOR FISHING AREAS
Discuss significant aspects, such as accessibility,
and include appropriate map material.
3. FISHING OPERATIONS
a. METHODS - Types of gear used; advances in
introduction of new techniques; brief reference to
availability of materials for manufacturing net-
ting, rope, and other equipment, and plant facili-
ties for manufacturing gear and other fishing
equipment.
b. FISHING VESSELS - Types and numbers of
motorized and nonmotorized fishing craft; condi-
tion of fishing fleet; programs for modernization of
fleet; productive capacity of fleet.
c. PERSONNEL - Number employed full and
part-time.
4. UTILIZATION OF CATCH
a. DISTRIBUTION OF CATCH - Domestic con-
sumption, amounts marketed fresh, frozen, canned,
salted, dried, smoked, etc.; methods of distribu-
tion with brief mention of availability of refrigera-
tion and ice-making facilities.
b. PROCESSING - Types of processed products;
location and number of processing installations;
productive capacity of installations; employment;
availability of processing material (cans, salt, etc.).
C. MANUFACTURE OF BY-PRODUCTS - Type of by-
products; location and number of plants; produc-
tive capacity of plants; employment. Cross refer-
ence to Subsection 64, K and avoid duplication.
5. FOREIGN TRADE IN FISHERY PRODUCTS
6. OWNERSHIP AND CONTROL
Brief description of concentration or spread of
ownership including ownership of vessels as well as
ownership or control of related industries and serv-
ices such as transport, refrigeration and canning.
7. GOVERNMENT AND INDUSTRY POLICIES
Current regulations for fisheries; international
agreements; programs for expansion; industry or-
ganization, if any, with its policies and program.
D. Food balance sheet
Discuss briefly the food consumption habits of
the population. Set up a food balance sheet for
the area. This Subsection should be a summariza-
tion of the data on production, trade in, and quanti-
ties available for consumption, of all significant
food products. It should present, in so far as pos-
sible, a concise picture of the type of products
consumed, the proportion supplied from domestic
sources, the dependence upon outside sources, and
the surplus supplies of food products normally
available for export.
E. Forests and forest products
1. THE FOREST RESOURCE
Describe the extent and nature of productive
forest resources: 1) area in relation to total forest
area and to total land area, 2) productive poten-
tial in relation to annual production and require-
ments.
Give geographic distribution of productive
forests, their condition and accessibility-by major
types. Indicate the volume of standing timber
and examine volume distribution in relation to
economic exploitation.
Describe the pattern of forest ownership 'and
discuss relation of class of ownership to forest con-
dition.
Indicate the annual growth and drain of ac-
cessible commercial forests.
2. THE PRIMARY FOREST PRODUCTS INDUS-
TRIES
Discuss development of the industry in rela-
tion to distribution and character of forest re-
sources.
Describe briefly the more important primary
products industries, including lumber, plywood,
and veneers, giving location production, productive
capacity, raw materials used, production tech-
niques, supply of labor, financial organization.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
3. SUPPLY POSITION
Discuss trends in domestic consumption of
major primary forest products.
Examine patterns of foreign trade in primary
forest products, with special emphasis upon prod-
ucts of strategic importance.
4. FOREST POLICIES AND PROGRAMS
Describe the more important laws and regu-
lations which affect forestry and the organization
and operations of the forest industry. Discuss
government policies relating to foreign trade in
forest products.
Examine current public and private forestry
programs.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 62. Fuels and Power
A. General
Discuss the position of the fuels and power in-
dustry in the national economy.
Discuss the supply and use patterns of various
forms of energy, including the conversion of coal
to coke and related products, manufactured gas,
and petroleum substitutes. Comment upon the
interchangeability of fuels in terms of the area's
requirements and economic activities. Indicate
the country's dependence upon foreign sources of
supply. Relate the country's domestic resources
and their development to future requirements.
Include in this Section : 1) a table showing in
calories equivalents consumption of primary fuels
(coal, oil, natural gas, hydroelectric power) ; 2) a
table showing in calories equivalents consumption
of all fuels by major consumer classes.
B. Solid fuels
The following outline insofar as applicable is to
be used for each of the fuels to be discussed. The
principal categories of fuels should be treated sepa-
rately: Coal and lignite; peat; fuelwood and char-
coal. Discussion of coal is to include the broad
aspects of conversion of coal to coke and related
products, manufactured gas, and petroleum substi-
tutes; this discussion is not to approach the depth
of detail and technical aspects contained in the
subsections on petroleum, iron and steel, explosives,
chemicals, and rubber. Appropriate cross refer-
ence should be made to these subsections,
Discuss production and consumption trends,
and domestic use pattern.
Analyze the competitive position of the indus-
try in the world market and conditions affecting
foreign trade and indicate the country's depend-
ence upon foreign sources of supply.
Describe in general terms the nature, extent
and location of deposits and indicate factors af-
fecting exploitation, such as accessibility, capital
requirements, and manpower.
Discuss government policies with respect to
development of reserves, exploitation of available
deposits, utilization of foreign capital, and foreign
competition.
Discuss production in the more important
individual mines. Indicate factors affecting op-
eration of the mines, such as degree of mechaniza-
tion, manpower, transportation, availability of fuel,
by-product operations, etc.
Present in tabular form: 1) location of mines,
grade and extent of deposits, type of operation, pro-
duction capacity, manpower, ownership, remarks
on extent of mechanization; 2) annual production
by regions and/or mines; 3) annual consumption
by consumer; 4) imports and exports by countries;
5) stocks.
Throughout this Subsection, cross reference to
sections of SUPPLEMENT V wherever appropriate.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER V1
1. GENERAL
a. SUMMARY - Over-all petroleum supply and
demand situation
Analysis of principal aspects of the industry
including development pattern and reserve po-
sition
b. STRATEGIC SIGNIFICANCE - Asset or liability
position petroleum-wise to the United States
. C. INTERNATIONAL SIGNIFICANCE - Importance
as_a world source of, or world market for, crude
and refined petroleum products
Influence of the world petroleum. situation,
in both strategic and economic terms, on the area's
petroleum activity and development
d. DOMESTIC SIGNIFICANCE - Degree of self-
sufficiency or import dependence for crude and
petroleum products, as well as technical personnel,
equipment, and supplies for the petroleum industry
Importance of the industry to the over-all do-
mestic economy
Importance of the industry as a source of gov-
ernment revenue and foreign exchange
Domestic requirements demand on foreign ex-
change assets
e. GEOGRAPHIC AND TRANSPORTATION ASPECTS -
Indicate the geographic dispersion of producing
areas, refineries, consuming centers, export and
import ports, as well as transportation pattern and
facilities, and discuss their general effect on pe-
troleum industry development.
f. GENERAL VULNERABILITY OF PETROLEUM IN-
DUSTRY INSTALLATIONS
Producing fields
Refineries and processing plants
Pipelines
Storage
Terminals and docks
g. EXPANSION OR CONTRACTION - Discuss any
probable expansion or contraction of exploration,
production, processing and consumption, including
the effect of labor-management relationships, with
respect to crude petroleum, natural gas, natural
gas liquids, and substitute liquid fuels.
2. STRATEGIC SUPPLY POSITION
Crude petroleum and liquid hydrocarbon sub-
stitutes-production for 1938, 1946, 1947, 1948, and
1949. Discuss trends.
Refined products-production for 1938, 1946.,
1947, 1948, and 1949. Discuss trends.
Imports of crude oil and refined products for
latest year available, showing principal products
and countries of origin. Discuss trends. Indicate
briefly manner and extent trade is affected by for-
eign exchange, tariffs, quotas, and other trade re-
strictions.
Exports of crude oil and refined products for
the latest year available, showing principal prod-
ucts and country of destination. Discuss trends.
Indicate briefly the manner and extent trade is af-
fected by foreign exchange, tariffs, quotas, and
other trade restrictions.
Consumption of refined products for the lat-
est year available, showing principal refined prod-
ucts and major consumer interests. Discuss
trends. Also discuss adequacy of supply and indi-
cate, if deficiencies exist, the probable effect on in-
dustrial expansion and the conduct of military op-
erations.
3. EXPLORATION AND DEVELOPMENT
Discuss the significant historical and technologi-
cal aspects, as well as present pattern, of explora-
tion and development, giving a succinct appreci-
ation of the country's petroliferous character.
State the amount of reserves, indicating their
relative importance to world reserves. Indicate
the proved reserves by main fields. With respect
to concessions, summarize the development to date,
indicating areas, concessionaires, and terms of im-
portant concessions.
4. REFINING AND PROCESSING
Brief historical background, including war dam-
age and restoration. General pattern and pres-
ent relative significance of crude oil refining, nat-
ural gas liquids processing, and synthetic liquid
fuels manufacture. Present in tabular form names,
location, type, capacity, ownership, and operators
of existing and proposed refineries. Relative ade-
quacy to meet peacetime domestic requirements.
Succinct discussion of future plans and factors af-
fecting them. Potential importance in event of a
wartime emergency.
5. TRANSPORTATION
General appreciation of over-all petroleum trans-
port, storage, and terminal facilities, including ex-
tent, purpose, capacities, relationship to adjacent.
countries, and other geographic considerations, as
well as to other means of transport and relative
adequacy for peacetime requirements. Describe
the principal pipelines, indicating the location,
length, size, capacity, and date of construction. A
short account of significant historical and geo-
graphical aspects, including war damage and res-
toration, and a brief discussion of probable develop-
ment. Where pertinent, comparisons to United
States facilities should be made for general orien-
tation and appreciation.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 :
CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
ECONOMIC
6. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Summarize the domestic capabilities for the
manufacture of equipment and supplies required
by the petroleum industry for exploration, produc-
tion, refining and processing, and distribution, in-
dicating the degree of self-sufficiency. Where de-
ficiencies exist, indicate source of import.
7. LABOR, FINANCE, AND GOVERNMENT
POLICY
Indicate the availability, relative importance,
efficiency, political complexion, and political influ-
ence of the petroleum labor force.
Examine the extent of capital investment in,
or control over, the various components of the in-
dustry, by nationality and ownership, indicating
over-all relationship of foreign to local capital in-
vestment. Describe the organizational pattern
and external control exercised over foreign oil com-
panies. Evaluate briefly the nature and extent of
the domestic capital market for petroleum industry
investment. Discuss factors affecting foreign
capital investment in the industry, such as the re-
lationship of risk to return and the limitations
placed on the transfer abroad of capital and earn-
ings.
Discuss, analyze, and evaluate government
policy and basic or pertinent laws relating to the
petroleum industry, indicating particularly their
relative influence on the operations of foreign oil
companies. Indicate and evaluate the degree of
control over oil industry operations exercised _ by
government organizations.
8. NATURAL GAS
Discuss the relative importance of the natural
gas industry to the economy of the country, indi-
cating reserves, production, and describing briefly
the distribution system. Discuss the extent of use
for industry, space heating and light, repressuring
of oil fields, for the production of natural gas liq-
uids, as well as the amount flared.
D. Electric power
1. ROLE OF ELECTRIC POWER IN THE NA-
TIONAL ECONOMY
Discuss extent to which population and in-
dustry are served with electricity, for example, per-
centage to total of households having electricity,
of population living in electrically lighted homes,
of farms electrified, and percentage of electric
power employed in industry related to total motive
power employed in industry.
Discuss share of electric power industry in
the national income, number of employees in the
electric power industry, and share of total capital
assets employed in the electric power industry.
2. GROWTH OF ELECTRIC POWER PRODUC-
TION AND CAPACITY
Present and discuss summary data showing
growth of electric power production and capacity
related to population; distribution of electric power
capacity and production, by type of generation, for
the country as a whole; and distribution of electric
power capacity and production by major regions or
systems.
3. GENERATING PLANT
Present and discuss summary data showing
extent to which plant capacity and production may
be concentrated in a small number of large plants
or distributed among a large number of small
plants.
Describe major or special hydroelectric plants
or developments. Where water power constitutes
an important source of energy for the production
of electric power, either potential or developed, dis-
cuss extent to which these resources have been de-
veloped. If possible, develop summary informa-
tion of the following type:
Location of undeveloped water power :
ESTIMATED
NUMBER AVERAGE ESTIMATED
OF ANNUAL INSTALLED
REGION SITES OUTPUT CAPACITY
Discuss
centers.
accessibility of these resources to load
Give specific references to important studies
which have been made pertaining to power develop-
ment of the country's water resources.
Describe major thermal plants. Discuss ex-
tent to which location may be influenced by supply
of fuel, availability of cooling water, consumption
centers, defense considerations.
Tabulate significant generating station sta-
tistics.
4. SOURCES OF ENERGY
Discuss relative importance of various sources
of energy in the production of electric power and
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
extent to which average annual fuel rates per kwh
production reflect increases in efficiency of steam
generation or lack of modernization.
Discuss source of fuel, whether imported or
indigenous, and, if imported, availability of foreign
exchange for purchase of fuel.
5. TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Describe important transmission networks.
Discuss extent to which system serves to transfer
power from fuel and hydro sources to load centers;
to interconnect isolated communities and large
population or industrial centers; to provide emer-
gency supply for normal facilities out of service;
to reduce reserve requirements; or to eliminate in-
efficient plants.
Discuss principal connections with other coun-
tries and present summary data showing transfer
of power across international boundaries related
to total production or consumption.
6. THE COORDINATED OR INTERCON-
NECTED SYSTEMS
Describe present organization, arrangements, or
agreements for integrating interconnected facili-
ties.
7. CONSUMPTION OF ELECTRIC ENERGY
Discuss the utilization of electric energy
within the area and tabulate electric energy con-
sumption by class of use, by number of customers,
if available, and by percent of total consumption
and of annual kwh consumption by each class.
Analyze the relationships disclosed in these compu-
tations.
Discuss present limitations in the use of elec-
tricity.
8. ORGANIZATION OF THE ELECTRIC POWER
INDUSTRY
Present and discuss summary data showing
distribution of electric power production and ca-
pacity by class of ownership such as industrials,
private utility corporations, state-owned monopo-
lies, distribution cooperatives, etc.
Discuss extent to which industry is govern-
ment-owned, regulated, or operated.
Discuss extent to which production, trans-
mission, and distribution facilities are unified, or
extent to which production, transmission, and dis-
tribution facilities are separately owned or oper-
ated.
Describe any central organizations that may
exist for planning and developing a national power
policy or program.
Discuss extent to which foreign capital may
be employed in this industry and its effect upon
the industry's operating policies and practices.
9. FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS
Describe important programs for the expan-
sion of electric power and show the effect of these
programs upon present capacity and production.
Describe any factors which may encourage or
limit the future of this industry such as unsatis-
fied demand, shortage of capital, lack of resources,
legislation, etc.
Attach a system. map showing geographic loca-
tion of generating stations. In addition, show
principal transmission lines and substations by
which these plants are interconnected and by which
energy is transmitted to areas of consumption.
Show construction planned or in progress, as well
as present capacity.
Statistical and operating data are to be shown in
the form prescribed in the example tables for FIG-
URES 62-1 through 62-9 on the following pages.
Where information is not available according to the
required standards, submit the best information
available with explanation of deviations from these
standards. Data in tables, FIGURES 62-7 through
62-9, are to be furnished for the most recent period.
Data in tables, FIGURES 62-1 through 62-6 are to be
furnished for several years so that long-time trend
analyses may be developed.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
(EXAMPLES)
FIGURE 62-1. INSTALLED CAPACITY OF GENERATING
PLANTS AND PRODUCTION
(By type of prime mover)
Hydro:
No. of plants
Capacity (kw)
Production (kwh)
Steam:
No. of plants
Capacity (kw)
Production (kwh)
Internal combustion:
No. of plants
Capacity (kw)
Production (kwh)
Privately
owned
Publicly
owned
CLASS OF USE (SUCII
AS RESIDENTIAL,
COMMERCIAL, INDUS-
TRIAL, ETC.)
NO. OF CUS-
TOMERS (IF
READILY
AVAILABLE)
%p OF
TOTAL
CONSUMP-
TION
ANNUAL
CONSUMP-
TION
FIGURE 62-6. ELECTRIC ENERGY USED IN
INDUSTRIAL OPERATION
(In kilowatts)
PURCIIASED I CONSUMED
FIGURE 62-2. ELECTRIC POWER. PRODUCTION AND
CAPACITY
(By major regions and systems)
REGION OR SYSTEM CAPACITY I PRODUCTION
kw kwh
FIGU,-RK 62-7. GENERATING STATION STATISTICS-FOR
PLANTS OF ... KILOWATTS OR OVER (OPER-
ATING, UNDER CONSTRUCTION, 011
PLANNED AS OF .... )
(List plants under subheadings for industrial or public utility;
privately or publicly owned; steam, hydro, or internal com-
bustion.)
ITEM
NO.
I Name of operator*
2 Location of plant
3 Map reference number
FIGURE 62-3. ELECTRIC UTILITY CONSUMPTION OF 4 Type
MAJOR FUELS 5 Condition of plant
6 Capacity-installed and net plant capability in kw
TYPE OF FUEL PRODUCTION I CONSUMPTION (maximum capacity, excluding station use, available
kwh tons at time of peak)
7 Annual kwh production
8 Generator voltage, phase and frequency
9 Consumers
* If the operator is not the same as the owner, or if control is
held in another corporation, submit explanation.
FIGURE 62-4. ENERGY TRANSFERRED ACROSS INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARIES
(List receipts and deliveries separately)
TRANSFERRED FROM TRANSFERRFD TO
-._._..._._......_.._...--------- ...- POINT OF
Company or Country Company or Country TRANSFER
agency agency
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
ANNUAL KWh
TRANSFERRED
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
FIGURE 62-8. SIGNIFICANT TRANSMISSION LINE
STATISTICS
Name of operator or owner
Line designation
From
To
Voltage
Operating
Designed
Pole length of line
Number of circuits
Type of construction
Nature of change
Date of change
Start
Completion
CHANGES UNDER
WAY OR
PLANNED
Name of operator and owner
Name and location of substa-
tion
Character of substation
Voltage
Capacity
No. of transformers
Nature of change
Date of change
Start
Completion
CHANGES UNDER
WAY OR
PLANNED
Section 63. Minerals and Metals
A. General
Discuss briefly the position of the area's mineral
and metal industries in the national and world
economies. Analyze the relative importance of
the industry in terms of its contribution to the na-
tional income, as an employer of labor, and as an
investment area.
Discuss the size of the industry in terms of the
country's requirement and in relation to foreign
demand for the industry's output.
Indicate the salient characteristics of the indus-
try such as: extent of reserves, locational and
transportation factors; dependence upon foreign
sources for supplies and equipment; productive
potential; degree of integration of the industry;
technological aspects of production; ownership;
international agreements; government policies.
B. Iron ore
Discuss production and consumption trends, and
domestic use pattern.
Analyze the competitive position of the industry
in the world market and conditions affecting for-
eign trade, and indicate the country's dependence
upon foreign sources of supply.
Describe in general terms the nature, extent,
and location of deposits, and indicate factors af-
fecting exploitation, such as accessibility, capital
requirements, and manpower.
Discuss government policies with respect to
development of reserves, exploitation of available
deposits, utilization of foreign capital, and foreign
competition.
Discuss production in the more important in-
dividual mines. Indicate factors affecting opera-
tion of the mines, such as degree of mechanization,
manpower, transportation, availability of fuel, by-
products, etc.
Tables, maps, and graphics: Give in tables
and, where practicable, in graphic form, the fol-
lowing: 1) location of mines, grade and extent of
deposits, type of operation, production capacity,
manpower, ownership, remarks on extent of mech-
anization; 2) annual production by regions, fields
and/or mines; 3) imports and exports by coun-
tries; 4) stocks.
C. Iron, steel, and mill products
This Subsection should include primary process-
ing, which is defined as including production of the
following : pig-iron, ingots, castings, finished hot-
rolled products (plates, sheets and strip, strip and
sheet for cold reduced black plate and tin plate,
hoops and cotton ties and baling bands, bars, struc-
tural shapes, rails, splice bars and tie plate bars,
skelp, blanks or pierced billets, wire rods, rolled
forging billets, blooms and billets for export, car
wheels) ; further finished steel mill products (cold
finished and tool steel bars, cold rolled sheets and
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
i,
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 :
CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
ECONOMIC
strip, tin and terne plate, galvanized terne sheets,
finished black slate, tie plates, wire, woven wire
fence, bale ties, fence posts, nails and staples, pipe
and tubes).
Discuss briefly productive capacity of the in-
dustry and indicate current output, including data
on limestone and metallurgical coke (with cross-
reference to Subsection 62, B). Examine current
production pattern. Discuss the ability of the in-
dustry to meet domestic requirements for particu-
lar steel products and the extent of imports. Ex-
amine competitive position of industry, govern-
ment policies affecting operation of industry, ef-
ficiency of operations, etc.
Discuss factors affecting production of the
industry as a whole and of major individual plants
such as degree of mechanization and efficiency of
operations with respect to supply of raw materials,
(including ferro-alloys) fuel, transportation, man-
power, markets, etc.
List in tabular form individual plants giving
name, location, productive capacity, number and
type of furnaces, number and type of finishing in-
stallations, output by products, operating and
beneficial ownership.
List in tabular form annual production, con-
sumption including use pattern, imports and ex-
ports by countries and principal types of products.
List in tabular form annual consumption and
source of major raw materials: iron ore, ferro-
alloys, scrap, fluxes, and fuels.
Aluminum and
bauxite
Copper
Lead
Magnesium
Nickel
Tin
Zinc
Gold
Platinum
and allied
metals (iridium,
osmium, palladi-
um, rhodium, ru-
thenium)
Silver
-Radium
Thorium
Uranium
Alunite
Antimony
Arsenic
Beryllium
Bismuth
Boron
Cadmium
Chromium
Cobalt
Columbium
Lithium
Manganese
Mercury
Molybdenum
Selenium
Sodium
Tantalum
Tellurium
Thorium
Titanium
Tungsten
Vanadium
Zirconium
ALLOYS
Brass
Bronze
Bearing metal
Monel metal
Nichrome
Nickel silver
Stellite
Solder
Textual analysis and discussion should be by
Subsections similar to those indicated above for
Subsection B, Iron Ore. Only those materials of
economic importance should be treated. A check-
list is provided below. Except for fertilizer min-
erals, which are covered in Subsection 64, J, this
Subsection should include primary processing as
well as mining.
In treating the processing facilities, data should
also be given on annual consumption, including
use pattern.
The following list will serve as a guide for se-
lecting the products of importance in the area.
Others should be treated if their importance war-
rants.
Asbestos Diamonds Nitrates
Barite Feldspar Phosphate rock
Fluospar Potash
Bentonite Graphite Pyrite
Calcite Quartz crystals
Celestite Helium
Iodine Salt
Kyanite
Clays Sapphire and
Limestone ruby
Corundum, emery, Magnesite
and artificial abra- Mica Sulphur
sives
importance warrants. Cryolite Talc
D. Nonferrous ores, metals, and alloys
Textual analysis and discussion should be by
Subsections similar to those indicated above for
Subsection B, Iron Ore. Only those ores, metals
and alloys of economic importance should be
treated. A checklist is provided below. This Sub-
section should include the processes through
smelting, refining, and forming metal into basic
shapes.
In treating the processing industries, data
should also be given on annual consumption and
use pattern, including scrap.
Data for ores should be given in terms of specified
content or of the metal content of the ore, in ac-
cordance with U.S. Bureau of Mines practice in
the "World Review" section of the Minerals Year-
book.
The following list will serve as a guide for se-
lecting the products of importance in the area.
Others not on the list should be treated if their
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
F. Construction materials
Discuss the position of the country's basic prod-
ucts which comprise the major materials used in
construction, exclusive of lumber, plywood, struc-
tural iron and steel, asphalt and glass, which are
treated in detail in other sections of CHAPTER VI.
This Subsection should be devoted mainly to ce-
ment and other construction materials such as
sand, aggregate, glass sand, building stone, brick,
cement, lime, gypsum and roofing materials.
Examine the importance in the economy of
the industry producing these materials and indi-
cate its capacity to meet domestic requirements.
Examine the size of the industry in terms of pro-
duction, capital investment and in relation to
markets. Discuss production trends including
technological advances. Indicate problems con-
fronting the industry with respect to raw materials,
location, domestic and foreign competition, and
government policies and contracts. (Tables: Pro-
duction and consumption including use patterns
where possible, imports and exports by countries
of origin and destination, stocks, etc.)
List in table name, location, output, capacity,
equipment, number of employees, ownership of ma-
jor individual plants. Indicate factors affecting
production of individual plants such as efficiency
of operation, availability of fuels, adequacy of trans-
portation, efficiency of labor, plans for expansion,
ability to meet foreign competition, etc.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 64. Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
Review the salient features of the country's man-
ufacturing and construction industry. Review the
salient features of the country's manufacturing
and construction industry, including ownership,
degree of integration, government policies, and
international agreements. Discuss the position
of the industry within the country as an em-
ployer of manpower, a sector for investment and
a contributor to national income. Indicate the
degree of dependence of the industry on foreign
sources for raw materials and equipment, com-
ponents, and finished products. Discuss the
competitive position of the industry in domestic
and in foreign markets. Describe the general level
of technological progress, including the degree of
dependence on foreign technicians. Evaluate the
capacity of the manufacturing industry to meet
normal requirements and potential increased
demands.
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
Under this heading the following manufactures
are to be included : agricultural machinery and
equipment (excluding tractors, which will be cov-
ered under Subsection 64, C and should be so noted
in text) ; machine tools; electrical machinery and
equipment; general purpose machinery (e.g., en-
gines, turbines, conveyors, pumps, cranes, etc.) ;
specialized equipment (e.g., coal mining machin-
ery, metallurgical equipment, construction ma-
chinery, etc.) ; precision and machine building in-
struments; railroad motive power and rolling stock
production and repair facilities.
1) Examine the importance of the industry in
the economy and indicate its capacity to meet do-
mestic requirements. Examine the size of the
industry in terms of total production, capital in-
vestment and in relation to markets. Discuss
production trends including technological ad-
vances. Indicate problems confronting the indus-
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
try with respect to raw materials, location, domes-
tic and foreign competition, and government
policies and controls. (Tables: Total production
and consumption including use pattern where
possible, import and exports by countries or origin
and destination, stocks, etc.)
2) List name, location, output, capacity, equip-
ment, number of employees, and ownership of prin-
cipal plants. Indicate factors affecting production
of individual plants such as efficiency of labor,
ability to meet foreign competition, plans for
expansion, etc.
C. Motor vehicles (including tanks, self -pro-
pelled guns, etc.)
1) Discuss the position of the industry in the
economy and examine its importance as an em-
ployer, a sector for investment, and a contributor
to national income. Indicate the position of the
industry with respect to domestic and foreign com-
petition, government policies and controls.
2) Analyze the strategic supply position of fin-
ished products. Present in tabular form total
annual consumption, including use pattern; total
annual domestic production, actual and potential;
annual imports and exports, including principal
countries of origin and destination; stockpiles.
3) Show relationship of industry to foreign and
domestic sources of raw materials, semi-manufac-
tured products, and component parts.
4) List location and characteristics, and major
products of final assembly plants or similar produc-
ing units, and related installations.
In textual and statistical form show the produc-
tion and productive capabilities of individual ma-
jor plants as regards passenger automobiles, trucks
and busses, tractors, and motorcycles.
Treat specifically the reliance of the country on
foreign supplies of finished vehicles and the de-
pendence of assembly plants on foreign sources of
component parts.
Describe generally the potentialities of the indus-
try from a military point of view, especially its
convertibility to the production of such military
vehicles as tanks, half-tracks, and other combat
vehicles. Give details of the current output of
combat vehicles, but do not include numbers in
use by military units.
Fighter
Attack
Bomber
Transport
Trainer
Liaison and Light Civilian
Other Types
a) Analyze current status of aircraft indus-
try-final assembly, airframe, engine, and pro-
peller plants-and compare present total produc-
tion with that achieved in World War II. Indicate
dependency on foreign design and patents. Show
military reserves and present strength, or indicate
by cross reference that these data may be found in
SECTION 83, Armed Forces.
b) Describe the dependence of the aircraft
industry on foreign and domestic sources of raw
materials, semi-manufactured products, and com-
ponent parts.
c) List the location and physical characteris-
tics of major plants producing aircraft and princi-
pal components, indicating the quantity and
nature of products.
E. Shipbuilding
This Section should include both merchant and
naval vessels, including submarines. Specific in-
structions for the preparation of this Section
follows.
1. GENERAL SUMMARY
State the country's position
nation of the world.
as a shipbuilding
Discuss the position of the shipbuilding and
ship repair industry in the national economy and
examine its importance as an employer, a sector for
investment and a contributor to national income.
Indicate the industry's position with respect to
domestic and foreign competition, government
policies and controls.
Geographic locations of the centers of the ship-
building industry in the country.
Principal sources of shipbuilding materials and
supplies utilized in the industry.
Extent of ship repair activities, general discus-
sion of.
Production (new construction) annual, capacity
to produce.
D. Aircraft production
See Subsection C, 1)
Discuss jet and conventional aircraft produc-
tion separately. The following classification of
aircraft type will be used:
2. MAJOR YARDS
Individual descriptions of major shipbuilding
and ship repair yards. The following items a
through e are to be completed for each major in-
stallation.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
Name of the yard (name of city and subdivision
thereof, if separately named), location (position
with reference to outstanding landmarks on water-
front, rivers and tributaries), number of employ-
ees, size of yard, general comments regarding ship-
yard.
Shipbuilding and ship repair facilities. (Give
location in yard, tabulate dimensions, approximate
if actual are not known, size of ship accommodated,
type of construction, machinery, weight handling
equipment such as cranes, with names of manu-
facturers if known, lift capacities, rail connections,
power, water and other available utilities, fire pro-
tection, security measures, etc.)
Shipbuilding materials and supplies used by the
yard; finished, semi-finished, and raw materials,
source of:
Manufacture within the yard, describe any accessory
plants used to produce parts, fabricate materials,
sub-assemblies, etc.
Domestic plants supplying yard, covering plants out-
side the confines of the yard producing component
parts, equipment and special tools or machines, the
capacity of these plants, size, number of employees
andplant facilities.
Foreign plants supplying yard. (Name, location and
products; whether same type as domestic plants,
whether domestic plants could be expanded to do
the same work, identifying marks on materials re-
ceived by the yard from foreign sources and the
method of delivery of the products received.
Extent of ship repair activities in the shipyard.
Discuss the following:
Size of ship that can be repaired, whether repairs
can be effected by means of caissons, without dry-
docking, nature of repairs, plating, propeller, shaft
repairs, welding under water; parts available or
which may be fabricated, past experience, Lloyd's
rating, technical skills available, type and amount
of skilled labor, speed of work and hours worked,
attitude of inspectors toward foreign ships, priori-
ties, whether temporary repairs can be made if
permanent repairs exceed facilities.
Annual production (number, types and coun-
tries for which produced) :
Give production during normal years, also po-
tential for expansion in emergencies, types spe-
cialized in, if any; adaptability for change from one
type to another; whether yard has catered to one
or more countries or to own merchant marine, and
numbers produced for each.
Length of time between signing contract and
laying of keel, launching and commissioning, on
average. Give present and prospective require-
ments for steel, lumber, other construction mate-
rials and labor,- and assess the impact upon the
rest of the economy of those requirements.
3. MINOR YARDS
Tabulation of minor shipbuilding and ship
repair yards together with a general summary as
to the extent of shipbuilding and ship repair activi-
ties in those yards.
F. Explosives, industrial and military
See Subsection C, i)-Optional-Cross refer-
ence if appropriate to J, 1.
Discuss the strategic supply position of fin-
ished products. Tabulate annual consumption,
including use pattern; annual domestic produc-
tion, actual and potential; annual imports and
exports, including principal countries of origin and
destination; stockpiles.
Describe the relationship of industry to for-
eign and domestic sources of raw and intermediate
materials.
Give the location and characteristics, and
major products, of plants and related installations.
Describe the capabilities of the country to
produce propellants, primers and boosters, pyro-
technics, and high and 'low explosives. Treat
specifically such products as nitrocellulose, nitro-
glycerine,, mercury fulminate, lead azide, tetryl,
aromatic nitro compounds (TNT, picric acid, DNB,
TNA, etc.), RDX, PETN, inorganic nitrates, nitro-
starch, chlorate, and perchlorate explosives.
Indicate how the explosives manufacturing ac-
tivities are tied in with other phases of the muni-
tions industry, mainly filling factories and ammu-
nition plants.
G. Guns, explosive devices and ammunition
See Subsection C, 1)-Optional
Discuss the strategic supply position of fin-
ished products. Give annual consumption, includ-
ing use pattern; annual domestic production,
actual and potential; annual imports and exports,
including principal countries of origin and desti-
nation; stockpiles.
Examine the relationship of the industry to
foreign and domestic sources of raw materials,
semi-manufactured products, and component
parts.
Give location and characteristics, and major
products, of final assembly plants or similar pro-
ducing units, and related installations.
The topics of the outline will be treated with
respect to the following products; military rifles,
carbines, pistols; machine guns, automatic rifles;
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
guns, howitzers, mortars, cannon; rockets and
rocket projectors, self-propelling and guided mis-
siles; projectiles, ammunition, cartridges; fuzes;
and grenades, bombs, torpedoes, mines, depth
charges.
When particular items of equipment are of im-
portance mainly to one service (navy, air force,
army) treat separately (e.g., cannon special to air-
craft, naval guns, etc.) when the subject is of suffi-
cient importance to merit individual treatment.
Do not include discussion of the amounts of any
of the products on hand in the possession of mili-
tary units.
H. Other military equipment and supplies
(including war gases and smoke preparations)
See Subsection C, l)-Optional-Cross refer-
ence to Subsection J, 1, if relevant.
Discuss the strategic supply position of finished
products. Give annual consumption, including use
pattern; annual domestic production, actual and
potential; annual imports and exports, including
principal countries of origin and destination;
stockpiles.
Describe the relationship of industry to foreign
and domestic sources of raw materials, semi-manu-
factured products, and component parts.
Give location and characteristics, and major
products, of final assembly plants or similar pro-
ducing units, and related installations.
Treat especially the following types of miscella-
neous military manufactures:
Discuss strategic supply position of finished
products. Give annual consumption, including
use pattern; annual domestic production, actual
and potential; annual imports and exports, includ-
ing principal countries of origin and destination;
stockpiles.
Describe the relationship of industry to for-
eign and domestic sources of raw materials, semi-
manufactured products, and component parts.
Give location and characteristics, and major
products, of final assembly plants or similar pro-
ducing units, and related installations.
Under telecommunications equipment treat tele-
phone and telegraph instruments, and radio re-
ceivers and transmitters. Radar also will be
included as a form of communications equipment.
In addition discuss military signaling devices,
searchlights, and signal lighting equipment.
J. Chemical industries
This Subsection should cover heavy chemicals
for industrial use, chemical fertilizers and chemical
plastics (unfabricated). Chemical products des-
tined for direct consumption, for example phar-
maceutical products, should be treated under the
heading Other Industries.
1. INDUSTRIAL CHEMICALS
The following list of industrial chemicals will
serve as a guide for selecting those of importance
in the area, which should be treated in this Subsec-
tion. Others not on the list should also be treated
if their importance warrants.
Miscellaneous weapons and devices such as flame-
throwers; incendiaries; asphyxiating, lethal, and
toxic gases or other incapacitating substances;
smoke preparations; other deceptive or decoy de-
vices.
Aiming and computing devices, including predictors
and plotting apparatus, for fire control; direction
of fire instruments; gun sights; bomb sights; fuze
setters.
Optical and photographic equipment of types used
extensively by armed forces (firing devices, peri-
scopes, air cover cameras, etc.)
Instruments, motors, gauges used in motor vehicles,
airplanes, and ships.
Miscellaneous personal equipment not of a civilian
nature (gas masks, packs, etc.)
1. Telecommunications signal and lighting
equipment
See Subsection C, l)-Optional-Cross refer-
Acetic acid
Alcohol (ethyl, methyl, butyl)
Ammonia
Bromine
Calcium carbide
Caustic soda and caustic potash
Chlorine
Coal tar products (benzol, tolnol,
monium sulphate)
Commercial gases (oxygen, hydrogen, carbon dioxide,
acetylene)
Fluorine compounds
Glycerine
Hydrochloric acid
Hydrogen peroxide
Nitric acid
Permanganates
Soda ash
Sulphuric acid
Synthetic dyes
Synthetic nitrogen products
Tetraethyl lead
ence to appropriate section under B, Industrial Ma- See Subsection B, 1)
chinery and Equipment. See Subsection B, 2)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER V-I
2. CHEMICAL FERTILIZERS
The following fertilizers are suggested for con-
sideration in this Subsection. Others of equal im-
portance may be added.
Basic slag
Nitrates
Phosphates
Potassium and calcium compounds
Superphosphates
See Subsection B, 1)
See Subsection B, 2)
K. Agricultural processing industries
The following major types of agricultural proc-
essing plants are to be considered: tobacco, meat
packing, beverages, canneries, sugar mills and re-
fineries and oil processing plants. In certain areas
other categories of installations will be important
and should be given separate treatment.
See Subsection B, 1)
See Subsection B, 2)
L. Fibers, fabrics and rubber
The following major fibers, fabrics, and rubber
industries should be included : synthetic fiber, pa-
per and pulp, textiles, synthetic rubber shoes and
leather, tires, rubber products, etc.
See Subsection B, 1)
See Subsection B, 2)
M. Construction industries
This Subsection should treat major construction
firms or industries interested and utilized in resi-
dential, commercial, industrial and public works
construction. Construction materials are treated
in other sections of CHAPTER VI and appropriate
reference should be made in this Subsection.
See Subsection C, 1)
Discuss briefly and in general major cate-
gories of construction, number of major firms in-
volved, and adequacy and availability of skilled
and semi-skilled labor and equipment necessary
for the industries concerned. Discuss growth of
these industries, adequacy to meet present require-
ments and their ability to expand.
Tabulate major construction firms, their lo-
cation, types of construction each firm is interested
in, and amount of skilled and semi-skilled labor
employed.
List outstanding and highly qualified per-
sonalities in the construction industry and note
their special interests.
N. Other industries
This Subsection should treat two types of indus-
tries not treated elsewhere. First, those industries
that are important in the economy of the area
should be examined in detail according to require-
ments set up in B, 1) and B, 2). The analyst should
not feel obliged to consider, here, industries em-
ploying less than 5% of the manufacturing labor
force.
The second type of industries that should be
treated here are those residual miscellaneous in-
dustries that the analyst feels should be treated
briefly to round out the over-all analysis of the
manufacturing sector of the economy. No special
requirements are set up for this discussion.
0. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ECONOMIC
Section 65. Trade and Finance
A. General
Indicate the principal features of the country's
domestic and foreign trade and the part it plays
in the national economy. Discuss the country's
currency and banking systems, and organization
of public finances. Note significant changes in
the country's balance of payments, especially dur-
ing and since the war. Point out whether the
country normally has an import or export surplus,
and what is its debtor-creditor position (foreign
assets and liabilities). Discuss the country's posi-
tion in international markets. Describe the gov-
ernment's policy in the fields of domestic and for-
eign trade and finance.
B. Business organization
Discuss the juridical forms of business owner-
ship. Indicate degree of interlocking financial re-
lationship and dispersion of ownership.
C. Domestic trade and finance
1. PATTERN OF DOMESTIC TRADE
1) Describe the place of wholesale and retail
trade in the national economy, showing its contri-
bution to GNP, number of persons employed as per-
cent of total labor force, etc.
2) Describe briefly the structure of the trade
channels, (wholesale and retail), with special em-
phasis upon trade practices, ownership (private,
state, cooperative), nature and degree of speciali-
zation.
2. DOMESTIC FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
AND THEIR STRUCTURE
Under each of the following principal topics in-
clude relevant statistical data as much as possible
in tabular form.
a. BANKING AND CURRENCY SYSTEM - Describe
the banking system indicating the kinds of banks
and their role in financing private industry and
trade, agriculture and government. Describe
briefly the central bank institution and discuss its
role in the economy and government operations.
Discuss flexibility of currency system and ability
to meet changing economic requirements. De-
scribe briefly the currency system of the country
indicating the kinds of currency used, the amounts
outstanding, name of the issuing authority. Ex-
plain the degree to which the currency is tied to
gold or to some other foreign currency, such as
sterling or dollar.
b. INSURANCE COMPANIES AND OTHER FINANCIAL
INSTITUTIONS (CREDIT UNIONS, ETC.) - Describe
briefly major features and operations.
c. SECURITY MARKETS - Describe briefly major
features emphasizing role in providing and chan-
neling investment funds.
d. COMMODITY MARKETS - List and briefly dis-
cuss the size, operations and government regula-
tions relating to the major commodity markets.
3. GOVERNMENT FINANCE AND FISCAL
POLICY
Under each of the following principal topics in-
clude relevant statistical data as much as possible
in tabular form. In all cases compare with prewar
base year and indicate trends.
a. PUBLIC EXPENDITURES (NATIONAL BUDGET) -
Analyze budgets to determine, where possible, the
distribution of public expenditures on a functional
as well as organizational basis with special em-
phasis on national defense and scientific develop-
ment, and adequate attention to welfare and eco-
nomic development. Indicate the size and func-
tion of local budgets.
b. REVENUE - Describe briefly the tax systems
and other sources of revenue of both national and
intermediate governments. Analyze adequacy to
meet revenue requirements and social and political
factors which condition revenue patterns.
c. GOVERNMENT DEBT - Indicate the size of
government debt, internal and foreign, and trace
the trends during recent years. Discuss any par-
ticular problems that have arisen in connection
with this debt, especially those involving servicing
the foreign debt.
d. GOVERNMENT MONETARY AND FISCAL POLI-
CIES - Describe briefly the government's fiscal and
monetary policies. Specifically, consider the ef-
fect on monetary availabilities and purchasing
power (and through them on the levels of national
income) of the following policies:
Government surpluses and/or deficits
Public revenue system
Public expenditure pattern
Management of the public debt
Central bank policies, such as limitations on amount
of issue, regulation of interest rates, reserve re-
quirements, open market policies, etc.
e. GOVERNMENT POLICIES TOWARD RESTRICTIVE
TRADE PRACTICES - Examine government policies
toward cartels, monopolies, other restrictive trade
practices, and toward cooperatives.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VI
D. International finance and trade
Under each of the following principal topics in-
clude relevant statistical data as much as possible
in tabular form.
1. BALANCE OF PAYMENTS POSITION
a. OVER-ALL - Discuss in over-all terms the
balance of payments of the country indicating the
net debit or credit position, the principal debit and
credit items or groups of items and the principal
debit and credit countries or monetary groupings.
Indicate the extent to which commodity trade,
other current accounts, and capital and monetary
gold movements affect the balance of payments.
Where significant, analyze the triangular or multi-
lateral aspects of the balance of payments. Indi-
cate changes in the pattern of the balance of pay-
ments during and since World War II. Draw up
balance of payments statements for a typical pre-
war year and one or more postwar years according
to the presentation adopted by the International
Monetary Fund.
b. CURRENT ACCOUNT
(1) Commodity trade - Show the relation-
ship of the country's total foreign commodity
trade to world trade and to its own national income.
Describe the extent to which the country is de-
pendent upon either imports or exports. Set forth
the pattern of the country's foreign trade by com-
modity, by country of origin or destination, by
quantity, value, and percentage distribution and
variation. Indicate the more significant changes
that have taken place in the preceding decade.
Specify the countries and commodities upon which
the foreign trade of the country is particularly de-
pendent. Include a table of foreign trade showing
by commodity, where data permits, the following :
1) volume, 2) value, 3) percentage distribution,
and 4) country of origin and destination. If pos-
sible these should be given for different years in
order to show fluctuation. These data should also
be presented in graphic form when possible.
(2) Other current items - Discuss the pat-
tern of current accounts, analyzing the significance
of the major invisible items, shipping, insurance,
interest, tourism, non-compensated remittances,
etc.
C. CAPITAL AND GOLD MOVEMENTS - If the
movements of capital and monetary gold need
analysis in greater detail than in Subsection D, 1, a,
it should be presented here.
2. FOREIGN ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Discuss the country's position in recent years as
an international debtor or creditor. Taking into
consideration government and private investments,
gold and foreign exchange holdings, etc., list the
principal debtor or creditor countries, and indicate
amounts outstanding. Analyze the nature and
magnitude of any intergovernmental loans or
grants. Indicate the amount of foreign investment
within the country by industry group and by in-
vesting country. Indicate the amount of invest-
ment abroad by industry group and country of in-
vestment. Evaluate the role of foreign assets or
debts as they would affect wartime and other
extraordinary foreign expenditures. Describe
changes in holdings of foreign exchange and gold
during recent years and examine their effect upon
foreign trade and international payments.
Draw- up a table of estimates of the country's
private and government assets or investments in
foreign countries and of foreign countries' assets
or investments in the subject country, showing
gross values outstanding as of the end of recent
fiscal or calendar years. Data should be shown by
classes of property, investment, or claim by for-
eign countries or areas in which country's assets
or investments or its obligors are located, or which
own or hold assets or investments in the country,
or obligations of the country. The country's esti-
mated total net creditor or debtor position should
be given, as well as its net position with regard to
particular classes of assets or with individual for-
eign countries or areas.
The type of data and table intended can be judged
by referring to the following:
Debtor and Creditor Countries: 1938, 1944 by Cleora
Lewis, published by the Brookings Institution,
Washington, D. C., 1945. The 1938 estimates cover
all countries of the world for which data were avail-
able, but list only long-term, not short-term assets.
U.S. Treasury Department, Office of the Secretary,
Census of American Owned Assets in Foreign Coun-
tries, 1947, Table I, p. 9, Table III, p. 17, and Table
VI, p. 26.
U.S. Treasury Department, Office of the Secretary,
Census of Foreign Owned Assets in the United
States, G.P.O., 1945, Washington, D. C., Table IV,
p. 18, Table V, p. 19, Table VII, p. 22.
U.S. Department of Commerce, The Balance of
International Payments of the United States,
1946-48, G.P.O., Washington, D. C., 1950, pp. 162-165,
"Table 36-International investment position of the
U.S. by area, 1945-1948."
Where data are not available indicate by appro-
priate entry in the table.
3. GOVERNMENT POLICIES, PRACTICES AND
INSTITUTIONS RELATIVE TO INTERNATIONAL
TRADE AND FINANCE
Discuss the nature, extent, and effectiveness of
government controls on foreign exchange and for-
eign trade and their relationship to each other.
Indicate to what extent these controls are perma-
nent or of an emergency character. Discuss the
purpose of such controls and the extent to which
they modify the trade pattern.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 :
CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
ECONOMIC
Discuss governmental policy, practices and in-
stitutions in respect to the following matters:
a. COMMERCIAL POLICY AND STATE INTERVENTION
IN INTERNATIONAL TRADING
Tariffs, subsidies and incentives
Quantitative restrictions
State trading, bulk buying, bilateral agreements, etc.
Relations with international trade organizations
such organizations influence the volume and char-
acter of the foreign trade.
E. Government wartime financing
Discuss the manner in which the government
financed its expenditures during the recent war, in
financing its domestic and foreign procurement.
Indicate major developments since the outbreak of
World War II that affect its ability in this regard.
Foreign exchange rates-Indicate changes that have
occurred in country's exchange rates during recent
years; account for such changes by reference to
inflationary policies, occupation by foreign powers,
deliberate economic warfare, etc.
Participation in international payments and clear-
ance arrangements, e.g., IPU-
Relations with international financial institutions,
e.g., IMF-
Controls and safeguards affecting international in-
vestment-
4. FOREIGN TRADE ORGANIZATIONS
Discuss briefly the nature of foreign trade or-
ganizations, including cartels, which control the
movement of goods. Indicate the extent to which
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER VII
SCIENTIFIC
Section 70 Introduction
Section 71 Electronics
Section 72 Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
Section 73 Atomic Energy
Section 74 Biological Warfare (BW)
Section 75 Chemical Warfare (CW)
Section 76 Miscellaneous
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter VII - Scientific
OUTLINE
A.
Development and evaluation of scien-
B.
Aircraft and aircraft armament
1. General
2. Airframes
B.
tific effort
1. General structure of the scientific
effort
2. Current trends
3. Evaluation
Organization for research
C.
3. Aircraft propulsion
4. Aircraft ordnance
5. Other aircraft equipment
6. Personalities
Guided missiles
1. General
C.
1. Governmental organization
2. Armed forces
3. Academies and higher educational
institutions
4. Privately-owned research organiza-
tions
Education, training and procurement
2. Guidance and control
3. Propulsion
4. Aerodynamics and structure
5. Warheads and fuzing
6. Organization for research and de-
velopment
7. Installations
D.
of scientific personnel
Appropriations
D.
8. Personalities
Antiaircraft weapons and equipment
E.
1. Public and private funds allotted
for research and development
2. Prizes, awards, and scholarships
Comments on principal sources
1. General
2. Guns and ammunition
3. Unguided rockets
4. Fire control equipment
E.
5. Personalities
Ground weapons and equipment
A.
General
1. General
2. Combat vehicles
B.
Radio communications
3. General purpose vehicles
C.
Communications equipment other
4. Artillery
D.
than radio
Navigation aids
5. Infantry weapons
6. Mines and mine clearance equip-
E.
F.
Radar
Infrared
ment
7. Stream crossing equipment
8. Special arctic equipment
G.
Acoustics
9. Other
H.
Vacuum tubes
10. Personalities
I.
Components and special devices
F.
Naval weapons
J.
Electronic countermeasures
1. General
K.
Personalities
2. Hull designs
L.
Comments on principal sources
3. Ship propulsion
SECTION 72.
Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
4. Underwater ordnance
5. Surface ordnance
G.
6. Personalities
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VII
A. General
B. Organization
C. Appropriations
D. Scientific training program
E. Personalities
F. Research facilities
G. Supporting industrial firms
H. Sources and production of basic
materials
I. Production of reactive materials
J. Applications
K. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 74. BIOLOGICAL WARFARE (BW)
A. General
B. Capabilities, organization and poli-
cies for research and development
PAGE VII-2
C. Research, development and field
testing
D. Installations
E. Personalities
F. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 75. CHEMICAL WARFARE (CW
A. General
B. Capabilities, organization and poli-
cies for research and development
C. Research, development and field
testing
D. Installations
E. Personalities
F. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SCIENTIFIC
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
The following is intended to serve as a general
instruction for the production of CHAPTER VII.
Relevant features contained herein, modified to
conform with the area being covered, shall be in-
cluded with the finished CHAPTER VII to serve as a
guide for the reader.
CHAPTER VII (Scientific) is devoted to the rela-
tively permanent and fundamental aspects of
scientific research and development in the subject
area. Material contained in the chapter should be
adequate to provide key scientific intelligence an-
alysts with a basis for preparing estimates for such
bodies as the National Security Council, the Re-
search and Development Board, the Joint Chiefs of
Staff, and the National Security Resources Board,
and for departmental planning components.
Since science enters strongly into present-day
military planning connected with the national
security, CHAPTER VII places emphasis on the mili-
tary aspect of scientific research and development.
It is recognized, however, that much of the advance
in military technology generates from non-military
laboratories and that the entire scientific base of a
country contributes to a certain extent to the mili-
tary potential of the country. CHAPTER VII there-
fore should also cover subjects which have no
direct military application but which are of sig-
nificance.
The particular area covered by CHAPTER VII, of
course, influences the volume and scope of the tex-
tual presentation. For example, treatment con-
cerning the U.S.S.R. is only complete when full
coverage is provided for salient contributions of
U.S.S.R. satellite nations.
A clearer understanding of the purpose of CHAP-
TER VII is provided by consideration of its relation-
ship with certain other chapters of the over-all NIS
presentation. Generally speaking, CHAPTER VII
covers scientific research and development through
the prototype stage of materiel, whereas CHAPTER
VI (ECONOMIC) deals with the manufacture of ma-
teriel and CHAPTER VIII (ARMED FORCES) with the
quality, quantity, and characteristics thereof.
CHAPTER IV (SOCIOLOGICAL) deals with the educa-
tional system as a whole and with the educational
level of the population whereas CHAPTER VII deals
with educational institutions and learned societies
which are engaging in scientific research. Since it
is recognized that essentially all aspects of atomic
energy and biological warfare, including the manu-
facture and capabilities thereof, fall within the field
of scientific intelligence, all such aspects should be
respectively treated in SECTIONS 73 (ATOMIC EN-
ERGY) and 74 (BIOLOGICAL WARFARE) and no aspect
is treated in CHAPTER VI or CHAPTER VIII. Manu-
facture of chemical warfare material is, however,
treated in CHAPTER VI and the quality, quantity,
and characteristics of such materiel in CHAPTER
VIII.
Because the over-all field of scientific research
and development is not static, the line of demarca-
tion between basic and current scientific intelli-
gence is not always clear cut. This line may be
particularly hazy in the subjects of research and
development programs as such programs, if han-
dled with normal efficiency and force, are likely,
in their progress, to generate from day to day new
facts of interest. It is the intent that CHAPTER VII
provide comprehensive coverage of significant re-
search and development programs. However, that
coverage should be limited to the origin, objectives,
history, general progress and an indication of basic
trends (avoid estimates and opinions which should
be reserved for other types of intelligence produc-
tion) of the programs as of the time of writing.
Also, it must be recognized that the inclusion of a
mass of ephemeral, as opposed to fundamental,
details may require too frequent revision of the
chapter and may tend to confuse or even mislead
the reader. In view of the foregoing, good judg-
ment must be exercised to determine which details
are to be included and which are to be excluded.
As a matter of fact, however, the very nature of
scientific research and development is such as al-
most uniformly to require protection of them by
the most nearly impervious counter-intelligence
screen that the country in which they are being
conducted is able to erect. Hence, the amount of
detail concerning them is more likely to be little
than great. Therefore, in the preparation of the
text frequent acute problems of selectivity are not
anticipated and, in any event, it is desired to err on
the side of including too many details rather than
too few.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VII
Section 70. Introduction
A. Development and evaluation of scientific
effort
1. GENERAL STRUCTURE OF THE SCIEN-
TIFIC EFFORT
Cover the history and tradition of scientific re-
search and development in the subject area. Refer
to the position of science and show clearly the gov-
ernmental attitude toward scientific research. In-
clude references to social and economic positions
enjoyed by scientists in the subject area. Evalu-
ate briefly scientific scholarship. (Individuals
should be covered in appropriate Section.)
2. CURRENT TRENDS
State the field or fields of endeavor in which
notably outstanding work is done, or is likely to
be done. Outline capabilities and potentialities
of converting research and development in case of
war. Give outstanding contributions to scientific
theory and to applied research (reference other sec-
tions of this Chapter).
3. EVALUATION
Present an evaluation of scientific scholarship
and the levels of achievement in pure and applied
science. Cover the various factors and aspects of
the scientific effort in terms of their strengthening
or weakening this effort. Include considerations
relating to scientific organization, political control,
scientific philosophy, technical resources, etc.
B. Organization for research
Provide identification of the main organizations
and types of organizations; their interrelationship
and coordination; whether planned or spontaneous.
Present the relative significance of each organiza-
tion or group of organizations of a given type. In-
dicate how research projects originate and are sus-
tained. Refer to cooperation and the dissemina-
tion of ideas. Cover planning.
1. GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATION
Cover the structure for controlling, supervising,
or advising scientific research and development
outside the Armed Forces.
2. ARMED FORCES
Describe research organizations within the
Armed Forces and research organizations con-
trolled or supervised by or for the Armed Forces.
3. ACADEMIES AND HIGHER EDUCATIONAL
INSTITUTIONS
Describe organizations that are actively engaged
in participating or fostering research, with signifl-
cance and relation to the governmental organiza-
tion. (Mention only higher educational establish-
ments which have outstanding reputations in
scientific fields.) Cover briefly outstanding types
of research accomplishment. There should be ex-
tensive cross-referencing to CHAPTER IV, where the
basic education system is covered. Close coordi-
nation should be established with the Department
of State, which is the agency responsible for
CHAPTER IV.
4. PRIVATELY-OWNED RESEARCH ORGANI-
ZATIONS
Describe industrial organizations engaged in re-
search, the type, caliber and significance of this
research. Cover the relationship with government
organization, if evident. Include foreign affilia-
tions, if any. There should be extensive cross-
referencing to CHAPTER VI and close liaison estab-
lished with the Department of State.
C. Education, training and procurement of
scientific personnel
Discuss the training of scientists, particularly in
the higher schools and in postgraduate work.
Make an attempt to evaluate academic standards.
D. Appropriations
1. PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FUNDS ALLOTTED
FOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
Refer to public and private funds allotted for re-
search and development, indicating how funds are
allotted among various fields, organizations, and/or
scientists.
2. PRIZES, AWARDS, AND SCHOLARSHIPS
Cover prizes, awards and scholarships for
scientific research and development.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SCIENTIFIC
Section 71. Electronics
A. General
Contains a brief discussion of the capabilities of
the subject nation in electronic research and de-
velopment. If sufficiently outstanding, mention
may be made of governmental support of research
or training of electronic personnel. Aid, such as
Lend-Lease, ECA support, or outright sale of elec-
tronic equipment or information, that has been
supplied from other countries will be mentioned.
The outstanding research laboratories and develop-
mental establishments should be discussed briefly.
B. Radio communications
Contains a general discussion concerning the
types of equipment being developed, its modernity,
indications of the development of unusual types of
radio apparatus, and the adequacy of the equip-
ment supplied. A general discussion of the prob-
able tactical application of radio communications
may be included, but a detailed list of specific
equipment is not desired.
C. Communications equipment other than
radio
Contains a general discussion concerning the
types of equipment being developed, its modernity,
indications of the development of unusual types of
communications apparatus in this category, and
the adequacy of the equipment supplied.
D. Navigation aids
Contains a general discussion of the types of
electronic navigational aids being developed by the
subject nation, such as radar, radio beacons, di-
rection-finding stations, etc.
E. Radar
Contains a general discussion of the important
types of radar and radar recognition (IFF) equip-
ment being developed by the subject nation.
F. Infrared
Contains a general discussion of the important
infrared development under way in the subject
nation.
G. Acoustics
Contains a general discussion of the important
types of underwater sound devices with mention
of other acoustic developments of significance.
H. Vacuum tubes
Contains a discussion of the capabilities of the
subject nation in the design of all types of vacuum
tubes. Mention should be made of the character-
istics of any special types that are being developed,
and of unusual applications of those developments.
1. Components and special devices
Briefly discuss the various types of components,
special electronic devices, and laboratory equip-
ment not covered by the preceding paragraphs.
J. Electronic countermeasures
Contains a brief discussion of ECM techniques
which have been devised by the subject nation, to-
gether with a description of the important equip-
ments planned to implement those techniques.
An important part of this Subsection is the assess-
ment, whenever possible, of the susceptibility of
the nation's electronic devices to countermeasures.
K. Personalities
Provide a listing, with specialties and other per-
tinent information, of the outstanding personali-
ties in the program.
L. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VII
Section 72. Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
A. General
Summarize the over-all capabilities of the sub-
ject country on research and development in regard
to air, ground and naval weapons and other ma-
teriel referred to throughout this Section. When
so desired in the preparation of this Subsection, it
may be broken down into further divisions to
specifically refer to individual items such as guided
missiles, naval weapons, etc. The summary shall
include an indication of the principal conclusions
reached.
B. Aircraft and aircraft armament
1. GENERAL
Evaluate the over-all research and development
capabilities of the subject country in the field of
aircraft and aircraft armament, and summarize
the principal conclusions.
a. ORGANIZATION FOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOP-
MENT - A general picture is desired of military
and civilian organizations which supervise, advise,
control, or conduct significant research and de-
velopment of airframes.
b. INSTALLATIONS - Describe briefly airframe
research development and test facilities and indi-
cate their effect on research and development capa-
bilities.
c. BASIC TRENDS - Discuss basic research and
development trends in design aspects of military
and civilian aircraft types; avoid reference to
specific items currently under development and
limit the discussion to continuing basic projects.
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection B, 2
above; include design aspects of reciprocating, jet,
turboprop, and rocket power plants.
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection B, 2
above; include aircraft machine guns, cannon,
rockets, bombs, bombsights, etc.
5. OTHER AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection B, 2
above; include such equipment as pressurization,
oxygen and ejection systems, etc.
6. PERSONALITIES
Include brief biographic data on key personnel
which provide insight into research and develop-
ment capabilities. (Cross-reference personnel con-
cerned with any other of the subjects covered by
this Section.)
C. Guided missiles
Evaluate the over-all research and development
capabilities of the subject country in the field of
guided missiles, and summarize the principal con-
clusions.
2. GUIDANCE AND CONTROL
Discuss research and development trends in
guidance and control; in general, limit the discus-
sion to continuing projects, but refer to specific
items currently under development where indica-
tive of trends.
3. PROPULSION
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection C, 2
above.
4. AERODYNAMICS AND STRUCTURE
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection C, 2
above.
5. WARHEADS AND FUZING
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection C, 2
above.
6. ORGANIZATION FOR RESEARCH AND DE-
VELOPMENT
A general picture is desired of military and
civilian organizations which supervise, advise, con-
trol, or conduct significant research and develop-
ment.
Describe briefly research, development, test fa-
cilities, and proving grounds and indicate their
effect on the missile program.
Include brief biographic data on key personnel
which provide insight into research and develop-
ment capabilities. (Cross-reference personnel con-
cerned with any other of the subjects covered by
this Section.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SCIENTIFIC
D. Antiaircraft weapons and equipment
1. GENERAL
Evaluate the over-all research and development
capabilities of the subject country in surface
launched antiaircraft weapons (excluding guided
missiles), and summarize the principal conclusions.
a. ORGANIZATION FOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOP-
MENT - A general picture is desired of military and
civilian organizations which supervise, advise, con-
trol, or conduct significant research and develop-
ment pertaining to guns and ammunition, includ-
ing fuzing.
b. INSTALLATIONS - Describe briefly research,
development and test facilities and indicate their
effect on research and development capabilities.
c. BASIC TRENDS - Discuss basic research and
development trends in design aspects of antiair-
craft gun and ammunition types; avoid reference
to specific items currently under development and
limit the discussion to continuing basic projects.
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection D, 2
above; include design aspects of unguided rockets
and associated equipment of the "Taifun" types.
4. FIRE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection D, 2
above; include design factors relative to unique
electronic and mechanical antiaircraft fire control
systems and associated equipment.
Include brief biographic data on key personnel
which provide insight into research and develop-
ment capabilities. (Cross-reference personnel con-
cerned with any other of the subjects covered by
this Section.)
E. Ground weapons and equipment
1. GENERAL
Evaluate the over-all research and development
capabilities of the subject country in the field of
ground weapons and equipment and summarize
the principal conclusions.
a. ORGANIZATION FOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOP-
MENT - A general picture is desired of military and
civilian organizations which supervise, advise, con-
trol, or conduct significant research and develop-
ment of combat vehicles, including self-propelled
guns.
b. INSTALLATIONS - Describe briefly combat
vehicle development and test facilities and indicate
their effect on research and development capa-
bilities.
c. BASIC TRENDS - Discuss basic research and
development trends in design aspects of combat
vehicles; avoid reference to specific items currently
under development and limit the discussion to con-
tinuing basic projects.
3. GENERAL PURPOSE VEHICLES
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection E, 2
above; include design aspects of unique develop-
ment relative to power plants, transmission and
traction devices.
4. ARTILLERY
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection E, 2
above, including field, antitanks, howitzers, ground
support rockets, and mortars together with as-
sociated fire control equipment and ammunition,
but excluding antiaircraft weapons covered in Sub-
section D above.
5. INFANTRY WEAPONS
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection E, 2
above, including small arms, machine guns, anti-
tank rifles, grenades, bazookas, etc., and associ-
ated ammunition.
6. MINES AND MINE CLEARANCE EQUIP-
MENT
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection E, 2
above, including mines and associated fuzes, actu-
ating and control devices, as well as detection and
clearing equipment.
7. STREAM CROSSING EQUIPMENT
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection E, 2
above, including bridging in general as well as
assault boats and other associated equipment.
8. SPECIAL ARCTIC EQUIPMENT
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection E, 2
above, including shelter, clothing, rations, vehicles,
fuels and lubricants and other unique special
equipment or materiel.
9. OTHER
Follow the guide outlined for Subsection E, 2
above, in discussing any other ground weapons or
equipment.
10. PERSONALITIES
Include brief biographic data on key personnel
which provide insight into research and develop-
ment capabilities. (Cross-reference personnel con-
cerned with any other of the subjects covered by
this Section.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VII
F. Naval weapons
1. GENERAL
Evaluate the over-all research and development
capabilities of the subject country in the field of
naval weapons and equipment and summarize the
principal conclusions.
2. HULL DESIGNS
a. ORGANIZATION FOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOP-
MENT - A general picture is desired of naval and
civilian organizations which supervise, advise, con-
trol, or conduct significant research and develop-
ment of ship hull designs.
b. INSTALLATIONS - Describe briefly hull de-
sign research, development and test facilities and
indicate their effect on research and development
capabilities.
c. BASIC TRENDS - Discuss basic research and
development trends in design aspects of naval ves-
sels; avoid reference to specific items currently un-
der development and limit the discussion to con-
tinuing basic projects.
3. SHIP PROPULSION
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection F, 2
above; include design aspects of turbine, jet and
closed-cycle power plants.
4. UNDERWATER ORDNANCE
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection F, 2
above; include such weapons as mines, torpedoes,
depth charges, ahead-thrown weapons, water-
penetrating rockets and their launchers, fire con-
trol systems, etc.
5. SURFACE ORDNANCE
Follow the guide outlined in Subsection F, 2
above; include anti-surface vessel offensive weap-
ons and associated fire control and target desig-
nation systems.
6. PERSONALITIES
Include brief biographic data on key personnel
which provide insight into research and develop-
ment capabilities. (Cross-reference personnel con-
cerned with any other of subjects covered by this
Section.)
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 73. Atomic Energy
A brief summary of the over-all capabilities in
the field of atomic energy.
D. Scientific training program
A summary of government and privately-spon-
sored programs designed to increase the numbers
of technically-trained personnel in this field.
B. Organization
Details of governmental organizations for the
control of atomic energy activities including the
names of people in important positions.
C. Appropriations
A summary of appropriations for atomic energy
research, development and production, laboratory
maintenance, construction or expansion.
E. Personalities
A listing with specialties and other pertinent in-
formation, of the outstanding personalities in the
program.
F. Research facilities
Descriptions of principal facilities, government
and private, engaged in research and development
in the field of atomic energy, discussing the physi-
cal size, the organization, equipment available, and
usual types of research undertaken.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SCIENTIFIC
G. Supporting industrial firms
Industrial firms capable of, or known to be, fur-
nishing major support to an atomic energy project,
but not covered under H or I.
J. Applications
Estimate of capabilities for various applications,
apparent and/or announced, of the atomic energy
program, such as weapons, power, isotopes for
medical research, or basic research.
H. Sources and production of basic materials
Location of mines and processing plants and
description of processes involved from raw mate-
rial to end product for such essential materials as
uranium, thorium, heavy water, beryllium, pure
graphite, pure calcium, magnesium, lithium, etc.
1. Production of reactive materials
Plants and equipment actually engaged in the
production of reactive materials on other than a
laboratory scale including description of processes
and equipment and total production.
K. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 74. Biological Warfare (B W )
A. General
Summarize the following topics: the over-all
capabilities of the subject country in the BW field;
the general historical background of its BW ac-
tivities; the attitude of the government and people
toward the development of this program; the gen-
eral organization and control of BW activities and
the priority established in relation to other scien-
tific programs; and the general plans and prepa-
rations for future use of and defense against BW.
This brief statement or summary should reflect the
conclusions reached by the following subsections,
including the industrial potential of the country to
produce agents and materiel for warfare.
B. Capabilities, organization and policies for
research and development
The purpose of this Subsection is to assess the
capacity and effectiveness of the directional and
supervisory forces existing in the country, as well
as to show the extent of the current scientific and
technical effort bearing on BW, and the feasibility
of conversion to a military effort in case of total
war. This topic should cover an organizational
outline or summary of the interrelationships of the
following: top-level government administration;
research institutes and applied research labora-
tories under direct governmental control; field-
testing stations; and non-governmental activities,
including university and industrial laboratories
wherein pure and applied research may be deemed
to support the governmental BW program. (De-
tails listing facilities and personnel of specific in-
stallations to be discussed in Subsections D and E.)
Give the current capabilities of the subject na-
tion in respect to BW research and development;
the policies of that government governing the con-
trol, development and exploitation of BW and
funds allocated for basic and applied BW research
and development.
C. Research, development and field testing
This Subsection is directed toward research and
development of BW agents; new material and tech-
niques for dissemination; and new materials or
techniques for detection, identification and pro-
tection. (Lists of installations and personalities
should be given in Subsections D and E.) It is
suggested that the subject matter be treated as
follows :
1) Discuss the research program on develop-
mental BW agents and list those that have been
studied or tested.
2) Discuss pilot stage of developing BW agents
and any evidence of full scale production, stock-
piling, field testing and standardization of materiels
so produced.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VII JUNE 1951
3) Discuss raw materials, new developments in
processes, requirements for special materials and
equipment for the production of BW agents and
materiel. This Subsection might also well include
any known plans for the production of such mate-
rials that may be presumed to be under considera-
tion. Critical shortages of these, or recognized in-
ability to produce, should be pointed out.
4) Discuss research and development programs
directed toward the production of new and im-
proved materials, techniques and equipment for
defensive BW, e.g., detection (materiel and tech-
niques) ; impermeable clothing or impregnated fab-
rics; filters; paper for filters; charcoal and other
absorbents; masks; shelters; decontaminants; pro-
phylactics (immunization, etc.); treatment of man,
animal or plant victims (antibiotics, drugs, anti-
dotes, isolation, killing or destruction, etc.). (Ref-
erences can be made to appropriate medical and
public health sections of the NIS for details.)
5) Present similar information as in Subsection
C, 4) concerning research and development on
types of equipment and methods for the dissemina-
tion of BW agents and field testing of any equip-
ment produced through pilot plant operation, e.g.,
such as : generation or dispersal by explosive
charges, special propellants and aerosol bombs; dis-
persal of liquids and solid masses by nozzels and
other devices; and simplified methods of dissemina-
tion, special munitions, etc.
6) Present studies leading to more adequate as-
sessment of, the relative effects or requirements in
combat or strategic bombing of a) BW vs. HE and
others, and b) the different BW disseminating
methods or munitions under specific micro-
meteorological and climatological conditions. Any
meteorological studies specifically directed toward
BW should be included.
D. Installations
Give exact locations, descriptions, and brief state-
ment of activities of known and suspected BW re-
search installations and pilot plants; plants for
production of BW agents; and munitions still in
development and testing installations and areas.
Available information on special equipment and
other facilities of these installations should be de-
scribed also.
E. Personalities
Give the full names, positions and brief biogra-
phies (include accomplishments) of the principal
personalities (scientists and administrators) in-
volved in BW research and development.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 75. Chemical Warfare (CW)
A. General
Summarize the following topics: the over-all
capabilities of the subject country in the CW field;
the general historical background of its CW activi-
ties; the attitude of the government and people
toward the development of this program; the gen-
eral organization and control of CW activities and
the priority established in relation to other scien-
tific programs; and the general plans and prepara-
tions for future use of and defense against CW.
This brief statement or summary should reflect the
conclusions reached by the following subsections,
including the industrial potential of the country to
produce agents and materiel for warfare. (The
details of chemical industries, etc., are given in
CHAPTER VI.)
B. Capabilities, organization and policies for
research and development
The purpose of this Subsection is to assess the
capacity and effectiveness of the directional and
supervisory forces existing in the country, as well
as to show the extent of the current scientific and
technical effort bearing on CW, and the feasibility
of conversion to a military effort in case of total
war.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
I
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 SCIENTIFIC
This topic should cover an organizational outline
or summary of the interrelationships of the follow-
ing : top-level government administration; re-
search institutes and applied research laboratories
under direct governmental control; field-testing
stations; and non-governmental activities, includ-
ing university and industrial laboratories wherein
pure and applied research may be deemed to sup-
port the governmental CW program. (Details list-
ing facilities and personnel of specific installations
to be discussed in Subsections D and E.)
Give the current capabilities of the subject na-
tion in respect to CW research and development;
the policies of that government governing the con-
trol, development, and exploitation of CW and
funds allocated for basic and applied CW research
and development.
C. Research, development and field testing
This Subsection is directed toward research and
development of new CW agents, smokes, incendi-
aries, flame warfare materials; new materials or
techniques for dissemination; and new materials or
techniques for detection, identification and protec-
tion. (Lists of installations and personalities
should be given in Subsections D and E.) It is
suggested that the subject matter be treated as
follows :
1) Discuss the research program on new or de-
velopmental CW agents and list those that have
been studied or tested. (New CW agents shall be
understood as those not to have been developed
beyond the pilot plant stage, or those for which full
schedule production has not been established on a
firm basis as, for example, the German nerve gases,
in the case of intelligence pertaining to the
U.S.S.R.)
2) Discuss pilot stage of developing new CW
agents and any evidence of full scale production,
stockpiling, field testing and standardization of
materials so produced.
3) Discuss raw materials, new developments in
process, requirements for special alloys, materials
and equipment for the production of new CW
agents and materiel. This Subsection might also
well include any known plans for the production
of such materials that may be presumed to be un-
der consideration. Critical shortages of these, or
recognized inability to produce, should be pointed
out.
4) Discuss research and development of flame
warfare materials, incendiaries and smokes (fuels
and materiel).
5) Discuss research and development programs
directed toward the production of new and im-
proved materials, techniques and equipment for
defensive CW, e.g., detection (materiel and tech-
niques) ; impermeable clothing or impregnated
fabrics; filters; paper for filters; charcoal and other
absorbents; masks; shelters; decontaminants;
treatment of casualties (ointments, antidote, etc.).
6) Present similar information as in subsec-
tion C, 5 concerning research and development
on new types of equipment and methods for the
dissemination of CW agents and field testing of
any equipment produced through pilot plant oper-
ation, e.g., such items as generation or dispersal by
explosive charges, special propellants, aerosol
bombs, and special heat generators; dispersal of
liquids and solid masses by nozzles and other
devices; and simplified methods of dissemination,
special munitions, etc.
7) Present studies leading to more adequate
assessment of the relative effects or requirements
in combat or strategic bombing of a) CW vs. HE
and others, and b) the different CW disseminating
methods or munitions under specific micrometeoro-
logical and climatological conditions. Any mete-
orological studies specifically directed toward CW
should be included.
D. Installations
Give exact locations, descriptions, and brief
statement of activities of known and suspected CW
research installations and pilot plants; plants for
production of CW agents and munitions still in
development; and testing installations and areas.
Available information on special equipment and
other facilities of these installations should be de-
scribed also.
E. Personalities
Give the full names, positions and brief biogra-
phies (include accomplishments) of the principal
personalities (scientists and administrators) in-
volved in CW research and development.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VII
Section 76. Miscellaneous
As a general over-all requirement for each Area,
all phases of relatively permanent and fundamen-
tal aspects of scientific research and development,
through the prototype stage, which are not other-
wise covered in the NIS text, but which have poten-
tial military significance must be considered for
inclusion within this Section. Final determina-
tion as to whether or not certain subjects will be
discussed shall depend upon their importance
within the particular area and the availability of
production manpower.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER VIII
ARMED FORCES
Section 80 Introduction
Section 81 Ground Forces
Section 82 Naval Forces
Section 83 Air Forces
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter VIII - Armed Forces
OUTLINE
A.
B.
C.
General
Structure of Armed Forces
1. Composition
2. Top control
Size of Armed Forces
I.
Training
1. General
2. Pre-induction training
3. Individual training
4. Unit and combined training and
maneuvers
D.
E.
F.
A.
Position of Armed Forces in the nation
1. Legal basis
2. Traditions
3. Political influence
4. Fiscal control
Manpower
1. Available manpower for Armed
Forces
2. Quality of manpower
3. Conscription
Comments on principal sources
General
J.
K.
5. Reserve training
6. Schools and installations
Logistics
1. Classification of materiel
2. Procurement
3. Peacetime storage and issue
4. War supply and movement
5. Maintenance
6. Evaluation
Materiel
1. Ordnance
2. Signal
3. Quartermaster
4. Engineer
5. Chemical
B.
Administrative organization
6. Medical
C.
1. Army high command
2. Territorial organization
3. Arms and services
Tactical organization
L.
M.
Personalities
1. Biographical sketches
2. List of personalities
Quasi-military and other ground
D.
1. General
2. Higher headquarters
3. Staff organization
4. Combat units
5. Service units
Order of battle
N.
SECTION 82.
A.
B.
forces
Comments on principal sources
NAVAL FORCES
General
Organization
E.
1. Strength
2. Dispositions
Strategy and defenses
1. Naval high command
2. Naval districts, zones or activities
3. Naval communications network
F.
1. Strategic problems and doctrines
2. Permanent fortifications
Tactics
C.
4. Forces afloat
5. Other naval organizations
Strength and disposition
G.
1. Basic tactical doctrines
2. Special operations
Personnel
D.
1. Ships
2. Personnel
Policy and doctrine
1. Ranks
2. Pay
1. Naval strategic concepts
2. Doctrine
H.
3. Procurement and terms of service
4. Quality factors
Reserve and mobilization system
3. Naval budget and appropriations
4. Construction and development pro-
grams
1. Reserve system
2. Mobilization system
3. Mobilization potential
5. Naval relationships with other
countries
6. National attitude toward the Navy
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
pq~ CHAPTER VIII
E. Personnel
1. Corps and services
2. Rank and rates
3. Personnel procurement
4. Conditions of service
5. Naval uniforms and insignia
F. Reserve and mobilization system
1. Ships
2. Personnel
3. Merchant marine and other auxili-
ary forces
4. Adequacy of mobilization system
G. Training
1. General
2. Training facilities
3. Officer training
4. Enlisted training
5. Shipboard training
6. Fleet and force training
7. Reserve training
H. Logistics
1. Procurement
2. New construction, repair and main-
tenance
3. Centers of supply
I. Ship design and characteristics
1. Design of ships
2. Strategic characteristics
J. Materiel
1. General
2. Characteristics
K. Personalities
1. Flag and ranking officers
2. Biographies
L. Comments on principal sources
A. GENERAL
1. Tactical air support capabilities
2. Air defense capabilities
3. Strategic air capabilities
4. Air facilities
5. Trends
B. ORGANIZATION
1. High command
2. Subordinate commands and units
C. AIR ORDER OF BATTLE
1. Unit order of battle
2. Means of identification
3. Aircraft acquisitions
D. TACTICAL AIR
1. Close tactical air support
2. General tactical air support
3. Military air transport capabilities
E. AIR DEFENSE
1. General
2. Organization
3. Warning and intercept systems
4. Aircraft defense
5. Antiaircraft artillery defense
6. Passive air defense
F. STRATEGIC AIR
1. Bomber capabilities
2. Strategic reconnaissance
3. Bomber escort
4. Coordination with ground and sea
forces
G. PERSONNEL
1. Procurement
2. Personnel characteristics and morale
3. Uniforms and insignia
H. RESERVE AND MOBILIZATION SYSTEMS
1. Reserve system
2. Mobilization system
3. Mobilization potential
I. TRAINING
1. General
2. Organization
3. Preparatory training and air clubs
4. Flying training
5. Operational training
6. Ground personnel training
7. Staff and command schools
8. Foreign missions
J. LOGISTICS
1. General
2. Sources of supply
3. Supply
4. Maintenance
K. AIR FACILITIES
1. General
2. Types
3. Characteristics
4. Utilization
5. Extensibility
6. Current capability
7. Distribution
8. Current and projected construction
9. Topography, climatology, and mete-
orological services
10. Airfield construction materials
11. Other factors
L. MATERIAL IN ADVANCED STAGES OF DEVEL-
OPMENT
1. Electronics
2. Guided missiles
3. Aircraft, engines, and armament
4. Antiaircraft
M. PARTICIPATION IN INTERNATIONAL DE-
FENSE ORGANIZATIONS
N. PERSONALITIES
1. Biographies
2. List of personalities
0. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
A. GENERAL
E. PERSONNEL
1. Tactical capabilities
1. Procurement
2. Trends
2. Personnel characteristics and mo-
3. Marine aviation
rale
B. ORGANIZATION
3. Uniforms
1. High command
2. Subordinate commands and units
3. Other naval organizations
C. AIR ORDER OF BATTLE
F. RESERVE AND MOBILIZATION SYSTEMS
G. TRAINING
H. LOGISTICS
D. TACTICAL OPERATIONS
I.
MATERIAL IN ADVANCED STAGES OF DEVEL-
1. Antisubmarine warfare (ASW)
OPMENT
2. Use of strike and fighter aircraft in a
J.
PERSONALITIES
support role
K. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
Section 80. Introduction
A. General
Assess the Armed Forces in general terms, in-
cluding their relative international position in
terms of strength, and state of materiel and train-
ing. Continue with a discussion of trends, inter-
national commitments, general strategic plans,
etc., making the General subsection a balanced
synthesis of the General subsections of SECTIONS
81, 82, and 83.
B. Structure of Armed Forces
1. COMPOSITION
Indicate briefly the components of the Armed
Forces with their correct nomenclature, including
pertinent subordinations and any militarized police
forces, etc.
Explain the over-all political and military control
of the forces, with a simple chart to appear on the
bottom half of the first page. Both chart and text
should show in their proper relationships: (a) the
Chief of State, with his proper military title (Su-
preme Commander, etc.) ; (b) any top policy-mak-
ing body, such as a National Security Council, with
its composition and purpose indicated in the text;
(c) the Cabinet members or other political echelons
through whom the chain of command or adminis-
trative control passes; (d) coordinating bodies such
as Joint Chiefs of Staff; (e) the highest purely mili-
tary echelon for control of each component; and
(f) on a level at the bottom, the components them-
selves. Broken lines may be used to show admin-
istrative, as distinct from operational control. In
a separate paragraph, if pertinent, state how long
the present system has been valid and indicate
the nature of the change from any recent previous
organization. Indicate any important change in
the top control structure to be effected in time of
war. If the chart includes a Joint General Staff
or other important agency which will not be de-
scribed in detail under SECTION 81, 82, or 83, its
composition and functions should also be described
in a separate paragraph. Explain briefly the
methods of coordinating the Armed Forces com-
ponents and resolving differences among them.
C. Size of Armed Forces
Discuss the relationship of Armed Forces
strength to total population, indicating significant
trends in total Armed Forces strength and in the
proportions among the components. Insert a
table showing the total personnel strength and
that of each component, with appropriate foot-
notes to account for changes in nomenclature or
subordination, for various dates. As a minimum,
the following should be included: 1913, World War
I peak (if country was a belligerent), a typical
year in the 1920's, the prewar normal (usually 1
July 1937), World War II peak, 1 January of each
postwar year, quarterly for the past three or four
quarters, and the cut-off date.
D. Position of Armed Forces in the nation
1. LEGAL BASIS
Cite the legal basis (provision of Constitution,
basic military law, etc.) for the existence, char-
acter, top control, and over-all structure of the
Armed Forces. Include dates of pertinent legisla-
tion and any significant historical development of
the legal status of the military establishment or its
components.
2. TRADITIONS
Indicate briefly the warlike, pacifist, militarist,
apathetic, or other character of the traditions and
proclivities of the nation. Cite past wars (victories
and defeats) which have contributed to the pres-
ent attitude of the people toward war and military
or naval affairs. Indicate the prestige, or lack
thereof, of the Armed Forces and their components
and the existence of any militarist or warlike sec-
tion of the population. Mention past and present
foreign influences, if pertinent.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
3. POLITICAL INFLUENCE
Discuss the political forces or groups within the
country which effectively control the Armed Forces.
Indicate whether the country is ruled by a military
dictator or a dictatorial minority or whether con-
stitutional guarantees prevent the misuse of mili-
tary power. Discuss any influence of the military
on political affairs. Indicate any factionalism,
favoritism, or political intrigue within the military.
Indicate the loyalty of the Armed Forces (officers
and enlisted personnel) to the regime and any
measures taken to insure such loyalty (political
commissars, appointment of trusted commanders).
Discuss infiltration of subversive influences.
4. FISCAL CONTROL
Describe in a short paragraph the manner in
which funds are allocated to the Armed Forces and
who controls the pursestrings. Give, in tabular
form, actual or estimated budgetary figures, broken
down by main components, for several recent, war-
time, and prewar fiscal years, indicating the pro-
portion of the total budget allotted to military pur-
poses and any concealed items. (Figures should
be given in dollars, with footnotes or a separate
column indicating the rate or rates of exchange
used.) Discuss briefly trends in the budget and
its adequacy.
E. Manpower
1. AVAILABLE MANPOWER FOR ARMED
FORCES
Give statistics on the total number of males by
five-year age groups from 15 to 49 as of the first
day of the year of publication or a more recent date
if important changes have occurred. Indicate how
many of the total in each group are regarded as fit
for military service. If pertinent, show the deple-
tion of fit manpower by war casualties. Give the
size of the annual class reaching military age and
the average number of men actually inducted an-
nually.
2. QUALITY OF MANPOWER
Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the
manpower from the military point of view, includ-
ing such factors as physique, intelligence, educa-
tion, amenability to hardship, aptitude for the use
and care of modern equipment, response to disci-
pline, attitude toward military service, and general
morale and loyalty factors. If pertinent, indicate
the composition of the military manpower by race,
religion, or other categories and the varying suit-
ability of different elements in the population to
military service. Differentiate between the man-
power as a whole and that section of it which is
drawn upon for the Armed Forces.
3. CONSCRIPTION
a. LEGAL BASIS-State how long compulsory
military service has been on the statute books and
to what extent it has been and is now universally,
equitably, and efficiently enforced. Cite the basic
military service law and executory regulations
now in effect. Give the total period of military li-
ability and the prescribed period of service for each
component of the Armed Forces or category of per-
sonnel. Indicate what proportion of each of the
main components of the Armed Forces is obtained
by voluntary recruitment. If pertinent, mention
any prospects of future change in the system.
b. GENERAL SYSTEM - State what agency or
agencies administer the conscription system and
how it is organized territorially. Indicate the
method of designating age classes (i.e., by year of
birth or by year of normal induction). Give the
age, time of year, and procedure for each step in
the operation of the system (initial registration for
military service, initial medical examination and
classification, selection of men for call-up, consid-
eration of applications for deferment, allocation to
main components, actual call-up, actual reporting
for duty).
C. STANDARDS OF FITNESS AND DEFERMENT - In-
dicate in general terms the standards of physical
fitness applied. List the fitness categories. Cite
any actual figures on fitness or acceptance rates
which may be available. Indicate the rules ap-
plied in granting deferments or exemptions for oc-
cupational, educational, or hardship reasons and
the number of men affected.
d. PRESENT STATUS - Indicate what age class
or classes are at present performing compulsory
military service and the dates or prospective dates
or schedules of call-up and discharge of these and
adjacent classes. Give the size of each class af-
fected. Estimate the current composition of the
Armed Forces by age classes or age groups.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
Section 81. Ground Forces
A. General
In the form of a brief, over-all appraisal of the
ground forces as a fighting machine, cite several
of the most salient points of strength and weakness
as to personnel, materiel, organization, and ef-
ficiency which will be more fully developed in subse-
quent subsections. Give any indications from past
development and performance which will provide
the necessary historical perspective, and indicate
briefly the long-range and short-range trends.
Mention significant foreign influences, and relate
the whole discussion to the strategic position, prob-
lems, and capacities of the country.
B. Administrative organization
L ARMY HIGH COMMAND
a. STRUCTURE - Explain briefly the over-all
organization of the Army, including the main sub-
divisions of the War Ministry and the chain of
command to the territorial headquarters and field
forces. Insert one or more charts showing all
known or significant High Command agencies in
their proper relationships; pay careful attention
to exact nomenclature. State what changes in
the High Command structure are contemplated in
case of war.
b. FUNCTIONS - Describe in some detail the in-
ternal organization and functioning of each main
bureau and staff division shown in the above charts,
using appropriate subheadings.
2. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION
Describe the division of the country into military
districts, regions, corps areas, etc. Explain the
functions of such subdivisions (recruitment, local
defense, training, replacement, administration, tac-
tical command). List them, showing their head-
quarters locations and any sub-areas. Include an
outline map showing their boundaries and head-
quarters (or show them on the Order of Battle map
under Subsection D below and refer to it).
3. ARMS AND SERVICES
Explain the concepts and nomenclature used in
dividing Army personnel and troop units into
branches of service. Do not include "services"
which are purely High Command agencies. List
the arms and services which are represented by
actual troop units or by distinctive insignia, giving
in parentheses their designations in the language
of the country.
C. Tactical organization
1. GENERAL
Describe briefly the over-all organization of the
Army into tactical commands and basic tactical
units, indicating any contemplated differences be-
tween peace and war.
2. HIGHER HEADQUARTERS
Give the actual organization (peace and war) of
the higher tactical echelons above division. For
each such echelon explain the nomenclature and
state the type of operational mission or adminis-
trative function for which it is designed. Indicate
what units are usually subordinate to it.
3. STAFF ORGANIZATION
Give available data, with a chart if appropriate,
on the organization and functioning of field staffs.
4. COMBAT UNITS
Describe, under appropriate subheadings and
with accompanying charts, the detailed organiza-
tion, including known or estimated T/O strengths
and allotment of weapons and vehicles, of the vari-
ous types of divisions and smaller independent
combat units. The description of each unit should
be carried down to the smallest elements (rifle
squad, tank platoon, etc.) Indicate the tactical
mission and roles of each unit described. Explain
carefully any differences in nomenclature from
U.S. usage.
5. SERVICE UNITS
Describe briefly the organization of engineer,
signal, supply, and other service units, including
one or more charts if needed.
D. Order of battle
1. STRENGTH
a. PERSONNEL - Give any available statistics
or estimates breaking down the total personnel
strength of the ground forces functionally (major
components, branches of service, officers and en-
listed men, cadres and conscripts, age classes, aux-
iliaries, colonials, racial or linguistic elements).
Figures should be current as of the cut-off date.
b. UNITS - Give in tabular form the current
number of armies, corps, divisions (by type), and
independent smaller combat units (by type).
c. ARMAMENT - Give in tabular form esti-
mates of the total number of each type of tank,
artillery piece, and mortar prescribed under Tables
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
of Equipment and, in a parallel column, the total
number in possession of the country. For each
type, indicate in parentheses the country of origin.
2. DISPOSITIONS
a. GENERAL - Describe briefly the general dis-
position of forces at home and abroad, with
strength figures by major area, and indicate any
significant concentrations.
b. DETAILED - For countries which are regu-
larly covered in the Order of Battle Summary, state
approximately as follows: "For detailed identifica-
tions and locations of units of the Blank Ground
Forces see the latest issues of the quarterly Order
of Battle Summary of Foreign Ground Forces, pub-
lished by the Intelligence Division, Office of the AC
of S, G-2. Current major dispositions as of (cut-
off date) are shown on the map (s) in FIGURE (s)
81-." For all other countries, give a complete
Order of Battle.
E. Strategy and defenses
1. STRATEGIC PROBLEMS AND DOCTRINES
Without going into a detailed strategic analysis,
indicate briefly the strategic military problems of
the nation in the light of position, terrain, eco-
nomic, political, and other pertinent factors. Dis-
cuss the manner in which the leaders of the nation,
and specifically the military planners, appear to
contemplate meeting these problems. Show how
the present organization and disposition of forces
and the mobilization plans fit in with these stra-
tegic problems and plans. Summarize the con-
cepts of "Principles of War" and the established
strategic doctrines of the country, including any
pertinent reference to military literature, historical
background, past campaigns, and foreign influ-
ences.
2. PERMANENT FORTIFICATIONS
a. GENERAL SYSTEM - Describe the over-all
plan of permanent fortifications as it fits into the
strategic concept. Indicate any lessons from the
past, current trends, or future plans.
b. LAND FORTIFICATIONS - Describe in detail,
with subheadings if necessary, the location, pur-
pose, characteristics, and manning of each fron-
tier or internal fortified area, fortified line, or for-
tress town. Insert a map if appropriate, using
standard or special symbols.
C. COASTAL DEFENSES - Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose
characteristics, and manning of coastal fortified
areas, harbor defenses, minefields, warning sys-
tems, and static coastal batteries. Include data on
map of land fortifications, or insert a separate map
if necessary.
F. Tactics
1. BASIC TACTICAL DOCTRINES
Discuss the basic tactical doctrines for the
ground arms, such as attack, defense, reconnais-
sance, withdrawal, artillery support, use of cavalry
and tanks, use of field fortifications and obstacles,
and close combat. Point out any differences in
concept or emphasis from U.S. doctrine. Cite the
manuals in which such doctrines are formulated,
with brief quotations if pertinent. Explain the
tactics and technique down to an appropriate level
(depending on the size of the Army). Discuss cur-
rent trends in tactical doctrine and technique.
2. SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Discuss tactical doctrines for special operations
such as night fighting, street fighting, winter and
arctic warfare, mountain warfare, jungle warfare,
desert operations, airborne operations, amphibious
operations, and infiltration and partisan methods.
Relate the discussion to the existing or contem-
plated special forms of tactical organization.
G. Personnel
1. RANKS
Describe the rank structure of the Army, indi-
cating any differences from United States practice
in the nomenclature, status, and functions of the
various general officer, officer, and enlisted ranks.
Distinguish between any noncommissioned ranks
held by conscripts and those held by career or long-
service personnel. Explain any special categories
such as warrant officers or military "officials." In-
dicate the use, if any, of alternate designations of
rank for personnel in various branches of service
("gunners" for artillery privates, etc.). Insert a
table showing for each rank, starting with the high-
est, the designation in the language of the country,
the literal translation, and the nearest U.S. equiva-
lent.
2. PAY
Describe briefly the system of pay and allowances
for the different categories of military personnel,
pointing out the differences from U.S. standards
both as to the general level (in light of living costs)
and as to relative rates for the upper and lower
ranks. Insert a fourth column in the table of
ranks (referred to above) giving the basic annual
rate of pay in dollars, with a footnote to indicate
the rate of exchange used.
3. PROCUREMENT AND TERMS OF SERVICE
Describe, under suitable subheadings, the meth-
ods of procurement and the terms of service for of-
ficers (active and reserve), noncommissioned of-
ficers, privates, and any other categories. For pri-
vates, refer to the conscription system described in
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
SECTION 80, E, 3, and describe the additional pro-
cedures for voluntary recruitment and reenlist-
ment in the Army. For each category, indicate
the machinery in the High Command and through-
out the Army for control of personnel (assignment,
transfer, efficiency reports, promotion, leave and
furlough, hospitalization, discharge).
4. QUALITY FACTORS
Without unduly duplicating the general discus-
sion of national manpower as a whole contained in
SECTION 80, E, 2, described the effectiveness of per-
sonnel actually serving in the ground forces, em-
phasizing points of strength and weakness. In-
clude a discussion of morale, discipline, esprit de
corps, any traditional rivalries between units or
ethnic groups, etc. Indicate specifically the qual-
ity of military leadership from the highest to the
lowest level.
H. Reserve and mobilization system
1. RESERVE SYSTEM
Give the categories and exact nomenclature of
all reserve organizations and reserve groupings,
with the functions of each. Explain the system of
classification and record-keeping for reserve per-
sonnel (officer and enlisted) and the manner in
which they are recalled to service for refresher
training. Estimate the total number of trained
reserves by age groups and other categories and
the total additional number of untrained reserves.
2. MOBILIZATION SYSTEM
Describe the system for call-up of reserves, ready-
ing of existing units for combat, and activation of
new units under general mobilization. Indicate
what will be the limiting factors in mobilization
for the foreseeable future, such as trained person-
nel, cadres, or reserves of arms and equipment.
In light of the discussion under Subsections 1
and 2 above, estimate the actual mobilization po-
tential of the ground forces for M plus 30, M plus
180, and other appropriate periods, showing in
parallel columns the number of personnel and of
divisions and other major units for each such pe-
riod.
1. Training
1. GENERAL
Characterize the quality and effectiveness of the
over-all training system, emphasizing its strengths
and weaknesses and current trends. Indicate the
influence and effectiveness of any foreign military
missions.
2. PRE-INDUCTION TRAINING
Describe the system of pre-induction training or
military education, including any government-
sponsored or private organizations for encourag-
ing youths to take.an interest in military affairs
and any program of physical conditioning in the
schools under Army sponsorship. Indicate trends.
3. INDIVIDUAL TRAINING
Describe the schedules and methods for basis,
advanced, and specialized individual training of
enlisted personnel in the principal branches. De-
scribe the organization and functioning of training
units, training centers, or similar installations.
Explain briefly the replacement training system in
time of war. In separate paragraphs, describe the
training schedules and methods for NCO and of-
ficer candidates and the schooling given officers as
their careers progress. Indicate any practice of
sending military students abroad.
4. UNIT AND COMBINED TRAINING AND MA-
NEUVERS
Describe the methods of unit training in the
various branches, the methods of combined train-
ing (infantry-artillery or other combat teams), and
the schedule, scope, and character of maneuvers.
5. RESERVE TRAINING
Indicate the schedule and character of refresher
training for reservists. Describe the training sys-
tem for reserve officers (ROTC type, etc.).
6. SCHOOLS AND INSTALLATIONS
a. SYSTEM - Describe the general plan, con-
trol, and efficiency of the Army school system and
of any other training installations.
b. LOCATION LIST - List all Army schools and
other training installations, showing the exact
name (English translation followed by vernacular
designation in parentheses), location, character,
capacity, etc., of each. The list should be arranged
according to level.
J. Logistics
1. CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIEL
Indicate the manner in which equipment and
supplies are grouped into classes for logistic pur-
poses.
2. PROCUREMENT
Describe the machinery for the planning and
control of procurement of the various classes of
materiel, including design, placement of orders, ac-
ceptance, and testing. Show the role played by
any other government agencies (Ministry of Sup-
ply, etc.) and indicate to what extent equipment is
produced domestically by private industry or gov-
ernment arsenals and to what extent it is imported.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
3. PEACETIME STORAGE AND ISSUE
a. SYSTEM - Explain the system of storage
and issue for various classes of materiel in the zone
of the interior.
b. INSTALLATIONS - List all known depots and
other storage installations for materiel, giving per-
tinent facts regarding each. Insert a map if war-
ranted.
3. QUARTERMASTER
a. UNIFORMS - Describe briefly the principal
types of uniforms as to general appearance, color,
material, manner of wearing, headdress, footgear,
etc. Include illustrations.
b. INSIGNIA - Describe briefly the principal in-
signia of rank, branch of service, and specialty.
Illustrate.
4. WAR SUPPLY AND MOVEMENT
Explain the machinery for requisition and sup-
ply of various classes of materiel in time of war,
using charts if necessary. Characterize the ef-
ficiency of the supply system. Give any available
data on unit movement requirements and unit re-
supply requirements under varying conditions.
5. MAINTENANCE
Describe the system for maintenance and repair
of equipment in the field in peace and in war.
Characterize the efficiency.
6. EVACUATION
Explain briefly the system for evacuation of
equipment and of personnel, including the han-
dling of captured materiel and of prisoners of war.
K. Materiel
1. ORDNANCE
For each category of ordnance equipment, ar-
ranged under subheadings appropriate to the
country, include both a discussion and a table of
characteristics. The discussion should in each
case describe the general situation of the Army
with regard to the quality and quantity of the
category of materiel in question; review the indica-
tions of the presence, recent acquisition, or con-
templated development or purchase of various spe-
cific items; evaluate each of the more important
items believed to be on hand; and indicate the
probable future trend. The table of characteris-
tics should be so designed as to provide, in compact
form, the most pertinent comparative data for
judging the effectiveness of each item listed. (The
table of characteristics may be omitted and any
pertinent data incorporated in the text if the sub-
ject or the amount of material available does not
lend itself to tabular presentation.)
2. SIGNAL
a. GENERAL - Characterize the general situa-
tion of the Army with regard to quality and quan-
tity of signal equipment.
b. ET CETERA - For each category of signal
equipment, arranged under subheadings appropri-
ate to the country, give a discussion and, if appro-
priate, a table of characteristics as indicated under
Ordnance above.
C. DECORATIONS - List the principal decora-
tions, indicating the method of awarding them and
the manner of wearing. Include illustrations if
appropriate.
d. INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT - Describe briefly
the principal types of individual equipment other
than uniforms and insignia.
e. ORGANIZATIONAL E Q U I P M E N T - Describe
briefly other types of quartermaster equipment,
arranged under appropriate subheadings.
4. ENGINEER
a. GENERAL - Characterize the general situ-
ation of the Army with regard to quality and quan-
tity of engineer materiel.
b. ET CETERA - For each major category of
engineer equipment, arranged under subheadings
appropriate to the country, give a discussion and,
if appropriate, a table of characteristics as indi-
cated under Ordnance above.
5. CHEMICAL
a. GENERAL - Characterize the general situa-
tion of the Army with regard to quality and quan-
tity of chemical materiel.
b. ET CETERA - For each major category of
chemical materiel, arranged under subheadings
appropriate to the country, give a discussion and,
if appropriate, a table of characteristics as indi-
cated under Ordnance above.
6. MEDICAL
Characterize the general situation of the Army
with regard to quality and quantity of medical
equipment, facilities, and supplies. Using appro-
priate subheadings, describe the principal spe-
cific categories or items. Emphasize aspects hav-
ing a bearing on the combat effectiveness of the
Army under varying conditions.
L. Personalities
1. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES
Give brief sketches of the outstanding personali-
ties in the Army and other ground force organiza-
tions, each one to include full name, age, rank,
present position, past career, and special aptitudes,
attitudes, or traits of character.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
2. LIST OF PERSONALITIES
List all important military personalities (includ-
ing those covered under 1 above), in alphabetical
order, for each of the higher ranks, giving for each
individual the full name (with surname in capital
letters), age, rank, and present position.
M. Quasi-military and other ground forces
Describe, under suitable subheadings, all ground-
force organizations other than the Army which
have a military or quasi-military mission connected
with national, local, internal, frontier, or colonial
security. For each such organization indicate its
full name, character, mission, top control, High
Command, relationship with the Army in peace
and war, administrative or other subdivisions,
source and terms of service of personnel, and gen-
eral disposition. Also include a brief discussion
or characterization of its armament, mobility,
training, tactics, and logistics.
N. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 82. Naval Forces
A. General
Briefly present an appraisal of the naval forces
and their combat potential, emphasizing the sali-
ent points of strength and weakness as to organiza-
tion, personnel, materiel, and policy which will
be more fully detailed in subsequent subsections.
Include features of past development and histori-
cal background only as they relate to, or indicate
trends in, policy. Comment briefly on ship and
personnel strength for significant dates, as appro-
priate. Mention foreign influence including that
of foreign navies on organization, strategy, and
other matters as appropriate. Discuss and corre-
late the naval problems of the country with its
strategic position, economic status, political con-
ditions, etc.
B. Organization
1. NAVAL HIGH COMMAND
a. STRUCTURE - Indicate the position and re-
lationship of the Navy with the National Defense
Establishment, making appropriate reference to
Section 80, A. State briefly the over-all command
and administration of the Navy, including the main
subdivisions of the Navy Department, or Admiralty,
and the chain of command to Naval shore estab-
lishments and forces afloat. Insert one or more
organization chart (s) depicting the proper position
of the naval bureaus, agencies, and other authori-
ties. Exact nomenclature is desired on diagrams
with proper explanation in terms of U.S. equiva-
lents (when possible) in the text.
b. FUNCTIONS - Describe as necessary and in
detail the more important departmental and staff
components of the naval establishment.
2. NAVAL DISTRICTS, ZONES, OR ACTIVITIES
Locate the limits, and describe the command and
administration of Naval areas, or activities. Em-
phasize points of relationship with command, ad-
ministrative, technical, and financial authorities in
the Navy Department, and, if applicable with other
service or civilian authorities.
3. NAVAL COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
Describe the naval communications organiza-
tion and show naval communications facilities on
map or chart. Discuss briefly the dependence on,
or use by the Navy of, communications facilities
not controlled by the Navy.
4. FORCES AFLOAT
Describe the tactical and administrative organi-
zation of the forces afloat to include shipboard or-
ganization. Discuss relationship with naval head-
quarters, other commands, and shore support ac-
tivities.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
5. OTHER NAVAL ORGANIZATIONS
Describe other naval or quasi-naval organiza-
tions not covered elsewhere such as Coast Artillery,
Coast Watchers, Coast Guard, Naval Infantry, Ma-
rine Corps, Naval Defense Corps, and amphibious
organizations. Show the relationship with Naval
Authorities or Activities. If such organizations
are not under naval jurisdiction, or if they are more
properly included in other NIS Sections, make ap-
propriate reference. Subheadings (5, a, b, c, etc.)
may be added according to requirements.
C. Strength and disposition
1. SHIPS
Describe briefly the current dispositions of ships
citing reasons therefor; indicate the proportion
of active ships to those laid up, or in reserve. Aug-
ment the general remarks by a tabular summary
of names, types, and status of combatant and aux-
iliary naval vessels.
2. PERSONNEL
Describe the general disposition of naval per-
sonnel showing the proportion ashore and afloat.
When possible augment by tabular summary with
a breakdown of strength by rank and rate.
D. Policy and doctrine
1. NAVAL STRATEGIC CONCEPTS
Discuss the basic political, economic, and mili-
tary factors which influence naval thinking and
strategic concepts. Examine and present the prob-
lems confronting the naval staff and administrative
authorities in the execution of naval plans and
policy. Indicate the capabilities of the Navy to
accomplish the mission and objectives with avail-
able forces, and bring out any other pertinent fac-
tors which relate to the subject.
2. DOCTRINE
Summarize the established naval doctrine of the
country with reference as necessary to historical
background, influence of foreign elements, past war
experience, etc.
3. NAVAL BUDGET AND APPROPRIATIONS
Comment on the adequacy of the Navy appro-
priations to maintain, operate, train, and develop
the Navy.
4. CONSTRUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT
PROGRAMS
Discuss the naval building program, and mod-
ernization of naval ships with pertinent remarks
concerning the estimated dates of completion of
such programs. Cite any economic, fiscal, or po-
litical factors which affect the program especially
those which might cause abandonment or suspen-
sion of construction. Describe generally develop-
ments of naval facilities, and equipment. Research
and other activities should be included only to the
extent that they do not encroach on CHAPTER VII.
5. NAVAL RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER
COUNTRIES
Discuss naval alliances, agreements, and other
factors affecting international naval relationships,
particularly emphasizing the influence of such re-
lationships on policy and planning. Discuss fear
of or hostility to other national navies with the ef-
fect on naval planning.
6. NATIONAL ATTITUDE TOWARD THE NAVY
Describe the national attitude toward the Navy,
particularly by organized political parties or
groups, and indicate if appropriate, the extent of
influence that the Navy has with the current re-
gime.
E. Personnel
1. CORPS AND SERVICES
Explain the concepts and nomenclature used in
dividing naval personnel into branches, with the
responsibilities, duties, and limitations of authority
of each Branch.
2. RANK AND RATES
Explain the rank and rate structure, and show
the nearest equivalent in the U.S. Navy, with ap-
propriate comments of differences that exist. Dis-
cuss the command or administrative authority of
each rank, and describe any limits of rank of vari-
ous branches (Example: In the Dutch Navy the
highest rank of medical officers is Captain).
3. PERSONNEL PROCUREMENT
Describe in summary form the procurement of
officer, volunteer, and conscript personnel. Give
qualifications required for officer candidates. If
specialist personnel are obtained by special ar-
rangements, so note, or describe.
4. CONDITIONS OF SERVICE
a. OFFICERS - Describe the conditions of serv-
ice of officers, including promotion and retirement
systems. Generally indicate whether service con-
ditions affect morale, lower standards, etc.
b. ENLISTED - Describe the conditions of serv-
ice of enlisted personnel (volunteer or career), in-
cluding advancement in rate, and pension plans,
and indicate whether the service conditions are
conducive to good morale.
c. CONSCRIPT - Describe the
service of enlisted personnel (conscript).
5. NAVAL UNIFORMS AND INSIGNIA
Present, preferably by illustrations: the uniforms
and insignia of officers and enlisted personnel, with
further descriptions in the text if required.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
F. Reserve and mobilization system
1. SHIPS
Discuss the recommissioning of ships, inactive or
reserve for combat or other war duties with appro-
priate remarks concerning material condition and
other factors which will affect the rate of activa-
tion.
2. PERSONNEL
Discuss the naval reserve organization, and the
system and schedule of mobilization of reserve and
auxiliary personnel. Estimate the total number
of reserves by age groups, with appropriate remarks
on the effectiveness of the personnel.
3. MERCHANT MARINE AND OTHER AUXIL-
IARY FORCES
Summarize augmentation of the Navy in war by
the merchant marine, fishing industry, and other
existing marine activities with reference to other
NIS Sections as appropriate.
4. ADEQUACY OF MOBILIZATION SYSTEM
Comment on the adequacy of effectiveness of the
mobilization system.
G. Training
1. GENERAL
Discuss the quality and effectiveness of the over-
all training system of officers and men, emphasiz-
ing the strength or weakness of training procedures
in theory and practice. Indicate the influence of
foreign naval missions on training.
2. TRAINING FACILITIES
List and locate, preferably in tabular form, all
establishments devoted to training of naval per-
sonnel, together with a brief description of the
curriculum.
3. OFFICER TRAINING
a. BASIC - Describe the basic training of of-
ficers.
b. ADVANCED - Describe the advanced train-
ing of officers.
C. SPECIALIST - Describe the specialist train-
ing of officers.
4. ENLISTED TRAINING
a. BASIC - Describe the basic indoctrination
of enlisted men.
b. SPECIALIST - Describe the specialist train-
ing of enlisted men.
5. SHIPBOARD TRAINING
Discuss practical and theoretical training on
shipboard (except when a ship is moored school
ship utilized for space accommodation).
6. FLEET AND FORCE TRAINING
Give the scope and schedule of fleet and force
training, together with pertinent observations on
effectiveness.
7. RESERVE TRAINING
Discuss the adequacy, extent, and methods em-
ployed in training Reserve Personnel.
H. Logistics
1. PROCUREMENT
Describe the system of procurement and supply
of naval materiel. Show the role played by joint
defense activities and other government agencies
(Ministry of Supply, etc.). Indicate the depend-
ence on foreign sources for weapons and other
materiel, and mention the country of origin of such
imports.
2. NEW CONSTRUCTION, REPAIR AND MAIN-
TENANCE
Describe the policy in effect for the construction
of naval vessels, and for their repair and mainte-
nance noting the dependence on foreign yards, if
applicable. Also show the division of work be-
tween naval yards and private yards with remarks
concerning efficiency and capabilities. Make ref-
erence as applicable to other sections of the NIS
(Shipbuilding, etc.).
3. CENTERS OF SUPPLY
List all known depots and other storage installa-
tions for materiel, giving pertinent facts regarding
each. Insert a map if warranted.
1. Ship design and characteristics
1. DESIGN OF SHIPS
Discuss naval ship design in, relationship to stra-
tegic and tactical requirements. Make appropri-
ate comments regarding adequacy or inadequacy
of design and construction for operations or em-
ployment in certain areas (North Atlantic, Arctic,
Tropical, etc.).
2. STRATEGIC CHARACTERISTICS
Present in tabular form the strategic character-
istics of both combat and auxiliary vessels.
J. Materiel
1. GENERAL
Discuss service materiel qualitatively, emphasiz-
ing the important characteristics of ordnance, tor-
pedoes, electronics, etc., and explain abbreviations
and/or symbols that are not self-explanatory in the
tabular summaries. Show dependence on foreign
sources for procurement of materiel or components
when applicable. Include any aspects which might
affect naval operations. Refer to CHAPTER VII for
developmental programs of materiel.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
2. CHARACTERISTICS
a. GUNS AND AMMUNITION - Tabular summary
of characteristics of guns and ammunition.
b. TORPEDOES - Tabular summary of charac-
teristics of torpedoes.
c. MINES - Tabular summary of character-
istics of mines.
d. ANTISUBMARINE WEAPONS - Tabular sum-
mary of characteristics of ASW weapons.
e. ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - Tabular sum-
mary of characteristics of electronic equipment.
f. COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT - Tabular
summary of characteristics of communication
equipment.
K. Personalities
1. FLAG AND RANKING OFFICERS
List of all flag and senior officers of importance
with command at time of preparation.
2. BIOGRAPHIES
Give biographical data on selected flag officers
or senior officers of importance.
L. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 83. Air Forces
(Including a separate consideration of the Naval Air Arm where applicable)
Prepare a brief statement outlining the size, com-
position, and personnel strength of the Air Force.
(This should be an over-all appreciation of the
salient factors of strategic significance which are
included in this section. This paragraph is not
intended to be a mere summary of what is included
in the following subsections but should be a suc-
cinct analysis of the most important elements of
the topic as a whole. The producer may include
such strength and weakness factors as he may
deem appropriate for an adequate presentation.
Unnecessary repetition, however, should be avoided
as each subject will be covered in detail later in the
text.)
State the mission of the Air Force and its ability
to fulfill such mission. Cite salient points of
strength and weakness.
types of aircraft that can be assigned initially to
close tactical air support combat operations and
the number and type of aircraft that can be used
on a sustained basis.
b. GENERAL TACTICAL AIR SUPPORT* - State
briefly the general tactical air support capabilities
of the Air Force to include the maximum number
and types of aircraft that can be assigned initially
to general tactical air support combat operations,
the number and type of aircraft that can be used
on a sustained basis. Factors affecting service-
ability and supply should be indicated briefly under
both a. and b.
2. AIR DEFENSE CAPABILITIES
Summarize the defensive capabilities of the Air
Force to resist foreign air operations. This sum-
mary should include the general types of defensive
aircraft, radar, and anti-aircraft or guided missiles.
1. TACTICAL AIR SUPPORT CAPABILITIES
a. CLOSE TACTICAL AIR SUPPORT* - State briefly
the close tactical air support capabilities of the
Air Force to include the maximum number and
* Close Tactical Air Support-Air action against
close hostile surface targets which are so close to
friendly forces as to require detailed integration
of each air mission with the fire and movement of
these forces.
* General Tactical Air Support-That phase of air
tactical air operations against enemy air ac-
tivities, ground elements, installations and lines
of communication in the immediate or projected
area, which assists the supported ground force as
a whole to gain its objectives but does not re-
quire integration with the fire and movement of
the supported forces. Reference "Dictionary of
United States Military Terms for Joint Usage,
First Revision," Joint Chiefs of Staff, Washington
25, D. C., June 1950.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
3. STRATEGIC AIR CAPABILITIES*
State briefly the strategic air capabilities of the
Air Force, the maximum number and type of air-
craft that can be assigned initially to strategic
bombardment and the number that can be used on
a sustained basis.
4. AIR FACILITIES
Give an over-all statement evaluating the air
facilities of the area, and the chief factors deter-
mining their general status.
5. TRENDS
Historical facts relevant to current policies.
State the effect foreign air missions have had on
the Air Force. State whether the country has a
history of offensive or defensive military operations,
pointing out the part played by air.
State the effect of current national policies on
the composition and strength of the Air Force.
State if the Air Force is a political factor in na-
tional politics. Cross reference to SECTION 55, D,
CHAPTER V.
State combat capabilities with reference to: in-
crease or decrease with the reasons; factors cur-
rently being emphasized; the dominant influences
causing changes or stagnation in the Air Force;
the Air Force's budgetary trend; the current budget
and the effect it will have on the Air Force in the
years immediately following.
B. Organization
1. HIGH COMMAND
Explain the relationship of the Air Force to the
Armed Forces and indicate the Ministry under
which the Air Force functions. Show by diagram
and explain the chain of command, structure, and
relationship of the general (or air) staff sections,
and compare when appropriate to U.S. equivalents.
2. SUBORDINATE COMMANDS AND UNITS
Explain the organizational relationship of major
and subordinate commands and units. Show by
diagram.
* Strategic Air Warfare-Air combat and support-
ing operations designed to affect through the
systematic application of force to a selected series
of vital targets the progressive destruction and
disintegration of the enemy's war making ca-
pacities to a point where he no longer retains
the ability or the will to wage war.
Vital targets may include key manufacturing
systems, sources of raw material, critical mate-
rial, stockpiles, power systems, transportation sys-
tems, communication facilities, concentration of
uncommitted elements of enemy armed forces,
key agricultural areas, and other such target
systems.
a. TACTICAL ORGANIZATION* - Give details of
system for organization of Air Force into units
through all echelons. Show by diagram. Explain
the over-all organization into units from squadron
or equivalent up, using exact national nomencla-
ture, together with U. S. equivalent. Give details
of the organization and functions of units to in-
clude the higher echelons (commands, air divisions,
wings, etc.).
b. AIR COMBAT INTELLIGENCE ORGANIZATION -
Describe the air intelligence organization and
explain how combat air intelligence is provided the
Air Force.
C. SUPPLY AND ENGINEERING - Discuss the over-
all service organization of the Air Force, including
supply and maintenance, showing method of con-
trol through all echelons and territorial divisions.
Discuss the method of linking service and supply
organization with command, administrative, and
tactical organization. Show by diagram.
d. TRAINING ORGANIZATION OF THE AIR FORCE -
Describe its control and relationship to the over-all
air organization. Show by diagram.
e. ADMINISTRATIVE ORGANIZATION - Describe
the organization for administration (if an organi-
zation exists which is an entity apart from the tac-
tical and service units).
C. Air Order of Battle
Provide data on identification, strength, and gen-
eral disposition of the personnel units and equip-
ment of the Air Force. Include a cross reference
to USAF Directorate of Intelligence Air Intelligence
Study 172/series.
1. UNIT ORDER OF BATTLE
Include information on each tactical unit as
follows :
Type of unit and its mission.
General disposition and location of units and any
detachments.
General status training, experience, combat
readiness.
2. MEANS OF IDENTIFICATION
System used for numbering units, code numbers,
APO numbers and cover names.
Aircraft and equipment markings, insignia, and
other identification devices.
3. AIRCRAFT ACQUISITIONS
Discuss source and number of aircraft acquisi-
tions:
Recently acquired.
Planned.
* Tactical unit-An organization of troops, aircraft,
or ships which is intended to serve as a single unit
in combat. It may include service units required
for its direct support.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
D. Tactical Air
1. CLOSE TACTICAL AIR SUPPORT
a. CONCEPT OF UTILIZATION - Discuss the Air
Force's close tactical air support doctrine.
b. OPERATIONAL CAPABILITIES
(1) Organization for tactical air opera-
tions-Describe existing units, such as : tactical
air command, tactical air control centers, tactical
air control groups, squadrons, and parties. Dis-
cuss adequacy of such units to control the existing
number of aircraft assigned to close tactical air
support. Discuss sufficiency of aircraft to provide
adequate air support for the existing ground com-
bat units. Discuss the command and control re-
lationship of close tactical air support to -the Army.
(2) Ground equipment - Describe mobile
radio equipment for controllers, etc.
(3) Tactical reconnaissance aircraft - De-
scribe use of tactical reconnaissance aircraft.
2. GENERAL TACTICAL AIR SUPPORT
a. CONCEPT OF UTILIZATION - Describe the Air
Force's general tactical air support doctrine or
theories.
b. OPERATIONAL CAPABILITIES
(1) Organization- Discuss the Tactical Air
Command's (if any) responsibility for general tac-
tical air support.
(2) Photo and tactical reconnaissance air-
craft - Describe use of photo and tactical recon-
naissance aircraft.
3. MILITARY AIR TRANSPORT CAPABILITIES
Describe the air lift capabilities of military air
transport in support of tactical air units.
E. Air Defense
1. GENERAL
Describe essentials of air defense policy; extent
of reliance placed on various elements of air de-
fense system; estimate of probable effectiveness of
over-all air defense system to resist foreign air
operations.
2. ORGANIZATION
Discuss over-all system, designating responsible
agencies and their position in the national military
structure.
3. WARNING AND INTERCEPT SYSTEMS
a. GENERAL - A general statement covering
the over-all warning and intercept systems.
b. SONIC AND VISUAL EARLY WARNING SYSTEMS -
Generally discuss the systems, their organization
and capabilities.
c. ELECTRONIC EARLY WARNING SYSTEM AND
GROUND CONTROLLED INTERCEPTION - Give types,
characteristics, and ranges of equipment, and gen-
eral pattern of geographical disposition. Explain
hookup and designate agency operating system.
State military effectiveness of systems. Describe
how GCI is tied into the early warning systems and
fighter airdromes.
d. AIRBORNE ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT - Describe
any airborne electronic equipment which the coun-
try may have. Show the manner in which this
equipment is employed in conjunction with the
early warning system.
e. ELECTRONIC COUNTERMEASURES - Discuss
the electronic countermeasure techniques together
with description of the equipment used to imple-
ment these techniques.
4. AIRCRAFT DEFENSE
a. GENERAL-Discuss the deployment of air-
craft defense units and the governing concept
(hostile neighbors, probable routes of approach,
etc.).
b. AIRCRAFT - Discuss the comparative capa-
bilities of the aircraft in operational use which
could be used in an interceptor role, citing charac-
teristics and quantities. Illustrate by appropriate
chart or tables. Include the following reference in
the text: "For additional characteristics and per-
formance information see latest Directorate of In-
telligence, USAF, `Characteristics and Performance
Handbook' ".
5. ANTIAIRCRAFT ARTILLERY DEFENSE
a. GENERAL - Discuss the country's concept of
antiaircraft artillery defense (concentration in or
near large cities, along borders, airfields etc.).
Describe methods of tactical employment of AA
weapons including fire and control, layout of bat-
teries and larger units.
b. ORGANIZATION - Define the operational
and/or administrative control. Show the chain
of command. Discuss the specific relationship to
other components of the Air Defense. Include or-
ganizational charts.
c. ANTIAIRCRAFT ARTILLERY ORDER OF BATTLE -
Show the strength and general disposition of all
antiaircraft artillery forces. (If antiaircraft artil-
lery is under the administrative and operational
control of the Army, the U.S. Army Attache reports
should be checked; if it is under Air Force opera-
tional control, check the Air Attache reports.)
d. MATERIEL - Describe the characteristics
and effectiveness of guns, ammunition, fuzes, fire
control equipment, antiaircraft unguided missiles,
guided missiles, searchlights, radar, artificial fog
equipment, balloon barrage and other active or pas-
sive AA equipment.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
6. PASSIVE AIR DEFENSES
Briefly describe passive air defense measures and
indicate the responsible agencies with emphasis on
Air Force responsibilities within the Air Force.
F. Strategic Air
Discuss the concept of utilization in air war.
1. BOMBER CAPABILITIES
a. ORGANIZATION OF BOMBER FORCE
b. EFFECTIVENESS OF MATERIEL AND PERSONNEL
2. STRATEGIC RECONNAISSANCE
3. BOMBER ESCORT
Describe the concept of utilization of escort air-
craft for bomber missions.
4. COORDINATION WITH GROUND AND SEA
FORCES
Explain how offensive operations of air units are
tied in with the operations of the ground and sea
forces.
G. Personnel
1. PROCUREMENT
Discuss the methods by which personnel are pro-
cured-by conscription, enlistment, or both. Dis-
cuss the system used by the Air Force. If it is a
separate system from that of the other Armed
Forces, so indicate. If it is a joint Armed Forces
system, show how Air Force personnel are allotted.
2. PERSONNEL CHARACTERISTICS AND MO-
RALE
a. ANALYSIS -.Give a brief analysis of the
qualities, national peculiarities, aptitudes, strong
and weak points, etc., of available manpower as
related to the requirements of an Air Force.
b. STATE OF MORALE OF AIR FORCE - Discuss
state of the morale of the personnel in the Air Force.
State the average pilot age. State points of fric-
tion within the Air Force which might lead to de-
fection with the use of an appropriate psychological
approach, for example, racial and religious differ-
ences. Give names of significant Air Force per-
sonnel or organizations that have a grievance
against the Air Force and the government. De-
scribe the grievance.
c. ESTIMATE - Make an estimate of the sus-
ceptibility of the Air Force to psychological warfare
and vulnerability to subversion by: 1) the United
States, 2) U.S.S.R.
3. UNIFORMS AND INSIGNIA
a. UNIFORMS - Describe briefly the principal
types of uniforms as to general appearance, color,
material, manner of wearing, etc. Distinguish be-
tween uniforms for officers, for noncommissioned
officers, and lower ranks. Photos or sketches in
color are desired.
b. INSIGNIA - Describe briefly the usual in-
signia of rank with U.S. equivalents and branch of
service, unit or distinctive insignia, and the prin-
cipal orders of decorations, together with manner
of wearing.
H. Reserve and mobilization systems
1. RESERVE SYSTEM
Describe the administrative control of the re-
serve system.
Discuss training required and accomplished.
Categories of reserves. Compare with United
States categories of ready reserve and standby re-
serve.*
Law under which the reserve system operates.
2. MOBILIZATION SYSTEM
Administrative control of the mobilization sys-
tem. Describe mobilization system to include
plans for formation of new units and integration
of the reserve and mobilization systems.
Under partial or general mobilization, state
whether conscripts and reserve officers and airmen
are called or recalled to active duty as individuals
or as members of integral units. Compare to USAF
Air National Guard and Organized Air Reserve
Units.
Discuss law under which mobilization operates.
3. MOBILIZATION POTENTIAL
In view of the above discussion, give an estimate
of the actual mobilization potential of the Air Force
in event of war.
1. Training
1. GENERAL
Discuss generally the training program as to
whether it meets current requirements of the Air
Force, its capability for war time expansion, and
the adequacy of training equipment and facilities.
Compare the training program with the USAF pro-
gram or that of another significant country which
would provide a better comparison.
READY RESERVE--Those units or members of the re-
serve components, or both, available for prompt
entry into the active Air Force in any expansion
of the active armed forces in time of war or in time
of national emergency declared by the executive or
legislative branch of the government.
STANDBY RESERVE-Those units or members of the
reserve components, or both, available for invol-
untary employment in the expansion of the Air
Force in time of a declared state of war or national
emergency.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
2. ORGANIZATION
Describe the organization responsible for opera-
tion of schools, indicating under what staff section
it functions and what agency establishes policies.
3. PREPARATORY TRAINING AND AIR CLUBS
Show how air clubs and other quasi-military or-
ganizations fit into the training scheme. (Cross
reference to CHAPTER III, SECTION 37 for an elabora-
tion of civil and quasi-military flying clubs and
organizations.)
4. FLYING TRAINING
a. PILOTS
1) Outline the method of selection of cadets, to
include physical and mental standards. Discuss
the military preflight training.
2) Discuss primary training, to include:
Duration in months;
Location of primary training schools;
Syllabus-number, content and length of courses;
Number accepted for training annually, number of
failures annually, number qualifying annually for
further flight training;
Type aircraft used, training aids;
Number and type of instructors.
3) Describe basic training, to include:
Duration in months;
Location of basic training schools;
Syllabus (number, content, and length of course) ;
Number accepted for training annually, number of
failures annually, number qualifying annually for
further flight training;
Type aircraft used, training aids;
Number and type of instructors.
4) Describe advanced training, to include:
Duration in months;
Location of advanced training schools;
Syllabus (number, content and length of courses) ;
Number accepted for training annually, number of
failures annually, number of students graduating
annually from flying school with pilot rating.
5) State annual number of foreigners, by na-
tionality, accepted; number trained; and number
failed.
6) State annual number of nationals sent abroad
for pilot training, annual number failed, annual
number trained.
7) Discuss any new or unorthodox training
methods or devices.
b. OTHER AIR CREW MEMBERS
1) Describe methods of selection of candidates,
to include physical and mental standards.
2) Discuss preflight training.
3) For each type of training such as bombardiers,
navigators, gunners, flight engineers, radar ob-
servers etc. discuss the following:
Location of school;
Syllabus-length and content of course;
Number and type of instructors;
Number accepted for training annually, number of
failures, and number graduating;
Annual number of foreigners, by nationality, trained,
and number failed.
Weather as it affects training (a brief statement with
reference to SECTION 23, CHAPTER II);
Annual number of nationals sent abroad for train-
ing, number trained, and number failed. List by
country providing the training. List by specialty;
Any new or unorthodox training methods and de-
vices;
Number of reserve personnel given annual refresher
flying training.
5. OPERATIONAL TRAINING
This encompasses all tactical training of per-
sonnel and units, flying and non-flying after indi-
viduals have been trained in their basic specialities
and assigned to units.
a. TRAINING IN THE SQUADRON AND IN SPECIAL-
IZED SCHOOLS - Discuss under the following cate-
gories :
GUNNERY:
Air to Air-Fixed
Air to Ground
ROCKETRY:
Air to Air
Air to Ground
BOMBING:
Horizontal
Dive
Glide
Skip or masthead
NAVIGATION :
Dead reckoning
Celestial
Radio and radar
INSTRUMENT TRAINING:
Ground Controlled Approach
Radio Range
Automatic Direction Finder
Finder
NIGHT FLYING
ALTITUDE INDOCTRINATION
COMBAT TACTICS (Discuss
rately)
Fighter:
Escort
Defensive
Bomber:
each type of aircraft sepa-
Offensive and
Reconnaissance
Troop and cargo
Aircraft
Rotary wing
Glider
Air-sea rescue:
Fixed wing
Rotary wing
b. MANEUVERS AND WAR GAMES - Discuss suc-
cess of specific operations. Cite significant lessons
learned. Point out deficiencies and/or proficien-
cies that were apparent. Discuss whether staffs
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
and commanders demonstrated proper grasp of the
problem and implemented proper action. Discuss
adequacy of communications, and effectiveness of
coordination with ground and sea forces.
6. GROUND PERSONNEL TRAINING
Discuss the training of ground officers and air-
men in key specialities such as operations, weather,
personnel, engineering (line), engineering (offi-
cers), supply, communications, radar, antiaircraft
artillery, (if an Air Force responsibility) etc.
7. STAFF AND COMMAND SCHOOLS
Discuss location, type curriculum, effectiveness,
selection of students, and length of courses.
8. FOREIGN MISSIONS
Describe each mission with respect to nationality,
personnel strength, scope of instruction and doc-
trines taught, effect upon organization and think-
ing of Air Force, effect on selection of equipment,
political influence, evidence of anti-United States
indoctrination, popularity of mission personalities.
State whether the mission has been successful.
(Actual training accomplished by or under spon-
sorship of a mission should be discussed in the
appropriate numbered paragraphs above.)
J. Logistics
1. GENERAL
Prepare a brief introduction indicating the self-
sufficiency of the country with respect to aircraft,
aircraft munitions, armament, and aviation fuel.
If the nation is not self-sufficient, mention the
usual sources of supply. Throughout the subsec-
tion, cross reference to CHAPTER VI where appropri-
ate.
2. SOURCES OF SUPPLY
a. AIRCRAFT, AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND PARTS
(1) Domestic sources
(2) Foreign sources
b. RADAR AND ELECTRONICS EQUIPMENT
(1) Domestic sources
(2) Foreign sources
C. ORDNANCE EQUIPMENT (GUNS, AMMUNITION,
BOMBS)
(1) Domestic sources
(2) Foreign sources
d. PETROLEUM PRODUCTS - Aviation gasoline,
lubricating oils, motor gasoline, 'jet fuels.
(1) Domestic sources
(2) Foreign sources
3. SUPPLY
a. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
(1) Transportation
(2) Stock levels, planned and actual
(3) Requisitioning
(4) Records
b. ASSESSMENT OF SUPPLY SYSTEM - Discuss
with respect to Air Force needs.
4. MAINTENANCE
a. ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS - Provide
maintenance flow chart. Describe organizational
repair responsibility.
b. ASSESSMENT OF MAINTENANCE SYSTEM-
Discuss with respect to Air Force needs.
K. Air facilities
1. GENERAL
Summarize the air facilities situation in the NIS
Area, including the present status in both qualita-
tive and quantitative terms, a general history of
development to date, and significant factors in-
volved (such as temporary foreign military develop-
ment of facilities during World War II, peculiar
transport aspects of the area, adequacy or inade-
quacy of other forms of transport, any dominance
by military as contrasted with civil air consider-
ations, and special international air route signifi-
cance, etc.).
Indicate capability and adaptability for heavy
bomber, medium bomber, and jet fighter opera-
tions. Summarize the current and projected con-
struction programs; include a general statement
of suitability of the area for airfield construction.
Add remarks regarding any other significant fac-
tors which affect the airfield potential, such as
topographical, geographical, and climatic condi-
tions. Note that coverage of additional facilities
is available in publications issued by Directorate
of Intelligence, Headquarters, United States Air
Force.
2. TYPES
Cite the total number of air facilities, with a
breakdown by type. Use tabulations for detailed
information. Use chart where applicable.
3. CHARACTERISTICS
Discuss factors generally characterizing air fa-
cilities which exist in the area, including runways,
parking, radio aids, lighting, repair andhangar fa-
cilities. Refer to photos or diagrams for illustra-
tion. Refer to location map. Use chart where ap-
plicable.
4. UTILIZATION
Give a brief summary to indicate the use of the
system as a whole together with a more detailed
discussion of the facilities used by military agen-
cies and by civil agencies. Use chart where ap-
plicable.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 ARMED FORCES
Discuss the extensibility potential of existing air
facilities with emphasis upon specific air facilities
which are extensible to medium bomber and jet
fighter standards. Use chart where applicable.
6. CURRENT CAPABILITY
Analyze the air facilities system to indicate its
suitability for combat air operations and capability
for airlift activity in support of combat operations.
Include photos or schematic diagrams of the fa-
cilities available which provide this capability to-
gether with appropriate comment as to their indi-
vidual capabilities.
Describe the distribution pattern for the area
pointing out existing concentrations of air facili-
ties and, where applicable, delineate areas where
air facilities are inadequate or do not exist. Refer
to location maps. Indicate and briefly discuss any
major complexes of air facilities around principal
urban areas (such as in New York or Washington
areas).
8. CURRENT AND PROJECTED CONSTRUC-
TION
Describe current and projected construction pro-
grams in detail, including construction at indi-
vidual major air facilities to provide information
for estimates of future air capabilities. Use chart
where applicable.
9. TOPOGRAPHY, CLIMATOLOGY, AND ME-
TEOROLOGICAL SERVICES
Discuss topography and climatology, presented
from the viewpoint of their effect upon air opera-
tions and the development of air facilities in the
country. Note that military geography and cli-
mate are covered in CHAPTER II. Discuss the na-
tion's meteorological services, and the use made of
them by the Air Force.
10. AIRFIELD CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
Discuss the availability of materials for airfield
construction to indicate requirements for impor-
tation. Note that mining and production of con-
struction materials is a subject of CHAPTER VI.
Discuss other conditions or situations peculiar
to the area which contribute to the present status
of the facilities, which affect current suitability for
operations, or which might reflect the potential
value of the system.
L. Materiel in advanced stages of develop-
ment
This subsection is to include all weapons and
equipment of the Air Force which have been de-
veloped beyond the research and experimental
stages, but not yet supplied, in quantity, to opera-
tional units.
1. ELECTRONICS
Discuss the capabilities of electronics equipment
in the advanced stages of development in subject
area and briefly compare them with present opera-
tional equipment. (Cross reference to SECTION 71,
CHAPTER VII, Scientific, will be made when appli-
cable.)
2. GUIDED MISSILES
Discuss the capabilities of guided missiles in the
advanced stages of development in subject area,
and briefly compare them with present operational
missiles. (Cross reference to SECTION 72, CHAPTER
VII, Scientific, when applicable.)
3. AIRCRAFT, ENGINES, AND ARMAMENT
Discuss the capabilities of aircraft, engines, and
aircraft armament in the advanced stages of de-
velopment in subject area and briefly compare
them with those of present operational equipment.
(Cross reference to SECTION 72, CHAPTER VII, Scien-
tific, when applicable.)
4. ANTIAIRCRAFT
Discuss the capabilities of antiaircraft and as-
sociated materiel in the advanced stages of develop-
ment in subject area and compare them with those
of present operational equipment. (Cross refer-
ence to SECTION 72, CHAPTER VII, Scientific, when
applicable.)
M. Participation in
organizations
international defense
Discuss the participation in such international
organizations as NATO to include numbers of units,
personnel and logistical support promised or com-
mitted. (Cross reference to Subsection C, 1 and
C, 2.)
N. Personalities
1. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES
Give brief sketches of the outstanding personali-
ties in the Air Force and Air Force officers in other
high governmental organizations.
2. LIST OF PERSONALITIES
List all important military personalities (includ-
ing those covered under 1 above), in alphabetical
order, for each of the higher ranks, giving the full
name (with surname in capital letters), age, rank,
and present position.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER VIII
0. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets.
PART II - NAVAL AIR ARM
Part II, SECTION 83, is suggested for use by the
analysts when writing Air Force's section of those
countries which have naval air arms, and to be
included only where appropriate.
A. General
Prepare a brief statement outlining the size,
composition, and personnel strength of the Naval
air arm. (This should be an over-all appreciation
of the salient factors of strategic significance which
are included in this section. This paragraph is not
intended to be a mere summary of what is included
in the following subsections but should be a suc-
cinct analysis of the most important elements of
the topic as a whole. The producer may include
such strength and weakness factors as he may deem
appropriate for an adequate presentation. Un-
necessary repetition, however, should be avoided
as each subject will be covered in detail later in
the text.)
State the mission of the Naval air arm and its
ability to fulfill such mission. Cite salient points
of strength and weakness.
1. TACTICAL CAPABILITIES
a. ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE - State briefly the
antisubmarine warfare capabilities of the Naval air
arm to include the maximum number and types of
aircraft that can be assigned initially to antisub-
marine warfare operations and the number and
type of aircraft that can be used on a sustained
basis.
b. NAVAL AIR STRIKES - As above.
C. AIR DEFENSE OPERATIONS --- As in (a) above.
In addition, include the general types of defensive
aircraft, radar, and antiaircraft guided missiles
used.
d. PATROL AND BOMBARDMENT OPERATIONS - As
in (a) above. In addition, include the maximum
number and type of aircraft, radar, and electronic
countermeasures.
2. TRENDS
a. HISTORICAL FACTS RELEVANT TO CURRENT POLI-
CIES - Describe the effect foreign air missions have
had on the Naval air arm. State whether the
country has a history of offensive or defensive mili-
tary operations, and describe the part played by
the Naval air arm. (Cross reference to SECTION
83, Part I, A. and SECTION 82, Naval Forces.)
b. POLITICAL FACTORS - Discuss the effect of
current national policies on the composition and
strength of the Naval air arm. State whether the
Naval air arm is a political factor in national poli-
tics. (Cross reference to SECTION 55, D, CHAPTER
V.)
C. COMBAT CAPABILITIES - Discuss combat ca-
pabilities of Naval air arm, considering the follow-
ing: increase or decrease in capabilities with the
reasons; factors currently being emphasized; the
dominant influences causing changes or stagna-
tion in the Naval air arm; the Naval air arm's
budgetary trend; the current budget and what
effect will it have on the Naval air arm in the
years immediately following. (Cross reference
budget to SECTION 82, D, Policy and doctrine.)
3. MARINE AVIATION
State whether Naval air includes a Marine avia-
tion component. If so, indicate relationship to the
Navy and its place in the organization of defense
forces.
B. Organization
1. HIGH COMMAND
Explain the relationship of the Naval air arm to
the Navy, and to the armed forces, and indicate the
ministry under which Naval air arm functions.
Show by diagram and explain the chain of com-
mand, structure, and relationship of the air staff
sections, and compare when appropriate to U.S.
equivalents. (Cross reference to SECTION 82, D.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 7.951 ARMED FORCES
2. SUBORDINATE COMMANDS AND UNITS
Explain the organizational relationship of major
and subordinate commands and units. Show by
diagram.
a. FORCES AFLOAT-Describe tactical and ad-
ministrative organization of forces afloat to in-
clude carrier organization. Discuss relationship
with naval headquarters, other commands, and
shore support activities.
b. FORCES ASHORE-Show how the Naval air
arm fits into the Naval district, zones, or activities.
(Cross reference to SECTION 82, B.)
c. TRAINING ORGANIZATION OF THE NAVAL AIR
ARM - Describe its control and relationship to the
over-all air organization. Show by diagram.
3. OTHER NAVAL ORGANIZATIONS
Describe Marine aviation type and show its rela-
tionship to Naval aviation and to the Navy.
(Cross reference to SECTION 82, B.)
C. Air order of battle
List Air order of battle as in C Of SECTION 83,
Part I. In addition, list carrier strengths and cross
reference to Subsection C of SECTION 82, Strength
and disposition.
D. Tactical operations
1. ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE (ASW)
Estimate over-all capabilities of naval air
ASW.
Describe organization of ASW component with
naval air.
Discuss effectiveness of material as to concept of utili-
zation and the competence of ASW personnel.
Describe Naval policy and doctrine governing utili-
zation of ASW aircraft. (Cross reference to Sub-
section D, SECTION 82.)
2. USE OF STRIKE AND FIGHTER AIRCRAFT
IN A SUPPORT ROLE
Estimate over-all capabilities of Naval air in a
support role.
Describe the organization of strike and fighter
aircraft components within the Naval air arm, out-
lining the effectiveness with respect to the ma-
terial available, the concept of utilization, and the
competence of personnel.
Describe patrol and bombardment aircraft oper-
ations. Explain concept of utilization of patrol
and bombardment aircraft within the Naval air
arm. Describe the operational capabilities of the
presently assigned patrol and bombardment air-
craft. Describe utilization of photo and/or tactical
reconnaissance aircraft. Describe Naval transport
units which support any of the tactical operations.
E. Personnel
1. PROCUREMENT
(Cross reference to Subsection E of SECTION 82.)
2. PERSONNEL CHARACTERISTICS AND MO-
RALE
Discuss state of morale of the personnel in the
Naval air arm. State average pilot age. Describe
points of friction within the Naval air arm which
might lead to defection with the use of the ap-
propriate psychological approach. Make an esti-
mate of the susceptibility of the Naval air arm per-
sonnel to psychological warfare and vulnerability
to subversion by: 1) U.S.; 2) U.S.S.R.
3. UNIFORMS
Cross reference to Subsection E, SECTION 82, and
supplement by delineating differences between the
Naval officers and enlisted men's uniforms and
rank, and those of the members of the Naval air
arm.
F. Reserve and mobilization systems
(Cross reference to Subsection F of SECTION 82.)
G. Training
Follow outline of Subsection I Of SECTION 83,
Part I, and cross reference where applicable to Sub-
section G, Training, Of SECTION 82. In addition,
describe carrier training to include landing tech-
niques, plane handline aboard ship, and maneuvers.
H. Logistics
Follow outline under SECTION 83, Part I, J. Logis-
tics, and where applicable cross reference to SEC-
TION 82, H (Logistics) CHAPTER VIII.
I. Materiel in advanced stages of develop-
ment
If the development of weapons and equipment
of the Naval air arm in the country in question is
done separately from the development of the same
for the Air Force of that country, follow Subsection
L Of SECTION 83, Part I. Cross reference to Sub-
section J, Materiel, of SECTION 82.
J. Personalities
Follow outline of Subsection N, Personalities, of
SECTION 83, Part I. Cross reference to Subsection
K (Personalities) of SECTION 82.
K. Comments on principal sources
Follow outline of Subsection 0 (Comments on
principal sources) Of SECTION 83, Part I. When
following this outline, note the differences be-
tween the information available on Naval air arm
and the information available on Air Forces.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER IX
MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
Section 90 Introduction
Section 91 Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
Section 92 Appraisal of Selected Maps, Charts,
and Plans
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Chapter IX- Map and Chart Appraisal
OUTLINE
A.
General map, chart, and aerial photo
D.
Sociological, political, and economic
maps
1. General
B.
coverage
1. Development and organization of
mapping activities
2. Geodetic surveys
3. Hydrographic surveys
4. Oceanographic surveys
5. Aerial photography
Major mapping, charting, and aerial
E.
2. Sociological maps
3. Political maps
4. Economic maps
Special armed forces maps
1. General
2. Army
3. Navy
4. Air Force
C.
SECTION 91.
photography deficiencies
1. Mapping data
2. Published maps and charts
Programs under way or projected
1. Official mapping
2. Foreign mapping
SELECTED MAPS, CHARTS, AND PLANS
F.
SECTION 92.
A.
B.
Molded relief models
APPRAISAL OF SELECTED MAPS, CHARTS,
AND PLANS
General
Physical maps, navigation charts, and
plans of urban areas
1. Topographic maps
2. Terrain classification maps
3. Air and air facility charts
B.
Physical maps
navigation charts
and
4. General, sailing, coasting, and ap-
proach charts
C.
,
,
plans of urban areas
1. General
2. Topographic maps and embossed
maps
3. Terrain classification maps
4. Air and air facility maps and charts
5. General, sailing, coasting, and ap-
proach charts
6. Nearshore oceanographic charts
and maps
7. Climatic maps
8. Plans and maps of urban areas
Maps of transportation and commu-
C.
5. Nearshore oceanographic charts
and maps
6. Climatic maps
7. Plans and maps of urban areas
Maps of transportation and commu-
nications
1. Railroad maps
2. Road maps
3. Waterways charts and maps
4. Harbor and port charts and maps
5. Air transport maps
6. Telecommunications and postal
maps
7. Pipeline maps
nications
1. General
2. Railroad maps
3. Road maps
4. Waterways charts and maps
5. Maps and charts of ports and har-
bors
6. Air transport maps
7. Telecommunications and postal
maps
8. Pipeline maps
D.
E.
F.
Sociological, political, and economic
maps
1. Sociological maps
2. Political maps
3. Economic maps
Special armed forces maps
1. Army
2. Navy
3. Air Force
Molded relief models
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IX
OUTLINE GUIDE
The outline presented for NIS CHAPTER IX is de-
signed to provide a basis for the appraisal of the
mapping program and all types of maps (including
embossed maps), charts, and molded relief
models that are customarily available for any spe-
cific country. Many of the countries included in the
NIS schedule, however, have no adequate mapping
programs or are not satisfactorily covered by maps
of all types. For this reason, it is desirable that
the outline be kept flexible enough to be adapted
to any unusual situation that authors of CHAPTER
IX may encounter. Every heading in the outline,
however, must be considered by the authors and
be retained without revision unless changes are
first approved by the Chapter Coordinator. The
two examples given below illustrate the type of
changes in the outline that are legitimate : 1) In
a few areas (such as Iceland), SECTION 91, D, 3, a,
International Boundary Maps, is not applicable.
In such a case, the situation should be noted in
Section 91, D, 1, General; the international bound-
ary heading would then be omitted and 91, D, 3, b
would automatically become 91, D, 3, a. 2) For
many areas, no embossed maps are available. If
this is the case, 91, B, 2 becomes topographic maps,
and subheadings a and b are omitted. 3) The
heading, Obsolete Maps, which does not occur in
the outline, may be inserted under any topic if the
contributing agency considers it necessary to warn
users against specific widely used or apparently au-
thoritative maps.
Maps prepared for other NIS Chapters are to be
included in the recommendations and appraisals
in CHAPTER IX, SECTIONS 91 and 92, even though the
chapters for which the maps were prepared have
not yet been published. Historical maps are not
to be recommended or evaluated in CHAPTER IX un-
less they can be justified as contributing in some
important manner to an understanding of the cur-
rent situation in the country under consideration.
For example, a map of 1850 international bound-
aries should be discussed only if current territorial
claims are based on 1850 boundaries.
Approved BGN spellings will be used for all place
names in CHAPTER IX, when published, unless the
names appear in the titles of maps or books cited.
The preface of CHAPTER IX is a short "Guide to
Users", which will be prepared by the Chapter Co-
ordinator. In the Guide, the Coordinator will
note :
The structure of CHAPTER IX-its division into:
a) a general analysis of the mapping situation of
a given country, b) recommendations of the best
maps available for specific uses, and c) appraisals
of all maps recommended.
That only the best maps for various purposes have
been included.
That the omission of a topic usually covered by
maps indicates that maps on this topic are either
unsatisfactory or not available.
That maps prepared for other Chapters of NIS
will not be considered in SECTION 91 unless they are
also appraised in SECTION 92.
The research cut-off date for each of the contribu-
tions to CHAPTER IX.
Other information needed for an understanding
Of CHAPTER IX for the specific country under con-
sideration but not generally applicable to other
countries.
Section 90. Introduction
A. General map, chart, and aerial photo cov-
erage
The five subsections listed below are discussed
under this heading. In the first, give briefly the
history and current status of official mapping,
within the country and note the contributions of
foreign countries to the mapping program. In
Subsections 2 through 5, the basic geodetic,
hydrographic, oceanographic, and aerial photo
data for mapping are to be described. Since
these topics are not covered elsewhere in CHAPTER
IX, it may be necessary to consider some of them
in greater detail than other topics in SECTION 90.
SECTION 90, A, 2, Geodetic Surveys, in particular,
is basic for estimating the reliability of a large
number of the maps mentioned in CHAPTER IX.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CONFIDENTIAL MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
SECTION 90, A should be accompanied by illustra-
tive maps showing 1) the extent and type of aerial
photo coverage; 2) the geodetic evaluation of select-
ed topographic map coverage on the basis of hori-
zontal and vertical control; and 3) the extent, den-
sity, and type of available and existing control.
1. DEVELOPMENT AND ORGANIZATION OF
MAPPING ACTIVITIES
a. OFFICIAL MAPPING
b. FOREIGN MAPPING
2. GEODETIC SURVEYS
3. HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEYS
4. OCEANOGRAPHIC SURVEYS
5. AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
B. Major mapping, charting,
photo deficiencies
Under heading B, discuss deficiencies in the
mapping situation on the basis of mapping data
and of published maps.
1. MAPPING DATA
For mapping data, note especially inadequacies
in :
b. HYDROGRAPHIC AND OCEANOGRAPHIC SURVEYS
c. AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
2. PUBLISHED MAPS AND CHARTS
For published maps and charts, note inadequa-
cies in 1) topographic maps at various scales, 2)
general, sailing, coastal, and approach charts and
air charts at various scales, 3) maps and plans of
port and air facilities, 4) maps and plans of towns,
and 5) special subject maps.
C. Programs under way or projected
State briefly under the headings listed below the
salient features of mapping and related programs
(including embossed maps and models) being
undertaken or planned by local official agencies,
by these agencies in cooperation with other gov-
ernments, and by mapping agencies of other
governments. Point out which of the deficiencies
noted in SECTION 91, B will be eliminated or re-
duced.
Include an index map showing the projected
coverage of specific mapping programs if signifi-
cant.
a. GEODETIC AND TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEYS 2. FOREIGN MAPPING
Section 91. Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
SECTION 91 should include recommendations of
maps, charts, plans, and models that best illustrate
the individual subjects mentioned in the outline.
All recommendations should be justified on the
basis of accuracy, adequacy of detail and presenta-
tion, utility, and availability, as indicated in SEC-
TION 92. When appropriate, include brief state-
ments of major limitations or deficiencies of all
items recommended. Each contributing agency
shall number consecutively (beginning with num-
A. General
The Coordinator will prepare a brief introduc-
tion to the Section as a whole from contributions
supplied by all contributors to SECTION 91.
B. Physical maps, navigation charts, and
plans of urban areas
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement comparing physical
maps, navigation charts, and plans of urban areas
at various scales as to adequacy of content and
completeness of areal coverage.
ber 1) all items referred to in its contribution to
CHAPTER IX, SECTION 92. Individual appraisals of
each map or map series recommended are to be
prepared by the responsible agency for inclusion
in SECTION 92. See note in SECTION 92 for instruc-
tions. In the recommendations, maps are to be
identified briefly by content, title, publishing au-
thority, or scale (as well as by item number) when
first mentioned in a contribution. Thereafter,
they may be identified by the item number alone.
2. TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS AND EMBOSSED
MAPS
Material included under this Subsection will
vary. If embossed maps are available for a spe-
cific area the heading as given above is to be used
and is to be subdivided into a. Topographic Maps
(which may be discussed as a unit or may be di-
vided into subheadings on the basis of scale) and
b. Embossed Maps. If no embossed maps are avail-
able, heading B, 2 becomes Topographic Maps.
Recommend the most useful large- and medium-
scale maps available and the best English language
map series obtainable in quantity in each scale
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IX
range. An index or coverage map for topographic
map series at selected scales, in accordance with
established criteria, shall be prepared to accom-
pany this subsection; if practical, sheet lines should
be shown. Recommend also the best available
small-scale general terrain maps.
Recommend the best available embossed maps
for the region.
3. TERRAIN CLASSIFICATION MAPS
Recommend the best maps under the following
topics :
a. GEOLOGIC MAPS
b. SOIL CLASSIFICATION MAPS
C. VEGETATION MAPS
d. TRAFFICABILITY MAPS
e. WATER SUPPLY MAPS
4. AIR AND AIR FACILITIES MAPS AND
CHARTS
Recommend : 1) the best charts that can be
used for air navigation; 2) the best charts show-
ing details of airports and seaplane bases and
adjacent facilities, terrain features of landmark
value, air distances, and airport locations; and 3)
the most useful plotting maps. Include an index
map of available aeronautical charts. (Air trans-
port maps are treated under SECTION 91, C, 6.)
5. GENERAL, SAILING, COASTING, AND AP-
PROACH CHARTS
Recommended under this heading: 1) General
hydrographic, coastal, and approach charts, and
2) Special interpretive coastal charts.
Under the first group recommend the best hydro-
graphic charts covering the general area, and the
best charts for sailing, coasting, and approach-
ing the coast. A chart index or coverage map shall
be included in this Subsection.
For the second group, recommend specialized
coastal maps such as MAR-GEO or NORMANDY BEACH
MAPS. An index or coverage map by area and sub-
ject should be included in this Subsection.
6. NEARSHORE OCEANOGRAPHIC CHARTS
AND MAPS
Recommend the best available maps and charts
showing depth and relief of ocean floor, currents,
sea and swell, temperature, distribution and move-
ment of sea ice, salinity, density, bottom sediment,
transparency and color, acoustical conditions,
diving and submerged operating conditions for
submarines, and tidal characteristics and ranges.
Appropriate index maps showing areal and subject
coverage shall be included as required. If oceano-
graphic charts are inadequate, the subjects to be
covered by charts being prepared for the NIS should
be noted.
7. CLIMATIC MAPS
Recommend the best available maps showing
climatic classification, distribution of climatic ele-
ments, extremes of climatic elements and their
frequency, dates of freezing and thawing, killing
frosts, paths of storms, growing season, and human
heat stress. Include flying weather; instrument,
closed, and contact conditions; and other combi-
nations of elements such as those necessary for
low level visual bombing, incendiary bombing, and
chemical warfare. Climatic maps being prepared
for NIS, CHAPTER II, should be mentioned if other
climatic maps are not satisfactory.
8. PLANS AND MAPS OF URBAN AREAS
Make a general statement on the availability of
plans for urban areas, aerial photo mosaics, tour-
ist guides, zoning maps, andlocal transport maps.
Recommend the best plans available for the urban
areas designated as "principal urban areas" in NIS
CHAPTER II for the area and for other urban areas
to be selected and mutually agreed upon by the
Chapter Coordinator and the contributor. The
final list of plans of urban areas to be discussed in
the chapter shall be selected during the early stages
of chapter preparation. Include an index map
showing the availability of plans for principal
urban areas. Indicate the availability of the other
selected plans for urban areas in map or list form.
AMS will also supply CIA with a machine record
tabulation of all available urban area plans. De-
pending on the character of the area, these plans
may be listed, located on the index map, or be
treated in some other appropriate manner by the
Coordinator.
C. Maps of transportation and communica-
tion
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement of the status of map-
ping and compare the adequacy of map coverage
for the various aspects of transportation and com-
munication. The topics covered in this Subsection
are railroads, roads, waterways, ports and harbors,
air transport, telecommunications and postal serv-
ices, and pipelines.
2. RAILROAD MAPS
Recommend the topographic map series that
show most completely and accurately the existing
railroad lines, and the best maps showing gage,
trackage, motive power, capacity, traffic (volume
and length of haul), railroad administrative dis-
tricts and centers, railroad yards, repair shops,
bridges and tunnels, and other installations.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
3. ROAD MAPS
Recommend the topographic map series that
show most completely and accurately the existing
highways, and the best special road maps showing
jurisdictional classification, type of surface, width,
trafficability, amount of traffic, and associated
uses.
4. WATERWAYS CHARTS AND MAPS
Recommend the best maps delineating rivers, ca-
nals, lakes, and inland harbors. Place special em-
phasis on navigability, dockage, clearance, and
sedimentation. Also recommend maps dealing
with channel depths, currents, heads of navigation,
navigation seasons, traffic, and river ports (their
dockage, loading and unloading facilities, dry
docks, and storage).
5. MAPS AND CHARTS OF PORTS AND HAR-
BORS
Recommend the best charts and plans showing
details of harbors and ports, and charts and maps
showing locations of ports in terms of importance,
physical situations, types, facilities, and capacities.
6. AIR TRANSPORT MAPS
Recommend the best maps of commercial air
routes and air traffic. (Air and air facilities charts
and maps are treated in SECTION 91, B, 4.)
7. TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND POSTAL
MAPS
Recommend the most useful detailed and sche-
matic maps showing telegraph and telephone grids
and stations; radio broadcasting stations, net-
works, relay lines and distribution of receiving sets;
and postal routes and the location of post offices.
Include topographic maps showing telecommuni-
cations, postal data, and power lines (to be sup-
plied to Signal Corps by AMS).
c. HEALTH MAPS - Include incidence of dis-
ease, birth and death rates, health facilities, etc.
3. POLITICAL MAPS
Recommend the best maps and surveys under the
following topics:
a. INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARY MAPS
b. INTERNAL BOUNDARIES - Include major and
minor civil division boundaries
C. POLITICAL PROBLEM MAPS - Include disputed
areas, relative strength of political parties, and re-
sults of elections.
4. ECONOMIC MAPS
Recommend the maps that best portray the
following kinds of economic data:
a. NATURAL RESOURCES MAPS - Include eco-
nomic geology, mineral deposits, oil, water re-
sources, fish and animal life.
b. AGRICULTURAL MAPS - Include maps show-
ing agricultural regions land use, soil productivity,
and distribution of crops and livestock.
C. INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT MAPS - Include
maps giving either by symbol or detail the locations
of industries, types of industry and production,
mineral and oil exploitations, and fishing and
forest industries.
d. COMMERCE AND TRADE MAPS - Include maps
showing flow of commerce, centers of trade, exports,
and imports.
E. Special armed forces maps
1. GENERAL
Make a brief statement concerning the types of
armed forces maps available and compare the vari-
ous types as to adequacy. Include only maps of
specific and current significance for military oper-
ations.
8. PIPELINE MAPS
Recommend the most useful, detailed and sche-
matic maps of pipelines, including topographic
maps, in the area.
D. Sociological, political, and economic maps
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement of the adequacy of the
map coverage for the various topics included in this
Subsection.
2. SOCIOLOGICAL MAPS
Recommend the best coverage for:
a. MAPS OF POPULATION DISTRIBUTION
b. MAPS OF POPULATION COMPOSITION AND CHAR-
ACTERISTICS - Cover the composition of the char-
acteristics of the population according to race,
nationality, language, and religion.
2. ARMY
Recommend the best maps that are specifically
designed for the use of land forces.
3. NAVY
Recommend the best charts and maps of special
naval significance.
4. AIR FORCE
Recommend the charts and maps designed for
use in air operations.
F. Molded relief models
Recommend molded relief models of all types
that cover the region or any part of it. State spe-
cifically the purpose for which each is designed
and the users that it can serve.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
CHAPTER IX
Section 92. Appraisal of Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARATION OF CITA-
TIONS AND APPRAISALS IN SUBSECTIONS
B, C, D, AND E
Map groups are to be arranged in the order indi-
cated in SECTION 92 of the outline. All map cita-
tions and appraisals are to be written according to a
standard pattern as indicated below :
Title of map underlined, with English translation
in parenthesis without underlining if title is in a
foreign language; scale; authority; date; language
(if not in English) ; coordinates (and grid) ; call
number or distribution number. Security classifi-
cation.
Appraisal-State the main use or uses of the map
(if appropriate) and evaluate the data on the basis
of accuracy. Comment on the following aspects
of the map only if they represent unusual features
or points of great weakness, or strength; 1) areal
coverage, 2) base data, 3) source material, and' 4)
cartographic presentation. Other features of the
map may also be discussed if they are of outstand-
ing significance.
If a map citation does not fit the standard cita-
tion pattern exactly, the contributor may consult
the coordinator as to the form to be used, or follow
the pattern set for a similar citation in a completed
NIS CHAPTER IX. The coordinator may also be
consulted concerning the content of an appraisal
while the manuscript is in preparation.
The citation and appraisal of an embossed map
in SECTION 92 should follow immediately after dis-
cussion of the map from which it was made and
have the same item number followed by the capital
letter A. The citation for the embossed map can,
therefore, be abbreviated. It should include: Title
underlined; horizontal scale, vertical scale; call
number or equivalent. The fact that the map is
embossed should be noted immediately after the
map title unless this information forms part of the
title itself. The appraisal should not repeat in-
formation given in the original map appraisal.
Among the types of information that might be in-
cluded are marginal information and additions to
or omissions from the original map.
Each molded relief model is given its own item
number, as in the case of maps. Citations should
be identical to those for maps, except for the in-
clusion of a vertical scale immediately after the
horizontal scale. The appraisal should follow the
standard pattern but include also specific evalua-
tion of the model, as distinct from a map.
A. General
Explain that the following maps have all been
cited in SECTION 91 and that they are arranged by
subject groups, not in order of importance.
B. Physical maps, navigation charts, and
plans of urban areas
1. TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS
2. TERRAIN CLASSIFICATION MAPS
3. AIR AND AIR FACILITY CHARTS
4. GENERAL, SAILING, COASTING AND AP-
PROACH CHARTS
5. NEARSHORE OCEANOGRAPHIC CHARTS
AND MAPS
6. CLIMATIC MAPS
7. PLANS AND MAPS OF URBAN AREAS
C. Maps of transportation and communica-
tions
1. RAILROAD MAPS
2. ROAD MAPS
3. WATERWAYS CHARTS AND MAPS
4. HARBOR AND PORT CHARTS AND MAPS
5. AIR TRANSPORT MAPS .
6. TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND POSTAL
MAPS
7. PIPELINE MAPS
D. Sociological, political, and economic maps
1. SOCIOLOGICAL MAPS
2. POLITICAL MAPS
3. ECONOMIC MAPS
E. Special armed forces maps
1. ARMY
2. NAVY
3. AIR FORCE
F. Molded relief models
Subsections B, C, D, E, and F consist exclusively
of appraisals, which will follow the pattern de-
scribed above. In Subsections B, 4 (General, sail-
ing, coasting, and approach charts) and B, 7 (Plans
and maps of towns), the appraisals may be pre-
sented in table form. Subsections C, D, and E
may be subdivided as in SECTION 91, if the number
of maps justifies the breakdown.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT I
PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
Section 1 Introduction
Section 2 Principal Ports
Section 3 Secondary Ports
Section 4 Minor Ports and Landings
Section 5 Comments on Principal Sources
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Supplement I - Ports and Naval Facilities
OUTLINE
SECTION 1.
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2.
PRINCIPAL PORTS
A.
List of ports and naval facilities
A-Z.
Name of port
B.
C.
D.
Classification of ports and naval fa-
cilities
Berthing estimates
1. Free-swinging anchorage berths
2. Alongside berths
Estimated military port capacity
1. Introduction
2. Harbor
3. Terminal facilities
4. Storage facilities
5. Clearance facilities
6. Port capacity
7. Supplies
8. Repair facilities
9. Port administration
E.
Explanatory notes
10. Trade of port
11. Planned development and im-
1. Units of measure
2. Cross-references
3. General
F. Glossary
provements
12. Naval facilities
SECTION 3. SECONDARY PORTS
SECTION 4. MINOR PORTS AND LANDINGS
SECTION 5. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrangement.
In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instructions are
to be followed in detail.
Note for publication: Information in this Supplement is presented
as a detailed treatment of individual ports which are covered in a general
manner in SECTON 35. The NIS areal summary of ports in SECTION 35
will not be duplicated in this Supplement.
Section 1. Introduction
A. List of ports and naval facilities
Alphabetically list all ports indicating name, co-
ordinates, category.
List naval bases indicating name, coordinates,
category.
B. Classification of ports and naval facilities
Basis of division into categories of principal
ports, secondary ports, and minor ports (division is
based on relative port capabilities).
System used in classifying naval facilities.
C. Berthing estimates
1. FREE-SWINGING ANCHORAGE BERTHS
Standard classification system adopted for an-
chorage berths; add notes as required on its use in
Supplement.
Class I, min. dimensions-800 yd diameter, 38 ft
depth; type vessel-capital naval ship, large pas-
senger ship.
Class II, min. dimensions-500 yd diameter, 30 ft
depth; type vessel-standard oceangoing cargo ves-
sel.
Class III, min. dimensions-300 yd diameter, 20 ft
depth; type vessel-destroyer, small cargo vessel.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT I
2. ALONGSIDE BERTHS
Standard classification system adopted for along-
side berths; add notes as required on its use in
Supplement. In multiple berthing, due allowance
should be made for adequate clearance between
ships.
CLASS
OF
BERTH
SIZE VESSEL
Length
ACCOMMODATED
Draft
EQUIVALENT
VESSEL TYPE
ft
A
ft
500
30
C3
B
460
24-28
Liberty, Vic-
C
350
18-21
tory, C2
C1-M-AV1
D
250
16
Standard
12
Coaster
Small
Coaster
NOTE This classification of alongside berths is not
applicable to naval and tanker accommoda-
tions.
D. Estimated military port capacity
A standard formula adopted for determination
of an estimated military port capacity has been
based on the following conditions or factors:
1) Capacity is from ship to shore and transfer of
cargo from the immediate working area.
2) Naval wharves and piers, bunkering facilities,
and petroleum piers generally are disregarded in
evaluation of available berthing facilities for gen-
eral cargo.
3) Unloading of ships is by ship's gear only.
4) Evaluation of alongside vessel accommoda-
tion is based on the following vessel types:
a. Liberty-Victory-C2 460' minimum length
(Class "B" berth) 24'-28' draft
b. C1-M-AV1 350' minimum length
(Class "C" berth) 18'-21' draft
c. Lighters 6' minimum draft
5) Tonnage unloaded by vessels alongside
(L/tons per 20 hour day) :
a. Liberty-Victory-C2 600 tons
b. C1-M-AV1 400 tons
6) Vessels worked in the stream-free-swinging
anchorage berth with minimum diameter of 1,500'
and 30' minimum depth (Class II anchorage
berth). Vessel discharge calculated on Liberty-
Victory-C2 type only (L/tons per 20 hour day) 500.
(Where lighterage docking space is the limiting
factor, the figure of 150 tons per day per 100 linear
feet of dock is used.)
7) Adequate labor and dock-working equipment
assumed.
8) Adequate supply of lighters assumed.
9) Capacity estimates include all allowances and
adjustments necessary to compensate for the pres-
ence of adverse factors such as deteriorated facili-
ties, poor layout of working space and other pecu-
liarities which might tend to alter or affect the
operation of the port at the estimated capacity.
NOTE The foregoing conditions or factors should be
published in each SUPPLEMENT I.
E. Explanatory notes
1. UNITS OF MEASURE
Statement concerning use.
2. CROSS-REFERENCES
Point out topics which receive additional treat-
ment in other sections of NIS. Provide appropri-
ate cross-reference for each by subject.
3. GENERAL
Other notes and general reference data as appro-
priate.
F. Glossary
List, with English equivalents, common port and
harbor terminology in language of area.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
Section 2. Principal Ports
A-Z. Name of port
Coordinates (H.O. Chart No.)
1. INTRODUCTION
General summary including such features as:
Location.
Importance (brief discussion on city and port as
unit-population, industries, hinterland and trade).
Nature of port (physical situation).
Brief description and evaluation of port facilities.
Summary of normal port operations.
Discuss briefly plans for possible new works-ex-
pansion of present facilities, or reconstruction
programs.
Summary of naval installations.
Number and location of free-swinging anchorage
berths by classes.
Fixed moorings (location and layout; number, types,
sizes, and capacities of berths).
Tidal ranges and interval.
Currents.
Sea and swell.
Ice.
Indicate adverse conditions that may affect ship
handling and port operations.
d. LOCAL WEATHER CONDITIONS - Summary
of weather conditions, particularly as they
affect ship handling and port operations.
2. HARBOR
Summary of harbor (as differentiated from the
port) :
Physical situation-type, position, size, shape,
and layout of harbor, shoreline, beaches, and adja-
cent terrain (with mention of town and port site).
Shelter-natural or artificial (describe position,
dimensions, and construction of breakwaters and
other protective works).
Wet docks and semi-tidal basins, if present-con-
struction, layout, dimensions; details of dock
pumps, gates, and machinery; operations data.
Depths-average depths, fairways, liability to
silting and details of dredging normally required,
details of underwater obstructions such as shoals,
wrecks, cables, fixed fishing gear, spoil grounds.
Bridges-structures spanning portions of harbor
and regarded as obstructions to shipping (type and
clearance, vertical and horizontal).
a. APPROACH
(1) General approach
(2) Entrance channel-Discuss such fac-
tors as:
Length and configuration.
Governing width and depth.
Maximum size vessel which can enter.
Liability to silting and details of dredging normally
required.
Aids to navigation (summary evaluation only).
Pilotage (necessity for, availability and quality of lo-
cal pilots).
b. ANCHORAGE - Indicate the location of an-
chorages (areas assigned to or suitable for anchor-
age) and cover each in terms of :
Depths.
Bottom sediments (evaluation of holding qualities).
Evaluation of each anchorage area in terms of pro-
tection from sea and weather.
3. TERMINAL FACILITIES
a. PIERS, WHARVES, AND LANDINGS
(1) General summary covering - Wharf
layout and construction-layout of facilities in
port, classification of types of wharves and landings
and functional grouping.
Adequacy of waterfront facilities for rapid and
efficient cargo transfer; general methods of opera-
tion, i.e., movement and berthing of vessels, cargo
discharge and transit, etc.
Small craft landings-adjacent hards, bulk-
heads, steps, stages, and beaches usable by amphib-
ious lighters, landing craft, and boats.
(2) Details of principal piers and wharves -
Tabulate details of each wharf unit:
Name
Location (include reference number on port plan
together with local designation if available).
Use
Type and construction
Dimensions: (feet)
Length
Width
Depths alongside (MLW)
Usable berthing space
Width of apron
Height of deck above (MHW)
Load capacity of deck, in pounds per sq ft)
Berthing capacity (No. and class of berth)
Transit sheds:
Type of construction
Dimensions
Number of floors
Height between floors
Total floor area
Mechanical handling facilities (cranes, conveyors,
etc.
Railroad facilities and connections
Road facilities and connections
Utilities
Water
Electricity
Remarks (data not mentioned above; e.g., unusual
berthing method, condition of wharf, etc.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT I
b. MECHANICAL HANDLING FACILITIES
(1) Cranes - Summary statement of hoist-
ing and equipment available in port, ashore and
afloat, indicating general types, uses, capacities
and characteristics. Tabulate details.
(2) Stevedore gear - Availability of steve-
dore gear-slings, pallets, jitneys, wharf trucks,
carriers, portable conveyors, etc.
(3) Specialized handling equipment-Spe-
cial cargo handling machinery such as coal and
bulk ore unloaders, marine legs, grain spouts and
conveyors, etc.
c. HARBOR CRAFT - Tabulate numbers and de-
tails of service craft located in port :
Tugs (size, H.P., use)
Lighters (type capacity, use)
Bunkering craft (type, capacity, pumping equipment,
rate of handling)
Dredgers (type, capacity in depth and cu. yds. per
hour)
Miscellaneous (fireboats, icebreakers, salvage craft,
pile drivers, ferries, etc.)
4. STORAGE FACILITIES
a. COVERED STORAGE
(1) Warehouses
(a) SUMMARY OF ALL WAREHOUSES AND
OTHER STRUCTURES SUITABLE FOR USE IN CONNEC-
TION WITH PORT OPERATIONS - Include total capac-
ity by types and indicate adequacy of facilities for
normal port operations, and capacity available in
excess of local requirements.
(b) DETAILS OF WAREHOUSES - Tabulate
details of each installation :
Location, operator
Commodities stored
Type of construction
Dimensions
Number of floors
Height between floors
Total floor area (sq ft)
Total capacity (cu ft or measurement tons)
Rail and road connection
Fire protection
Special equipment (overhead cranes, monorail sys-
tems, etc.)
(2) Cold storage facilities
(a) SUMMARY OF FACILITIES - Including
total capacity, adequacy for normal port oper-
ations, and capacity available in excess of local
requirements.
(b) DETAILS OF COLD STORAGE FACILITIES -
Tabulation of details of each installation :
Location, operator
Commodities stored
Type of construction
Type of equipment
Daily ice capacity
Storage capacity in cu. ft. or measurement tons (dif-
ferentiate by controlling temperatures)
(3) Bulk grain storage facilities
(a) SUMMARY OF FACILITIES INCLUDING
TOTAL CAPACITY
(b) DETAILS OF EACH INSTALLATION -
Location, operator
Type of construction
Total storage capacity
Loading berth:
Berthing space and depths alongside
Capacity by vessel type
Normal handling capacity per hour
Car to elevator
Elevator to car
Elevator to ship
Ship to elevator
Rail and road connections
b. OPEN STORAGE SPACE - Location of areas
suitable for open storage; indicate size, rail and
road connections, approximate capacity, and dis-
tance from ship berths.
5. CLEARANCE FACILITIES
a. RAIL
(1) Lines clearing port - Summary of lines
clearing port mentioning connecting points, num-
ber of tracks, and gage.
(2) Rail facilities in port - General sum-
mary covering: Trackage in water-front area; and
Classification yards (location, number of sidings,
car capacity).
b. RoAD
(1) Roads and highways clearing port-
Summary of routes clearing port mentioning
connecting points, type of construction, widths,
condition.
(2) Streets and roadways in town and port
area - General analysis of adequacy in relation to
port operations.
C. WATER - Summary of normal inland
waterway routes of clearance, including connecting
points, numbers, types and capacities of craft in
service.
d. PIPELINES - Summary of pipelines clearing
port.
6. PORT CAPACITY
a. PORT OPERATING DATA
(1) Cargo - Show the average monthly
tonnage of cargo normally handled at port (indi-
cating types of cargo and type of movement-dis-
charge or loading) ; prevailing methods of cargo
handling and transfer, indicating any bottlenecks
or limiting factors, actual or potential.
(2) Port labor supply - Discuss from the
standpoint of organization, availability, efficiency,
morale, etc.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
b. ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY - Esti-
mate is based on standard formula. Point out spe-
cial conditions or factors affecting estimate which
may not be fully covered by the basic assumptions.
a. PETROLEUM - Summarize for each of the
various types of petroleum products, the normal
capacity of storage installations in the port, normal
stocks maintained and storage capacities and
stocks in excess of normal requirements.
Discuss normal methods of supplying bunkers to
ships.
Tabulate details of each petroleum terminal
installation (with indication of owner, operator,
and location) :
STORAGE FACILITIES:
Tankage (type, dimensions, and capacity of each
tank; aggregate capacity of tanks by product).
Covered storage (type, dimensions, and use of
each).
OILING BERTHS :
Name, location, and capacity of berth serving in-
stallation; size, use, and capacity of each pipe-
line; cross-reference to A, 3, a (2) for details.
ANCILLARY FACILITIES:
Details of fire protection system, filling plant,
pumping plant, etc.
Bunkering-General analysis of availability
of bunkers and methods of supplying to ships.
b. COAL. - Tabulate details of each storage
and bunkering installation :
STORAGE FACILITIES:
Owner and operator
Location
Capacity
SUPPLY:
Sources
Grades in stock
Normal supplies
BUNKERING FACILITIES: Cross-reference to A, 3,
a, (2)
c. WATER - Discuss availability of water sup-
ply to ships (at wharves and by lighter) ; adequacy
of supply; quality of water; rates of supply to
ships.
d. POWER - General availability of electric
power and lighting in port and water-front area
(with indication of source and characteristics of
current).
e. PROVISIONS AND CHANDLERY - Discuss avail-
ability of.
8. REPAIR FACILITIES
a. GENERAL - Summarize available drydock-
ing and repair facilities and capabilities of port (in-
clude naval dockyards).
b. PRINCIPAL REPAIR YARDS - Discuss each yard
as an integrated unit; include naval dockyards.
(1) Name of yard - Summary covering
location, layout, activities, and capabilities.
(a) DOCKING INSTALLATIONS - Summary
of drydocks and marine railways; cross-reference
to Subsection 8, e, for details.
(b) FITTING-OUT AND REPAIR BERTHS -
Summary of wharf facilities; cross-reference to
Piers, Wharves, and Landings for details.
(c) SHOPS - For each shop give size, con-
struction, layout; itemize each major piece of
equipment together with its conditions and capa-
bility:
Structural shops
Engineering shops
Electrical and instrument shops
Miscellaneous shops
(d) HEAVY-LIFT EQUIPMENT - Summary
of cranage; cross-reference to Mechanical Handling
Facilities for details.
(e) UTILITIES - Summary of availability,
adequacy, characteristics, and distribution of :
Electric power, steam, compressed air and in-
dustrial gases, and water.
(f) PERSONNEL - Number, categories, and
quality of employees.
C. MINOR REPAIR YARDS - Details of small craft
building and repair yards, including installations,
normal operations, and capabilities.
d. AUXILIARY REPAIR FACILITIES - Enterprises
lacking drydocking equipment but specializing in
or capable of marine repairs in some degree; e.g.,
machine shops and foundries, railroad shops, sal-
vage firms.
Details of installations, normal operations, and
capabilities.
e. DETAILS OF DRYDOCKING INSTALLATIONS -
Tabulate details of all significant drydocking in-
stallations in port.
GRAVING DOCKS (for each)
Name
Location
Construction
Dimensions (feet)
Entrance:
Width at coping
Width at mean high water level
Depth over sill (MHW)
Body of dock:
Length on top
Length on floor
Depth over keel blocks (MHW)
Gate (type and mechanism)
Pumping plant; rates of dewatering and flood-
ing
Availability of heavy lift facilities
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT I
GRAVING DOCKS (for each) (Continued) :
Availability of water, steam, electricity, com-
pressed air, etc.
Capacity of dock (vessel type and size)
Age and condition of dock
FLOATING DRYDOCKS (for each) :
Name
Location
Construction
Dimensions (feet)
Length:
Over-all
On keel blocks (max)
Width, over-all
Width between side walls
Maximum depth: Over keel blocks
Maximum draft of dock
Pumping plant and rates
Availability of heavy lift facilities
Availability of water, steam, electricity, com-
pressed air, etc.
Lifting capacity (weight in long tons)
Capacity of dock (vessel type and size)
Age and condition of dock
MARINE RAILWAYS:
Name
Location
Type and construction
Dimensions (feet)
Cradle
Length
Width
Depth over blocks, outboard position (MHW)
Forward
Aft
Declivity
Hauling machinery
Transversing arrangements
Hauling capacity (weight in long tons)
Capacity by vessel type and size
9. PORT ADMINISTRATION
a. ORGANIZATION - Analyze pattern of owner-
ship, authority, and operation of port. Discuss
official services such as quarantine, customs, im-
migration, police, etc.; port security organization;
free-port organization and facilities.
b. PORT REGULATIONS - Summarize the most
important elements of the prevailing port regula-
tions and practices.
10. TRADE OF PORT
a. SHIPPING - Statistics on volume of ship-
ping (number of vessels by size, type, trade, and
flag calling at port over monthly or yearly periods).
b. COMMERCE - Present in tabular form :
List by commodity and amount, and breakdown by
direction-foreign and domestic.
Ratio of port's trade to national total. Use data for
five or so representative years.
11. PLANNED DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVE-
MENTS
Discuss in detail where appropriate plans for
new harbor works or expansion of port facilities.
12. NAVAL FACILITIES
a. SUMMARY - General summary covering:
Location and importance; type of base or activity
(naval base, station, operating base, facility, etc.) ;
organization, layout, and component functions;
vessels based at, or using, facilities.
b. BASE COMPONENTS - Details of each ele-
ment or activity of base in terms of the following
components; omit topics and headings which are
not applicable; identify each building and installa-
tion on map.
(1) Harbor - Cover in such manner as is
appropriate but cross-reference to principal treat-
ment under Harbor.
(2) Landing facilities - Summarize and
cross-reference to Terminal Facilities.
(3) Shipbuilding and repair component -
Summarize and cross-reference to principal treat-
ment under Repair Facilities.
(4) Ordnance component
(a) MANUFACTURING FACILITIES - Discuss
type of manufacture and give details of plant, in-
cluding: current activity and capabilities; identifi-
cation of buildings and facilities; dimensions, con-
struction, layout, and equipment of each building.
(b) ASSEMBLY, OVERHAUL,, AND MAINTE-
NANCE FACILITIES - Discuss types of operations per-
formed and give details of plant including : current
activity and capabilities; identification of buildings
and facilities; dimensions, construction, layout and
equipment of each building.
(C) STORAGE FACILITIES - Details of type,
construction, dimensions, capacity, and use of each
building or installation.
(5) Supply component
(a) MATERIAL STORAGE AND SUPPLY - An-
alyze activities and cover details of type, construc-
tion, dimensions, capacity, equipment, and use of
each building or installation.
(b) FUEL STORAGE AND SUPPLY - Summa-
rize and cross-reference to principal treatment un-
der Petroleum Supplies.
(6) Communications component - General
analysis of organization and functions of commu-
nications activities. For each facility or installa-
tion-radio station, relay station, message center,
etc.-cover such details as type, construction, di-
mensions, layout, and equipment.
(7) Training component - General analy-
sis of mission, organization, and functions of each
training activity; detailed description of facilities
including school buildings and quarters, instruc-
tion shops and practice equipment (diving cham-
bers, etc.).
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
(8) Medical component - Detailed descrip-
tion of all medical facilities including hospitals, dis-
pensaries, laboratories, clinics.
(9) Administrative component
Table of organization of base as a whole.
Table of organization of each component activity.
(10) Miscellaneous components - Detailed
description of all special or miscellaneous activities
not included in above components.
c. BASE UTILITIES - General services and utili-
ties for base as a whole; identify each building and
installation on map.
(1) Housing facilities - Detailed descrip-
tion of barracks, quarters, and ancillary installa-
tions.
(2) Transportation facilities
(a) CLEARANCE - Rail, road, and water
transportation facilities clearing base.
(b) FACILITIES WITHIN BASE - Layout and
construction of streets and roadways; details of
vehicles and vehicle repair shops; layout of railroad
trackage; details of railroad equipment.
(3) Base communications - Details of all
internal communications facilities.
(4) Electric power and lighting - Type, ca-
pacity, and output of power plants; details of gen-
erating equipment and transformers; characteris-
tics of current as produced and distributed.
(5) Water supply - Source, quantity, and
quality of supply; details of transmission, purifica-
tion, storage, and distribution.
(6) Fire protection - Details of equipment
and alarm system; fire mains and pressures.
(7) Recreation facilities
(8) Disciplinary facilities
d. BASE DEFENSES
(1) Harbor defenses
(a) ENTRANCE CONTROL POST - Details of
command post for coordination and operation of
military elements of the harbor defense system.
(b) DETECTION UNITS - Details of mag-
netic loops, sonobuoys, cable-connected hydro-
phones, and other devices for the detection of ap-
proaching submarine and surface craft.
(c) NETS AND BOOMS - Location, number,
layout, types, and construction of units to close
harbor against submarine, torpedo, or motor tor-
pedo boat attack.
(d) MINING - Location and details of de-
fensive mining in harbor approaches and entrance.
(e) PATROL OPERATIONS - Details of patrol
activity in harbor and its approaches; identifica-
tion and functions of vessels assigned to harbor
defense and patrol duties.
(2) Antiaircraft defense - Location, num-
ber, type of guns, emplacements, command posts,
range finders, radar, etc.
(3) Chemical warfare defense - Proce-
dures and equipment for individual and collective
protection and decontamination.
(4) Protective construction and conceal-
ment - Dispersal of base units; sandbagging, con-
crete splinter-proof construction; subterranean
shelters, depots, and communication centers;
camouflage, natural cover, decoys, and smoke
screens.
(5) Internal security - Sentries, guard-
houses, barriers, watch towers, and inspection pro-
cedure to prevent sabotage and unauthorized
entry.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDl"79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT I
Section 3. Secondary Ports
If information is available, use all applicable
headings shown under SECTION 2, Principal Ports.
Eliminate or combine headings where necessary or
desirable.
Section 4. Minor Ports and Landings
Tabulate or discuss significant details of smaller
ports not treated above (ports relatively unimpor-
tant in extent of trade and port facilities, but usa-
ble by ships).
Section 5. Comments on Principal Sources
This Section is to serve the following purposes :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
This Supplement should be accompanied by the
following graphic material:
Location map - General map of area showing
location of all ports and naval facilities.
Port plans - An accurate, large-scale plan, show-
ing in detail:
Wharves
Transit sheds (individual buildings)
Warehouses (individual buildings)
Railroad spurs and sidings
Street pattern
Layout of repair yards
Layout of important industries and other installations
Soundings in feet
Mooring buoys
Navigational aids
Layout of naval bases and installations
Aerial photographs (indicate date and direc-
tion)-Vertical mosaic of port or base
Selected obliques; large-scale verticals of impor-
tant installations.
Ground photographs-Selected views of port
facilities and operations. Include detailed cap-
tions pointing out important features, direction
of view, and date of photograph.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT II
AIR FACILITIES
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Supplement II - Air Facilities
The air facilities requirements of the NIS normally are met by Sections
83, K and 37, as supplemented by periodic publications issued by the United
States Air Force. A Supplement 1.1 is provided for those instances where
there is not sufficient other material to warrant a Section 37 or Section 83,
or where there is more material available than is required for Section 37
or 83, K.
The Supplement II requirements for description of individual air
facilities are indicated by the outline below.
Note for publication:. Information in this Supplement is presented
as a detailed treatment of air facilities which are covered in a general
manner in SECTIONS 37 and 83.
OUTLINE
Air facilities list to contain the following :
Name and alternate names
Classification
Map reference
Altitude and variation
Location and landmarks
Landing area
AIRFIELDS-dimensions of field, runways, taxiways, and
parking areas, with surface construction, condition,
and load capacity (indicate in lb or type aircraft)
of each.
SEAPLANE STATIONS-dimensions of alighting and
mooring areas, minimum depth, shelter and surface
condition, tidal range and currents, buoys and
markers.
Extensibility
Obstructions
Facilities available, to include radio aids, light-
ing, fuel, oil, hangars, repairs, accommodations,
communications, and access by road, rail, and
water. In addition for Seaplane Stations give
ramps and cranes, docks and floats, boats and tugs.
Weather service
Operators
Users
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT III
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 1. Telephone
Section 2 Telegraph
Section 3 Radio
Section 4 Submarine Cables
Section 5 Comments on Principal Sources
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Supplement III- Telecommunications
OUTLINE
A.
B.
C.
Outside plant
1. Networks and systems
2. Line construction
3. Cables and wire
4. Accessibility of routes
Inside plant
Repair facilities
B.
1. Facilities
2. Repair facilities
Broadcasting (including FM and tele-
vision)
1. Facilities
2. Repair facilities
A. Facilities
B. Repair facilities
SUPPLEMENT III contains technical reference
data on telecommunications equipment and sys-
tems. An analysis and interpretation of strategic
economic, administrative aspects and service po-
tentialities of telecommunications will be found in
SECTION 38, CHAPTER III.
Other specialized phases of telecommunications
are treated elsewhere in the NIS :
Effect upon telecommunications, CHAPTER II
Manufactures, SECTION 64, CHAPTER VI
Electronics, SECTION 71, CHAPTER VII
Military, SECTION 81, CHAPTER VIII
Telecom map appraisal, CHAPTER IX
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT III
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instruc-
tions are to be followed in detail.
Note for publication: This Supplement contains technical reference
data on facilities discussed in SECTION 38.
Section 1. Telephone
A. Outside plant
1. NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS
Length of sections between toll centers or central
offices
Number of circuits between toll centers or central
offices
Repeater (voice frequency and carrier) loca-
tions
Location of test stations
Location of exchanges and offices
Type of construction (open wire, aerial cable,
underground cable, radio relay, etc.)
Transfer points to other systems
Use of power lines for transmission of telecom
Any other information suitable for diagram-
matic presentation.
2. LINE CONSTRUCTION
a. GENERAL - Type and size of pole generally
used, usual pole spacing, cross-arm length and pin
spacing, method of conductor suspension, type of
hardware and insulators used, date of installation
or repair, etc. (Use sketches and photographs.)
b. UNDERGROUND AND UNDERWATER CABLES -
Depth of laying, marking methods, protection
methods (gas under pressure, conduit, etc.).
3. CABLES AND WIRE
a. CABLE - Kind or type of cable, date of in-
stallation or repair, code identification of insula-
tion (preferably from manufacturer or local ad-
ministration), cable layup, circuit assignment
(segregation of 4-wire circuits, power and control
circuits, etc.), capacitance, inductance and resist-
ance per unit length, inductance of leading coils,
cut-off frequency, physical characteristics of load-
ing apparatus, terminal box circuit assignment,
etc.
b. WIRE-Size and material of conductors,
wire spacing, scheme of transposition, etc.
4. ACCESSIBILITY OF ROUTES
Usual routes followed by lines-along roads or
railroads, cross-country, etc.-and degree of acces-
sibility. Use of route markers.
B. Inside plant
Exact location of all exchanges and offices-
give street address and locate on town plan
Type of service (magneto, common battery,
attended or unattended dial, etc.). (For Tele-
graph-manual, automatic Morse, Creed, Baudot,
etc.)
Normal and emergency power supplies
Equipped capacity of switchboard or switch-
ing equipment and number of subscribers served.
Make and model of switchboard or switching equip-
ment
Type and description of main distributing
frame and central office exchange protective equip-
ment
Kind (magneto, common battery, dial) and
type (wall, desk, hand set) of telephone substation
equipment in general use
Toll and exchange wire and cable entrance
facilities
Carrier
a) Frequencies used and nomenclature for
types
b) Circuit arrangements (2-wire, 4-wire)
c) Description of terminal and repeater equip-
ment
d) Repeater spacing
Description of any services other than tele-
phone (radio program transmission, facsimile,
TWX, or other) provided by telephone system.
C. Repair facilities
Extent and location of repair shops
Number, distribution and efficiency of skilled
mechanics
Location of warehouses or depots-give de-
scriptions and quantities of each type of material
normally stored in each
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 2. Telegraph
Same topics as for Telephone. If all telephone and telegraph systems
use joint facilities, Sections 1 and 2 may be combined.
Section 3. Radio
1. FACILITIES
a. LOCATION-By city, state, or sub-division;
by geographical coordinates in degrees, minutes
and seconds; and, when available, by street and
number, of transmitting, receiving or control sta-
tions.
b. STATION CALL SIGNAL
C. TYPE OF EMISSION - Telegraphy on pure
continuous wave, modulated telegraphy, telephony,
pulse position modulation, frequency modulation,
facsimile, etc.
d. POWER OF EACH TRANSMITTER - Antenna
power.
e. TYPES OF SERVICE FURNISHED - Fixed, ama-
teur, military, coast, aeronautical, time signals,
meteorological, notices to navigators, press, medi-
cal advice, calibrated waves, portable, mobile, etc.
f. NUMBER OF TRANSMITTING SETS - With name
of manufacturer and manufacturer's type designa-
tion or other description, of each.
g. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATING EQUIPMENT -
Keying apparatus, teleprinters, facsimile, carrier,
etc.
h. FREQUENCY LIMITS WITHIN WHICH THE STA-
TION CAN OPERATE ON REQUEST-1) Frequency or fre-
quencies employed for: Normal operation and
emergency operation; and 2) Note any differences
between primary and secondary frequencies and/or
day or night frequencies.
i. POWER SOURCE - Both regular and emer-
gency.
j. ANY OTHER EMERGENCY OR STAND-BY EQUIP-
MENT OR ARRANGEMENTS
k. TYPE OF ANTENNA - Rhombic, dipole, cur-
tain, etc.; area normally covered; and direction of
propagation in degrees from north; method of feed-
ing and matching.
1. ROUTE AND TYPE OF REMOTE CONTROL -Cable,
open wire, micro-wave link between transmitter
or receiver station and control station.
in. RADIO NETWORKS - Such as: police, for-
estry, public utilities, pipeline, intelligence, auto-
motive associations, or other (both public and pri-
vate).
n. INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER TELECOMMU-
NICATIONS FACILITIES
0. CONTOUR OR PROFILE CHARTS OF THE AREA -
Showing location of high points suitable for loca-
tion of microwave line or relay stations.
2. REPAIR FACILITIES
a. EXTENT AND LOCATION OF REPAIR SHOPS
b. NUMBER, DISTRIBUTION AND EFFICIENCY OF
SKILLED MECHANICS
C. LOCATION OF WAREHOUSES OR DEPOTS -Give
descriptions and quantities for each type of mate-
rial normally stored in each
B. Broadcasting (including FM and televi-
sion)
1. FACILITIES
Exact location of each transmitter, studio and
control room
Station call letters and frequency
Power of each transmitter (antenna power)
Description of transmitter equipment
Frequency limits within which the station
can operate on request
Description of power source-both regular
and emergency
Any other emergency or stand-by equipment
or arrangements
Type of antenna and area normally served, if
directional include beam direction in degrees from
north
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT III
Route and type of remote control (cable, open
wire, etc.) between transmitter and control room
Methods of netting or relaying (leased line,
coaxial cable, radio relay, modulated light beam,
or other)
Television
a) Types of cameras used
b) Lines per picture and method of interlacing
c) Frames per second
d) Allocated and transmitted bandwidth
e) Method of audio transmission
f) Use of color television and type used
Any other methods of entertainment or
propaganda dissemination (wires sound, wired
wireless, etc.)
Receivers
a) Number in use and distribution
b) Most popular types (number of tubes, fre-
quency coverage, power source)
c) Repair facilities, and spares held locally,
for broadcast receivers
2. REPAIR FACILITIES
Extent and location of repair facilities
Number, distribution and efficiency of skilled
mechanics
Station spares and source of supply
Section 4. Submarine Cables
Cable routes, showing both terminals for each
cable (cable designations)
Exact landing point of each cable
Exact location and description of cable huts
(photographs including from seaward)
Method and location of landline connections
between cable huts and operating offices
Physical and electrical characteristics of cables
a) Length and date of laying or repair of each
section
b) Manufacturer's type or designation of each
cable
c) Number of conductors; conductor and in-
sulating material
d) Speed_ of transmission
Operating Offices
a) Amount and types of equipment
b) Exact location
c) Methods of interconnection with other tele-
communication facilities
B. Repair facilities
Description and location of repair shops or
cable shops
Location and description of repair supplies
Source of supply
Section 5. Comments on Principal Sources
This Section is to serve the following purposes:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT IV
URBAN AREAS
Section 1 Introduction
Section 2 Principal Urban Areas
Section 3 Urban Areas of Secondary Importance
Section 4 Urban Areas of Minor Importance
Section 5 Gazetteer of Urban Areas
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Supplement IV - Urban Areas
OUTLINE
SECTION
1. INTRODUCTION
10. Health and sanitation facilities
11. Water supply
SECTION
2. PRINCIPAL URBAN AREAS
A. Name (of principal urban area)
12. Other public utilities
13. Repair and service facilities
14. War damage and planning
1. Location and importance
B-X.
Name (the second most important
2. Population
3. Means of access
area, etc.)
4. Internal transportation
SECTION 3.
URBAN AREAS OF SECONDARY IMPOR-
5. Physical characteristics
6. Important industry
7. Warehouses and storage
8. Billeting facilities
9. Principal buildings
TANCE
OUTLINE GUIDE
Note for publication: Information in this Supplement is presented
as a detailed treatment of individual urban areas which are covered in a
general manner in SECTION 25. The NIS areal summary of urban areas in
SECTION 25 will not be duplicated in this Supplement.
Section 1. Introduction
Short statement outlining basis of selection of
urban areas, size, importance, etc., and their ar-
rangement. (NIS urban areas map-locates all
urban areas or towns selected for study in SUPPLE-
MENT IV. Each urban area is given an identifying
map index number to assist in ready identification,
where these areas are located in a dense pattern,
map insets at a larger scale will be added. This
map will include the main drainage pattern, navi-
gable waterways, main railroad, and highway
networks, important terrain features, and symbols
depicting town functions. Depending upon extent
of an NIS Area, the selected scale will be from
1:500,000 to 1:5,000,000; insets at practical de-
sirable scales.)
Section 2. Principal UrbanlAreas
Army will submit lists of key strategic urban
areas and other selected urban areas to the NIS
Committee for transmission to IAC agencies for
comment and concurrence. Army will make the
final selection. Discuss or introduce the arrange-
ment of the principal urban areas selected for CHAP-
TER II, Subsection 25, B, 1, with reasons for the
order followed, their relative importance to the
areas of the NIS as a whole, to the sub-areas as
determined by the discussion in CHAPTER II, Sub-
section 25, A, and to each other. (Paragraph head-
ings for each urban area will be alphabetical and
each area will be discussed in sequence according
to the importance of the area, i.e., A. the principal
urban area, B. the second most important, etc. A
small reference map of the NIS Area with locations
of the principal urban areas should be included.
Urban area maps may be located with aprons at
the end of SECTION 2.)
A. Name (of principal urban area)
Alternate names in parentheses, urban areas
map index number, and population (large scale
map with apron at end of SECTION 2).
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT IV
1. LOCATION AND IMPORTANCE
Coordinates; basic importance-political, indus-
trial center, communications, etc., outlined in a
short introductory statement. (Urban areas en-
virons map and location map at small scale posi-
tioning urban area in relationship to neighboring
areas, etc., with key railroad, highway and water-
way communications will accompany the large
scale urban area map.)
2. POPULATION
Statistics over a period of years, if available,
with an evaluation of trends, growth or recession,
and a statement as to reliability; ethnic and reli-
gious statistics and problems, if pertinent or sig-
nificant, and subdivided by sub-areas or sections of
the town if there is significant segregation. (In-
clude a population or density map adjacent to text.
This might be combined with a building density
map; small scale.)
3. MEANS OF ACCESS
Short statement as to importance of urban area
in the internal and external transportation of the
NIS. (Refer to environs map.)
a. RAIL - Short statement, supplemented by
tabulated data, of the rail facilities entering and
serving the area. (Where there is an important
suburban and internal rail system, only main line
information will be included in this topic with ap-
propriate cross-references. Lines, distances to next
adjacent major rail centers, numbers of tracks, lo-
cations of bridges in area and their basic statis-
tics, facilities, shops, stations, etc., are compiled on
urban area map.)
b. ROAD - Short statement, supplemented by
tabulated data or annotated map, of the highways
entering and serving the town with official high-
way route numbers. (These highways, their dis-
tance to next adjacent highway center, traffic-lane
capacities, locations of bridges and their basic sta-
tistics, condition and type of paving, etc., are com-
piled on urban area map.)
C. WATER - Short statement, supplemented
by tabulated data, of navigable waterways serving
area and facilities within area. (Rivers, canals,
locks, docks and wharves, etc., are compiled on
urban area map.)
d. AIR - Short statement discussing air fa-
cilities serving area. (Airfields, with their im-
portarit facilities within town area are compiled on
urban area map. All airfields within vicinity of
area are located on environs map.)
e. CROSS COUNTRY - Statement discussing
cross-country means of approach to or exit from the
area, with appropriate notes or other means of
identification on the urban area map. (The most
important routes or avenues of cross-country ap-
proach indicated on environs map.)
4. INTERNAL TRANSPORTATION
Short statement introducing internal transpor-
tation communications with references to urban
area map. (Illustrated by photographs and dia-
grams of equipment and facilities.)
a. SUBWAY OR RAIL - Statement of routes, dis-
tances, depths of tunnels, types of construction,
bridges, etc. May be amplified by tabulated data
where considered desirable. (Data compiled on
urban areas map and/or transportation map.)
(Example)
FIGURE 2-1. TOWN SUBWAY SYSTEM
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
STATIONS
CONSTRUC-
TION OF
TUNNELS
miles ft
ROUTE 1: BLACK TO VIOLET LINE
Black 1.25 55 Twin castiron 2-escalators
tubes
White 0.83 1.5 Cut and cover Transfer point
to Pink Line
Blue
..... etc.
b. STREETCAR - Statement, with reference to
urban areas map and/or to transportation map, of
routes, equipment, source and distribution of pow-
er, etc., and locations of carbarns.
C. STREET - Statement on public automotive
transportation, buses, trolley buses, taxis, trucking,
with information as to capacities of garages, park-
ing areas and buildings, trucking terminals, etc.,
which are also compiled on urban area map.
(Trolley buses may warrant treatment as a sepa-
rate subsection.)
d. CANAL AND RIVER FERRY - Statement cover-
ing internal waterways transportation, illustrated
by photographs and diagrams, with information on
routes, slips, wharves, boats, ferries, barges, tugs,
etc. (Appropriate information compiled on urban
areas map and/or transportation map.)
5. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Consider physical conditions affecting an urban
area and its immediate environs. Short statement,
or introduction, outlining salient factors, with ref-
erence to urban areas map, and/or environs map.
a. TOPOGRAPHY - Discuss topographic fea-
tures in principal urban areas using following sub-
divisions:
(1) Terrain - Statement discussing terrain
underlying urban area, with special references to
prominent landmarks, important topographic
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
I
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 :
CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
URBAN AREAS
features, such as gullies, high points, cliffs, etc.,
with accompanying compilations on urban area
map and illustrated by photographs, ground and/or
aerial, stereographs, etc.
(2) Shape and dimensions - Short state-
ment, amplified by statistics and reference to urban
area map, describing predominant shape of area,
and its important dimensions, length, width, area,
elevations (to determined datum) ; comparison with
other urban areas.
b. GEOLOGY - Statement on types and depths
of soil, nature of rock both outcrops and subbase,
caves, etc., illustrated by geology map (where
sufficient information is available) and/or refer-
ence to urban area map and/or environs map.
c. PLAN - Discuss plan of area as implanted
on the physical terrain. In principal urban areas,
use following subdivisions:
(1) Functional pattern - Short statement
discussing subdivision of the urban area into its
constituent parts such as residential, commercial,
industrial, mixed, etc., with references to urban
area map, and/or function map. This will also in-
clude open and recreational areas especially in im-
mediate outskirts of the area.
(2) Street pattern - Statement describing
basic street pattern, or patterns in specific subsec-
tions with references to urban area map, widths
of through routes, main and minor streets, types of
pavement (illustrated by a street paving map
where feasible and photographs of typical condi-
tions, etc.). Widths of streets to be determined as
follows:
CAPACITY WIDTH BETWEEN CURBS
feet
1-lane 12 minimum
2-lane 21 minimum
3-lane 31
4-lane 40 to 45
(2) Construction - Statement on predomi-
nant types of construction amplified by table with
references to density map and/or urban area map.
(Illustrated by photographs, drawings, and/or
diagrams.)
(3) Shelters - Statements as to adequacy
of underground shelter facilities; constructed and
natural. (Locations indicated by appropriate
symbols on urban area map.)
6. IMPORTANT INDUSTRY
The most important or strategic industrial
plants, such as ballbearing plants, are discussed in
short statements and, if sufficient information is
available, pertinent data concerning each plant,
such as ground area, numbers of buildings, their
construction, and floor areas, workers, power con-
sumption, capacities, etc., is compiled into a table,
with references to urban area map and to function
map.
On the urban area map, building layouts of
plants discussed in this paragraph will be drawn in
detail if information is available; illustrated by sup-
plemental aerial photographs of most important
and strategic plants. Other industries, and indus-
trial areas will be identified by an over-all area or
site symbol, with, in most important industrial
centers, distinctive industry picture symbolization.
(Example)
FIGURE 2-2. INDUSTRY IN (NAME OF TOWN)
PRODUCT
AREA (sq ,fl)
CONSTRUCTION
AND
CAPACITY
Build-
ings
OF
BUILDINGS
Ball bearing Ball bearings 50,000 25,000 1
story
brick
plant; 400 all sizes
walls
saw-
employees 10,000 tons
tooth
glass
per year
roofs
..... plant,
etc.
(3) Firebreaks - Statement describing ac-
tual or possible firebreaks such as wide streets,
parks, canals, railroad alignments, etc., with ref-
erence to urban area map and/or firebreak map,
which could be combined with the function map.
d. STRUCTURAL - Consider predominant types
and construction of buildings, densities of build-
ings within building lines and to total area. In
principal urban areas use following subdivisions
(references to urban area map) :
(1) Density - Short statement describing
predominant patterns possibly supplemented by
illustrated table and accompanying urban area
density map. (Illustrations such as aerial photo-
graphs, aerial stereographs, typical town block
building layouts with equivalent ground photog-
raphy.)
7. WAREHOUSES AND STORAGE
Introductory statement on availability of stor-
age in urban area, with references to urban area
map and/or function map with information on con-
struction of buildings.
a. BULK - Most important facilities, capaci-
ties, with locations identified on urban area map.
b. COLD STORAGE - Most important facilities
for refrigeration storage, capacities, type of refrig-
erator, power consumption, etc. (Locations iden-
tified on urban area map.)
C. PETROLEUM PRODUCTS - Most important fa-
cilities, types and capacities of tanks, etc., with lo-
cations identified on urban area map and aerial
photographs of most important areas.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT IV
d. OPEN STORAGE - Short statement of availa-
bility of actual or possible areas suitable for open
bulk storage, areas, capacities, etc. (Locations
identified on urban area map.)
e. EXPLOSIVES - Short statement of available
facilities, types and construction of magazines, and
types of explosives stored, dynamites or high ex-
plosives, etc. (Locations identified on urban area
map.)
8. BILLETING FACILITIES
Statement outlining availability of billeting both
for personnel and for automotive transportation,
with appropriate references to identified points on
urban area map. Where sufficient information is
available, use the following subdivisions:
a. MILITARY BARRACKS - Locations and capaci-
ties. On urban area map, an appropriate over-all
pattern symbol is used for identification.
b. SCHOOLS - The most important institutions
are discussed in a short statement, with reference
to identified locations on urban area map. Smaller
institutions are located on urban areas map by an
appropriate symbol, and/or identified point index
number.
C. HOTELS AND OTHER SUITABLE BUILDINGS -
Statement outlining locations and capacities of
most important hotels and structures such as the-
aters, opera houses, etc., (Locations identified on
urban area map).
d. OPEN AREAS - Statement discussing availa-
bility of open areas, such as campgrounds, recrea-
tional parks, vacant land, suitable both for en-
campments and for automotive transport parks.
(Locations identified on urban area map and/or
environs map.)
9. PRINCIPAL BUILDINGS
Statement discussing the most important build-
ings and institutions, especially those which are
landmarks, with locations identified on urban area
map. When information is available it will be
tabulated as follows:
(Example)
FIGURE 2-3. PRINCIPAL BUILDINGS
BUILD-
ING
TOWN
MAP
INDEX
sgft
Town Hall Medieval building 15,700 3 1 d
masonry with floors
and roof construc-
tion, slate roofing
10. HEALTH AND SANITATION FACILITIES
Short introductory statement outlining any im-
portant factors or conditions affecting health of
the urban area, its immediate vicinity and any sub-
section thereof.
a. HOSPITALS AND MEDICAL FACILITIES - Short
introductory statement with accompanying table.
(Example)
FIGURE 2-4. HOSPITAL FACILITIES
NO.
OF
BEDS
TOWN
MAP
INDEX
Red Cross Hospital 235 3 operating rooms 7 e
X-ray laboratory
b. SEWAGE DISPOSAL - Includes any and all
methods of waste disposal and storm water run-off,
including statements as to non-existence of facili-
ties. This item may be subdivided as follows:
Sanitary sewage system
Combination system
Storm sewers
Raw sewage
Uncollected (cesspools and privies)
Garbage collection and disposal
Industrial wastes disposal
NoTE Appropriate references are made to urban area
map and/or sewage system map (which may
be a combined utility map) where sufficient data
is available.
11. WATER SUPPLY
Information discussed in this paragraph pertains
in general to developed municipal systems. How-
ever, it is also important to discuss all available
sources such as wells, springs, rivers, etc., especially
where a developed system is lacking or inadequate
to serve the total needs of the area. (Important
facilities are located on urban area map, or, if at a
distance, upon the environs map, including reser-
voirs, aqueducts, main purification or other treat-
ment plants, etc.) Where sufficient information
is available, this paragraph may be subdivided as
follows (appropriate cross references to Subsection
12, e, following, regarding water supply for fire-
fighting are also included) :
a. EVALUATION OF AVAILABLE SUPPLY - Quanti-
tative and qualitative statements, including discus-
sion of possible untapped sources.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDPT9-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 URBAN AREAS
b. SOURCES - Short statement as to available
quantities. (Locations may be shown on either
urban area map or environs map.)
C. COLLECTION AND STORAGE
d. PURIFICATION - This includes statements as
to potability after treatment or various sources of
supply and methods of treatment.
e. DISTRIBUTION - Where information is avail-
able, it is compiled into a water supply map which
might be part of a combined utility map.
12. OTHER PUBLIC UTILITIES
Short statement evaluating available public
utilities, such as restoration after war damage,
which is common to all or some of the following
subheadings. References are made to appropriate
chapters and sections in the NIS where pertinent.
(Most important installations are located on urban
area map.)
a. POWER AND HEAT - The present practice of
combining electric power production with central
heating as a byproduct in many countries indicates
that these utilities be considered together. State-
ments as to capacities, condition, sources of power,
etc. are supplemented by tabulated data pertinent
to the particular urban area. Where available,
high tension power lines are indicated by an ap-
propriate symbol on the urban area map and/or
utility map. Where necessary, this paragraph is
divided into the following subparagraphs:
(1) Power lines - Information on incoming
or outgoing high-voltage power lines.
(2) Power plants - Include Hydroelectric,
Thermal and combined Thermal heating plants.
(3) Distribution
(Example.)
FIGURE 2-5. POWER PLANTS
ELEC-
TRIC
POWER
OUT-
PUT
HEAT
TOWN
MAP
INDEX
kw cu ft
Central power Peat 100,000 10,500 550,000 9F
plant tons per year
........... etc.
b. IcE - Short statement regarding available
facilities and buildings. (Locations identified on
urban area map.) Where necessary, data is sub-
divided as follows:
(1) Natural - Statement giving informa-
tion as to sources, methods of collection, storage,
and reliability of normal average supply with ref-
erence to climatic variations.
(2) Manufactured - Statement as to
plants, capacities, power consumption, average ice
consumption per person per day, etc. (Locations
of plants identified on urban area map.)
c. GAS - (Reference to urban area map.)
(1) Natural gas (Reference to CHAPTER
VI and SUPPLEMENT V) - Sources, pipelines sizes
and capacities in cubic feet per day.
(2) Manufactured gas - Locations of
plants, fuel used, quantity required, maximum pro-
duction per day, capacities of storage facilities, and
types of storage.
(3) Distribution - Sizes of mains, normal
distribution pressure, and so on.
(4) Use - Industrial, commercial, residen-
(5) Canned gas - Production facilities, dis-
tribution, etc.
d. TELECOMMUNICATIONS - (Reference to
CHAPTER III.) Locations of principal facilities and
relation to national and international networks.
(Reference to urban area map.)
(1) Telephone
(2) Telegraph
(3) Cable - Also
across inland waterways.
(4) Radio (wireless)
e. FIREFIGHTING - Statement of facilities for
fire fighting, equipment, buildings, and evaluation
of efficiency of personnel, with data as to hydrants,
couplings (especially thread sizes, right or left),
hose. Also, statement as to civilian defense organ-
izations, if any.
13. REPAIR AND SERVICE FACILITIES
a.
b.
ETC.
RAILROAD, STREETCARS, RAPID TRANSIT
AUTOMOTIVE, GARAGES, TRACTOR STATIONS,
C. MACHINE SHOPS AND FOUNDRIES
d. OTHER
e. MECHANICAL STANDARDS AND GAGES OTHER
THAN U.S. STANDARDS
14. WAR DAMAGE AND PLANNING
Statements as to amount and extent of war dam-
age, with reference to urban area map where such
areas are identified by a suitable over-all pattern
symbol; plans for/and program of reconstruction
of war damage; proposals for replanning and
planned expansion; zoning (with accompanying
zoning map), which may be combined with den-
sity map, etc.
B-X Name (the second most important areas,
etc.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT IV
Section 3. Urban Areas of Secondary Importance
(About 50 maximum-reference to SECTION 25 of on the facing page or same page, a plan with a small
CHAPTER II and to urban area master map.) scale location map, and/or photographs. (Photo-
Each secondary town illustrated by a one page, or graphs might be combined into a special section
less, condensed tabulation, accompanied by, either on high-grade paper for better reproduction.)
(Examples)
FIGURE 3-1. ANALYSIS OF (TOWN NAME)
1. VARIANT NAMES: COORDINATES: S. INTERNAL TRANSPORTATION:
2. TERRAIN: Streets: Transit:
3. GEOLOGY: Bottlenecks:
4. LANDMARKS:
9. HEALTH: 11. BILLETING:
5. STATISTICS: Total Built-up 10. HOSPITALS: 12. STORAGE:
Population: Area (sq miles) ...... ...... Elevations:
Density (per- Max: 13. UTILITIES:
sons per sq Aver: Water Supply: Electric power:
mile) ...... ...... Min: Heat:
Population Sewage and garbage: Gas:
change: Ice:
6. FUNCTIONS:
Political : Agricultural:
Industrial: Military :
Raw materials:
14. TELECOMMUNICATIONS:
Telephone :
Telegraph:
Radio:
7. MEANS OF ACCESS:
Rail: Water: 15. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION:
Road: Air:
Cross country: 16. REMARKS:
Section 4. Urban Areas of Minor Importance
Consider approximately 100 to 150 towns depend- (Example)
ing upon area of survey. Introductory statement FIGURE 4-1. TOWNS OF MINOR IMPORTANCE
giving reasons for selection of urban areas, and ex-
planation of following table. Illustrate by table TOWN (Name): (Coordinates); population; size, etc.
giving urban area map index numbers, names Transportation:
(with alternates), populations (with dates), map Functions and Importance:
coordinates and locations, major functions and im- Utilities:
portance, and general remarks of important fea- Remarks:
tures.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055AO00200020001-6
JUNE1951 URBAN AREAS
Section S. Gazetteer of Urban Areas
Consists of an alphabetical list of the principal,
secondary and minor urban areas as follows:
(Example,)
GAZETTEER OF TOWNS
NAME
(ALTERNATE
NAMES)
Index
No.
Grid
Coordi-
nates
ALPHA (Alfor) 89 50 40 A 7 Transportation
100 50
BETA, etc.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055AO00200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT V
PETROLEUM
Section I Exploration and Development
Section 2 Production
Section 3 Refining and Processing
Section 4 Transportation
Section 5 Equipment and Materials
Section 6 Requirements and Supply
Section 7 Economic and Political
Section 8 Natural Gas
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Supplement V - Petroleum
OUTLINE
SECTION 1.
EXPLORATION AND DEVELOPMENT
4. Refinery storage for crude and re-
A.
B.
C.
General
Geology
Exploration
1. Summary
2. Geological and geophysical explor-
atory activities
3. Exploratory drilling accomplish-
ments
4. Exploratory results to date
5. Evaluation of exploratory develop-
ment and research methods
6. Significant factors affecting past,
present, and future exploration
C.
D.
E.
SECTION 4.
fined products
5. Sources, quantities, and supplies of
power, fuel, water, chemicals
6. Refinery statistics
7. Future plans for expansion, conver-
sion or reduction of capacity
8. Vulnerability of facilities
Natural gas liquids processing plants
Substitute liquid fuels plants
Comments on principal sources
TRANSPORTATION
D.
7. Concessions data
Reserves
A.
B.
General
Transport facilities
E.
1. Summary
2. Crude
3. Natural gas liquids
4. Ownership of reserves
5. Evaluation of methods used in esti-
mating reserves
Comments on principal sources
C.
1. Pipeline systems
2. Railway
3. Inland waterways
4. Ocean tankers
Terminal facilities, land and marine
1. Storage of crude and products
2. Loading and handling facilities for
A.
B.
General
Historical background
D.
crude and products
3. Materials handling facilities
4. Administration and operation, in-
dicating ownership, government
control and regulation
General evaluation of vulnerability of
C.
D.
Location of fields and wells
Crude production
E.
facilities relating to transportation
Comments on principal sources
E.
1. Output and disposition by fields and
by companies
2. Present and estimated productive
capacity
3. Production activity required to ob-
tain reported forward production
estimates
4. Data on individual fields
5. Maintenance and repair problems
6. General evaluation of vulnerability
of producing facilities
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 5.
A.
B.
C.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
General
Requirements
1. Exploration
2. Production
3. Refining and processing
4. Transportation, storage, and ter-
minals
Availability
A.
B.
General
Crude refineries
1. Brief historical sketch
2. Crude or charge stock
3. General descriptive processing pat-
tern
D.
SECTION 6.
A.
B.
1. Local
2. Imported
Comments on principal sources
REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLY
General
Over-all petroleum supply and demand
balance
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08: CIA-RDP
9-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMEN
V
JUNE 1951
SECTION 6.
REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLY (Contin-
ued)
D.
Evaluation of programs, policies, atti-
tudes
C.
D.
Crude requirements, by quantity and
type
1. For refineries
2. Exported
Products requirements, by quantity
and type
1. Domestic civilian
2. Military
3. Export
E.
A.
B.
C.
1. Governmental
2. Corporate
Comments on principal sources
General
Importance to domestic economy
Sources
E.
F.
Supply, by quantity and type
1. Crude
2. Products
Stockpiles of crude and products in re-
lation to requirements
D.
E.
Resources
1. Location
2. Reserves
Characteristics
G.
Factors affecting requirements and
supply
1. Geographic
2. Economic and political
F.
Production
1. By fields and companies
2. Drilling and production problems
3. Gathering, field storage, and power
H.
Degree of self-sufficiency or import de-
pendence for requirements, analyz-
ing specialized types of crude or
products required
facilities
4. Geographic factors affecting pro-
duction
5. Evaluation of field development,
1.
Probable future demand and supply
situation
technology and research
6. Productive capacity of the fields
J.
A.
B.
Comments on principal sources
General
Economic
1. Labor force
2. Ownership and finance
G.
Gas utilization and quantities con-
sumed
1. Industrial and commercial
2. Residential
3. Repressuring of oil fields
4. As fuel in oil and gas fields
5. For production of natural gas
liquids
C.
Laws and regulations
1. Basic laws
2. Other pertinent legislation
H.
I.
6. Flared
Transportation
Comments on principal sources
Approved F
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PETROLE UM
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instruc-
tions are to be followed in detail.
Note for publication: This Supplement contains more comprehensive
and detailed treatment of material in SECTION 62.
Section 1. Exploration and Development
B. Geology
1) General geology of the area
2) Geological classification of the area as to
prospects
a) Proven
b) Favorable
c) Possible
d) Unfavorable
3) Evaluation of the adequacy of geological cov-
erage and of technology and research
C. Exploration
1. SUMMARY
2. GEOLOGICAL AND GEOPHYSICAL EX-
PLORATORY ACTIVITIES
3. EXPLORATORY DRILLING ACCOMPLISH-
MENTS
a. DATA ON EXPLORATORY WELLS
b. METHODS OF SELECTING DRILL SITES
4. EXPLORATORY RESULTS TO DATE
a. NEW FIELDS
b. FIELD EXTENSIONS
C. NECESSITY FOR ADDITIONAL EXPLORATION
5. EVALUATION OF EXPLORATORY DE-
VELOPMENT AND RESEARCH METHODS
6. SIGNIFICANT FACTORS AFFECTING PAST,
PRESENT, AND FUTURE EXPLORATION
7. CONCESSIONS DATA
a. EXPLOITATION CONCESSIONS IN FORCE
b. EXPLORATION CONCESSIONS IN FORCE
C. CONCESSIONAIRES OPERATING IN THE AREA
d. BRIEF HISTORY AND EVALUATION OF OVER-ALL
CONCESSIONS DEVELOPMENT TO DATE
D. Reserves
1. SUMMARY
2. CRUDE
a. PROVEN, BY FIELD
b. PROBABLE
C. CHARACTERISTICS OF PROVEN RESERVES
3. NATURAL GAS LIQUIDS
a. PROVEN, BY FIELDS
b. PROBABLE
C. CHARACTERISTICS OF PROVEN RESERVES
4. OWNERSHIP OF RESERVES
a. NATIONALIZED
b. PRIVATELY OWNED
5. EVALUATION OF METHODS USED IN ESTI-
MATING RESERVES
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP 9-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMEN21 V
A. General
B. Historical background
C. Location of fields and wells
D. Crude production
1. OUTPUT AND DISPOSITION BY FIELDS
AND BY COMPANIES
2. PRESENT AND ESTIMATED PRODUCTIVE
CAPACITY (By fields, within MER and maximum)
3. PRODUCTION ACTIVITY REQUIRED TO
OBTAIN REPORTED FORWARD PRODUCTION
ESTIMATES
4. DATA ON INDIVIDUAL FIELDS
a. GEOLOGICAL FEATURES
b. FIELD CHARACTERISTICS
(1) Productive acreage
(2) Producing zones
(3) Reservoir characteristics
(4) Spacing pattern
C. CRUDE CHARACTERISTICS
d. DRILLING ACTIVITY AND WELL PERFORMANCE
e. EVALUATION OF DEVELOPMENT PRACTICES
(1) Drilling and production problems
(2) Conservation and secondary recovery
(3) Treating and stabilization
A. General
B. Crude refineries
1. BRIEF HISTORICAL SKETCH
Including name, location, type, capacity, owner-
ship, operator, and evaluation of operating ef-
ficiency
2. CRUDE OR CHARGE STOCK
Including sources, means of transport, and char-
acteristics
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTIVE PROCESSING
PATTERN
Including, where feasible or available, plant lay-
out and flow diagrams, aerial and ground photo-
graphs.
f. GATHERING, FIELD STORAGE, AND POWER FA-
GEOGRAPHIC FACTORS AFFECTING PRODUCTION
h EVALUATION OF FIELD DEVELOPMENT, TECH-
NOLOGY, RESEARCH
i. REPORTED FORWARD PRODUCTION ESTIMATE
AND PRODUCTIVE ACTIVITY REQUIRED
5. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROBLEMS
6. GENERAL EVALUATION OF VULNERABIL-
ITY F PRODUCING FACILITIES
E. C mments on principal sources
Thi Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement,
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
there provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
FLEXIBILITY TO VARY YIELDS OR PRODUCE
PRODUCTS
COMPLEMENTARY TO OR INTER-DEPENDENCE
THER REFINERIES
c. EVALUATION OF MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
PROBL MS
d. EVALUATION OF EFFICIENCY WITH RESPECT TO
COMP ENCE OF MANAGEMENT, TECHNICAL DIRECTION
AND SILLED LABOR
e. STA 'US AND EVALUATION OF TECHNOLOGY AND
RESEA CH
4. REFINERY STORAGE FOR CRUDE AND RE-
FINE PRODUCTS
Ind'cate number, type, capacity and location
of the tanks
Approved Fr Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP 9-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PETROLEUM
5. SOURCES, QUANTITIES, AND SUPPLIES OF
POWER, FUEL, WATER, CHEMICALS
6. REFINERY STATISTICS
a. THROUGHPUT AND PRODUCT YIELDS - Includ-
ing a description of petro-chemical and other
specialty products manufacture.
b. PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS AND QUALITY
c. DISPOSITION OF PRODUCTS BY TYPE AND
QUANTITY
7. FUTURE PLANS FOR EXPANSION, CON-
VERSION OR REDUCTION OF CAPACITY
C. Natural gas liquids processing plants
Where natural gas liquids plants are a present
or potential factor in an area, a detailed descrip-
tion will be given similar in scope and treatment
to that given to refineries under "B".
D. Substitute liquid fuels plants
In those few countries where production of sub-
stitute liquid fuels is of potential or major sig-
nificance, detailed treatment will be given, similar
in scope to that given to refineries under "B", in-
cluding an analysis of resources and availability
of the raw materials.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 4. Transportation
A. General
B. Transport facilities
1. PIPELINE SYSTEMS
a. LOCATION OF PIPELINES AND PUMP STATIONS -
With reference to producing fields, refineries, and
terminals.
C. DESCRIPTION
(1) Pipelines
(2) Pump stations
d. CAPACITIES - Types of crude and products
transported. Evaluation of adequacy of present
facilities
e. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR PROBLEMS
f. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
g. ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, INDICATING
OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL AND REGULATION
2. RAILWAY
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III,
Transportation and Telecommunications, where
railway transport is an important factor in crude
and product movements, indicate generally:
a. LOCATION AND BRIEF DESCRIPTION
b. NUMBER AND CAPACITY OF TANK CARS
C. ADEQUACY OF RAILWAY FACILITIES TO HANDLE
PRESENT AND ANTICIPATED CRUDE AND PRODUCTS
MOVEMENT
d. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
e. ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, INDICATING
OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL AND REGULATION
3. INLAND WATERWAYS
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III,
Transportation and Telecommunications, where in-
land waterway transport is an important factor in
crude and products movements, indicate generally:
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP 9-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMEN V
a. LOCATION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION
b. NUMBER AND CAPACITY OF MARINE TRANSPORT
FACILITIES EMPLOYED (TANKERS AND BARGES)
C. ADEQUACY OF MARINE FACILITIES TO HANDLE
b THROUGHPUT CAPACITY AND LOADING RATES
c. ADEQUACY OF PRESENT FACILITIES
d PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
3. 31ATERIALS HANDLING FACILITIES
PRESENT OR ANTICIPATED MOVEMENT OF CRUDE AND
a
PRODUCTS
d.
PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
b
e.
ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION,
INCLUDING C
OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL AND REGULATION
4. OCEAN TANKERS
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III,
Transportation and Telecommunications, where
ocean transport is an important factor in crude
and products movement, indicate: Number, type,
and quantity of tanker movements by terminals
C. Terminal facilities, land and marine
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III,
Transportation and Telecommunications, indicate :
1. STORAGE OF CRUDE AND PRODUCTS
a. LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
b. ADEQUACY OF PRESENT FACILITIES
C. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
2. LOADING AND HANDLING FACILITIES
FOR CRUDE AND PRODUCTS
a. LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
ADEQUACY OF PRESENT FACILITIES
PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
4. DMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, INDI-
CATI G OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL
AND EGULATION
D. - eneral evaluation of vulnerability of fa-
cilities relating to transportation
E. omments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and t ereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Section 5. Equipment xnd Materials
A. General
Degree of self-sufficiency or import dependence
for equipment and supplies for the petroleum in-
dustry.
B. Requirements
1. EXPLORATION
2. PRODUCTION
3. REFINING AND PROCESSING
4. TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE, AND TER-
MINALS
C. Availability
1. LOCAL
2. IMPORTED
D. omments on principal sources
Th s Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and hereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
ther by provide collectors of information with col-
lecti n targets. In this connection, the principal
sour es (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PETROLEUM
Section 6. Requirements and Supply
B. Over-all petroleum supply and demand
balance
C. Crude requirements, by quantity and type
1. FOR REFINERIES
2. EXPORTED
a. BY PORT OF EXIT
b. BY COUNTRY OF DESTINATION
C. MEANS OF TRANSPORT
D. Products requirements, by quantity and
type
1. DOMESTIC CIVILIAN
a. INLAND
b. BUNKER LIFTINGS
C. REFINERY FUEL CONSUMPTION AND LOSSES
2. MILITARY
a. FOR CONSUMPTION IN THE AREA
b. FOR SHIPMENT OVERSEAS
2. PRODUCTS
a. DOMESTIC
b. IMPORT
(1) By port of entry
(2) By country of source
(3) Means of transport
F. Stockpiles of crude and products in
tion to requirements
G. Factors affecting requirements and
ply
1. GEOGRAPHIC
2. ECONOMIC AND POLITICAL
a. DOMESTIC
b. INTERNATIONAL
rela-
H. Degree of self-sufficiency or import de-
pendence for requirements, analyzing spe-
cialized types of crude or products required
1. Probable future demand and supply situ-
ation
3. EXPORT
a. BY PORT OF EXIT
b. BY COUNTRY OF DESTINATION
C. MEANS OF TRANSPORT
E. Supply, by quantity and type
1. CRUDE
a. DOMESTIC
b. IMPORT
(1) By port of entry
(2) By country of source
(3) Means of transport
J. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP 9-01055A000200020001-6
SUPPLEMENT V
Section 7. Economic hnd Political
B. Economic
1. LABOR FORCE
a. AVAILABILITY, RELATIVE IMPORTANCE, AND
RELATIVE EFFICIENCY OF THE PETROLEUM LABOR FORCE
b. LABOR RELATIONS AND ORGANIZATION
(1) General development and present status
of labor organizations
(2) General pattern of wages, working con-
ditions, and special agreements
2. OWNERSHIP AND FINANCE
a. OWNERSHIP CHARACTERISTICS
(1) Nationality, financial control, and cor-
porate organization
(2) Factors influencing local participation
in the industry
(3) Local management
b. FINANCIAL
(1) Pattern of earnings and return on
capital
(2) Significant factors such as depletion
policies, reinvestment of earnings
(3) Effects of governmental regulations on
disposition of earnings and capital
C. Laws and regulations
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER V, Politi-
cal.
a OWNERSHIP OF SUBSOIL
b RIGHTS OR RESTRICTIONS ON OPERATORS, NA-
TIONAL AND FOREIGN
C. GRANTING OF MONOPOLIES
d ORGANIZATION OF COMPANIES
e. PARTICIPATION OF NATIONALS IN EMPLOY-
MENT MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL CONTROL
D. valuation of programs, policies, attitudes
1. GOVERNMENTAL
2. CORPORATE
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
whit information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sourc s (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 PETROLEUM
Section 8. Natural Gas
A. General
B. Importance to domestic economy
C. Sources
D. Resources
1. LOCATION
2. RESERVES
E. Characteristics
G. Gas utilization and quantities consumed
1. INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL
a. FUEL
b. CHEMICALS MANUFACTURE
2. RESIDENTIAL
3. REPRESSURING OF OIL FIELDS
4. AS FUEL IN OIL AND GAS FIELDS
5. FOR PRODUCTION OF NATURAL GAS
LIQUIDS
6. FLARED
F. Production
1. BY FIELDS AND BY COMPANIES
2. DRILLING AND PRODUCTION PROBLEMS
3. GATHERING, FIELD STORAGE, AND
POWER FACILITIES
4. GEOGRAPHIC FACTORS AFFECTING PRO-
DUCTION
5. EVALUATION OF FIELD DEVELOPMENT,
TECHNOLOGY AND RESEARCH
6. PRODUCTIVE CAPACITY OF THE FIELDS
H. Transportation
I. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Supplement
and thereby inform the user of the general credi-
bility to be accorded the intelligence contained in
the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
Security Information
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SPECIAL NIS
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
Section 1 Introduction
Section 2 Marine Climate
Section 3 Oceanography
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951
Special NIS - Marine Climate and Oceanography
OUTLINE
(6) Color
(7) Transparency
A.
Climatic controls
c. Sector 2
2. Ice
3. Sound conditions
B.
Surface winds
a. Sonar
C.
Surface air temperature
b. Sofar
D.
Precipitation
D.
Submarine geology
E.
Cloudiness
1. General
F.
Visibility and fog
2. Bathymetry
G.
Special weather phenomena
3. Bottom sediments
H.
Weather and military operations
a. Type and distribution
I.
Map appraisal and comments on prin-
b. Thickness
A.
cipal sources
1. Map and chart appraisal
2. Comments on principal sources
General circulation
E.
4. Geophysics
a. Gravity
b. Seismology
c. Magnetic anomalies
Marine biology
1. Fouling
2. Borers
B.
Sea and swell
3. Algae
C.
Sea water characteristics
4. Bioluminescence
1. Physical properties
a. General
b. Sector 1
(1) Temperature
(2) Salinity
(3) Density
(4) Relative buoyancy
(5) Electrical conductivity
F.
5. Dangerous animals
6. Human survival in water
7. Sonic animals
8. Deep scattering layer
Map appraisal and comments on
principal sources
1. Map and chart appraisal
2. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, D/B Editorial Instruc-
tions are to be followed in detail.
The Special NIS on Marine Climate and Ocean-
ography divides the world sea areas into ocean
basins. These ocean basins are further subdivided
into Parts, each of which is comparable to a chap-
ter in the other NIS. Each Part will consist of
three sections; however, the production unit will
be a Part.
Ocean Basins are designated as follows:
NIS 104
Atlantic Basin
12 Parts
NIS 105
Pacific Basin
12 Parts
NIS 106
Indian Basin
4 Parts
NIS 107
Arctic Basin
1 Part
NIS 108
Antarctic Basin
1 Part
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
deplqwffln~ SPECIAL NIS
Section 1. Introduction
Brief synopsis and overview treatment of only
the most significant aspects of location, size, shape,
general climatic and oceanographic conditions, as
they affect the Area's strategic potential, both of-
fensive and defensive. The treatment should not
be confined to boundaries of the NIS: Area when
proper appreciation requires overlapping into an
adjacent area.
Section 2. Marine Climate
A. Climatic controls
Discuss and identify the climate and climatic
controls of the NIS Area, including general circu-
lation and pressure distribution, air masses and
fronts, land and maritime influences, and energy
exchange.
B. Surface winds
Discuss and show by use of wind roses or other
graphic means by months the distribution of wind
force and direction.
C. Surface air temperature
Discuss and show by graphic means by months
the mean, mean maximum, mean minimum, abso-
lute maximum, and absolute minimum tempera-
tures and/or percentile cut-off points of the tem-
perature distribution (normally 5 percentile) for
maximum and minimum temperatures. Discuss
or show by graphic means by months the frequency
and distribution of temperatures below freezing
and the occurrence of snow.
D. Precipitation
Discuss and show by graphic means by months
the distribution, amount, and frequency of pre-
cipitation of all types.
E. Cloudiness
Discuss and show by graphic means the distribu-
tion and frequency by months of low cloud amount
(when data are available) and total cloud amount.
Discuss the dominant types and their causes.
(When appropriate, cloudiness may be treated in
combination with precipitation in Subsection D,
above, under the revised heading, Precipitation and
cloudiness.)
F. Visibility and fog
Discuss and show by graphic means by months
the distribution and frequency of reduced visibility.
Discuss and/or show by graphic means the distri-
bution and frequency of fog.
G. Special weather phenomena
Discuss and/or show by graphic means the occur-
rence of tropical and extratropical cyclones,
squalls, waterspouts, thunderstorms, and any other
phenomena of special importance or peculiar to the
given NIS Area.
H. Weather and military operations
Discuss the effects of weather and climate of the
Area on air and surface military operations.
1. Map appraisal and comments on principal
sources
1. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
An itemized discussion of the principal marine
climatic charts of the Area.
2. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section, and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable, and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
JUNE 1951 MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
Section 3. Oceanography
A. General circulation
A discussion of the general circulation of surface
and subsurface currents illustrated by means of
current vectors or streamlines, depending on data
available. One or more charts to be included
according to seasonal change or other variation
in the circulation pattern.
B. Sea and swell
A discussion of the distribution of wave heights
due to sea and swell and also the directions of the
sea and swell by month or season. The distribu-
tion of the directions of sea and swell will be shown
to eight points of the compass by means of roses
and the distribution of wave heights by histograms.
C. Sea water characteristics
2. ICE
Description of ice conditions in the area with
reference to the temperature charts. If the ice
conditions are sufficiently complicated, the position
of various kinds of ice will be shown by isoline
charts for average and severe winters.
3. SOUND CONDITIONS
a. SONAR - A discussion of sound ranging, de-
tailing echo and sound ranges in the Area. The
text will be illustrated by bar or other types of
diagrams of ranges over various types of bottoms,
b. SOFAR - A brief discussion, without illustra-
tion, stating whether or not a sofar channel exists
in the Area, and at what level it is likely to be
found.
1. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
a. GENERAL - A discussion of the general
physical properties of the NIS Area illustrated by
charts of isolines of temperature, salinity, and den-
sity, a chart of relative buoyancy, a diagram of
electrical conductivity, and a chart of color and
transparency. Number of charts to be included
will be determined by seasonal changes or other
variations of the physical properties.
b. SECTOR 1 - (Sector breakdown is made on
the basis of variations within the NIS Area and the
presence of isolated water bodies within the Area.
The number of sectors will vary from one Special
NIS to another.)
(1) Temperature - A discussion of the tem-
perature structure of the sector, illustrated by iso-
line charts in vertical planes.
(2) Salinity -A brief discussion of the sa-
linity of the sector, illustrated by isoline charts in
vertical planes.
(3) Density - A brief discussion of the den-
sity of the sector, illustrated by isoline charts in
vertical planes.
(4) Relative buoyancy - A brief text de-
scribing the relative buoyancy at various depths
in the sector, illustrated by vertical isoline charts.
(5) Electrical conductivity - A brief discus-
sion of the electrical conductivity of the sea water
of the sector, which may or may not be illustrated
by a chart of maximum and minimum conductivi-
ties, dependent upon the amount of variation of
this property.
(6) Color - A brief discussion of the water
color of the sector.
(7) Transparency - A brief discussion of
the visual transparency of the water.
c. SECTOR 2 (same subheadings as for Sector 1)
D. Submarine geology
1. GENERAL
A general discussion of the geological structural
features of the Area and the mode of formation of
the various sea sectors.
2. BATHYMETRY
A discussion of the type and distribution of topo-
graphic features illustrated by bathymetric charts.
3. BOTTOM SEDIMENTS
a. TYPE AND DISTRIBUTION - This part of the
text will either be illustrated by a bottom sediment
chart or will refer to existing H.O. bottom sediment
charts.
b. THICKNESS - Text may or may not be illus-
trated by charts and diagrams, depending on the
continuity of the available data.
4. GEOPHYSICS
a. GRAVITY - A discussion of the gravity
anomalies of the Area, illustrated by charts of ob-
served free air and isostatic gravity values.
b. SEISMOLOGY - A discussion of earthquakes,
volcanoes, and tsunamis, illustrated by charts of
seismic belts.
C. MAGNETIC ANOMALIES -A discussion of
magnetic anomalies, illustrated by chart of positive
and negative magnetic values.
E. Marine biology
A discussion of fouling in the Area, with empha-
sis on seasonal variation of attachment and dis-
tribution, illustrated by a chart or table if the data
are adequate.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
SPECIAL NIS
2. BORERS
A discussion of the marine boring organisms of
the Area, with emphasis on distribution and
seasonal variations of attack.
3. ALGAE
A description of the forms of algae and other
marine plants found and the water depths to which
they extend.
4. BIOLUMINESCENCE
A discussion of the likelihood of occurrence and
intensity of bioluminescence and the marine or-
ganisms causing the phenomenon.
5. DANGEROUS ANIMALS
A short description of the outstanding danger-
ous marine animals, with mention of distribution
and method of attack.
6. HUMAN SURVIVAL IN WATER
A brief discussion and chart of the length of
time a human can survive largely immersed in the
sea.
7. SONIC ANIMALS
A brief discussion of distribution and concentra-
tion of sonic marine animals.
8. DEEP SCATTERING LAYER
A brief discussion of the occurrence of the deep
sound-scattering layer, describing records of the
depth and location of deep scattering.
F. Map appraisal and comments on principal
sources
1. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
An itemized discussion of the principal oceano-
graphic charts of the Area.
2. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
This Subsection is to serve the following pur-
poses :
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal
source material used in preparing the Section, and
thereby inform the user of the general credibility
to be accorded the intelligence contained in the
Section.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable, and
thereby provide collectors of information with col-
lection targets. In this connection, the principal
sources (not necessarily all sources) actually used
should be indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-
 Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6
e9l1f E~EN~h4E
Approved For Release 1999/09/08 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000200020001-6